TempMaster OmniElite Design Level F Single Package Unit 70

PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE
NEW RELEASE
Form TPM2-NOM1 (917)
035-22722-110
TempMaster® OmniElite™
SINGLE PACKAGED UNITS
TMAL
DESIGN LEVEL F
LD16707A
70 THROUGH 105 TONS
Issue Date:
September 29, 2017
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017

IMPORTANT!
READ BEFORE PROCEEDING!
GENERAL SAFETY GUIDELINES
This equipment is a relatively complicated apparatus.
During rigging, installation, operation, maintenance,
or service, individuals may be exposed to certain components or conditions including, but not limited to:
heavy objects, refrigerants, materials under pressure,
rotating components, and both high and low voltage.
Each of these items has the potential, if misused or
handled improperly, to cause bodily injury or death. It
is the obligation and responsibility of rigging, installation, and operating/service personnel to identify and
recognize these inherent hazards, protect themselves,
and proceed safely in completing their tasks. Failure
to comply with any of these requirements could result
in serious damage to the equipment and the property in
which it is situated, as well as severe personal injury or
death to themselves and people at the site.
This document is intended for use by owner-authorized
rigging, installation, and operating/service personnel. It
is expected that these individuals possess independent
training that will enable them to perform their assigned
tasks properly and safely. It is essential that, prior to
performing any task on this equipment, this individual
shall have read and understood the on-product labels,
this document and any referenced materials. This individual shall also be familiar with and comply with
all applicable industry and governmental standards and
regulations pertaining to the task in question.
SAFETY SYMBOLS
The following symbols are used in this document to alert the reader to specific situations:
Indicates a possible hazardous situation
which will result in death or serious injury
if proper care is not taken.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which will result in possible injuries
or damage to equipment if proper care is
not taken.
Identifies a hazard which could lead to
damage to the machine, damage to other
equipment and/or environmental pollution if proper care is not taken or instructions and are not followed.
Highlights additional information useful
to the technician in completing the work
being performed properly.
External wiring, unless specified as an optional connection in the manufacturer’s product line, is not
to be connected inside the control cabinet. Devices such as relays, switches, transducers and controls
and any external wiring must not be installed inside the micro panel. All wiring must be in accordance
with TempMaster’s published specifications and must be performed only by a qualified electrician.
TempMaster will NOT be responsible for damage/problems resulting from improper connections to
the controls or application of improper control signals. Failure to follow this warning will void the
manufacturer’s warranty and cause serious damage to property or personal injury.
2
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017

CHANGEABILITY OF THIS DOCUMENT
In complying with TempMaster's policy for continuous product improvement, the information contained
in this document is subject to change without notice.
TempMaster makes no commitment to update or provide current information automatically to the manual
or product owner. Updated manuals, if applicable, can
be obtained by contacting the nearest TempMaster Service office or accessing the TempMaster website at
http://tempmasterhvac.com.
It is the responsibility of rigging, lifting, and operating/
service personnel to verify the applicability of these
documents to the equipment. If there is any question
regarding the applicability of these documents, rig-
ging, lifting, and operating/service personnel should
verify whether the equipment has been modified and
if current literature is available from the owner of the
equipment prior to performing any work on the chiller.
CHANGE BARS
Revisions made to this document are indicated with a
line along the left or right hand column in the area the
revision was made. These revisions are to technical information and any other changes in spelling, grammar
or formatting are not included.
ASSOCIATED LITERATURE
MANUAL DESCRIPTION
FORM NUMBER
Static Pressure Probe Installation Instructions
TPM-N1
High Altitude Accessory Kit Installation Instructions
TPM-N2
TempMaster OmniElite Start-Up Guide
TPM-SU1
Control Sequences Start-Up Guide
TPM-SU2
TEMPMASTER
3
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
NOMENCLATURE
BASE MODEL NUMBER
1 2 3 4
BASE PRODUCT TYPE
L : Scroll
A : Air-Cooled
M : Packaged Rooftop
5 6 7
NOMINAL CAPACITY
0
0
0
0
1
7
7
8
9
0
0
5
0
0
5
: 70-ton
: 75-ton
: 80-ton
: 90-ton
: 105-ton
8 9
APPLICATION
10
E : R-410A
V : VAV or SZVAV
T : TempMaster
C : Cooling Only
N : Natural Gas Heat
G : Natural Gas Heat SS HX
M : Modulating Gas Heat
E : Electric Heat
S : Steam Heat
H : Hot Water Heat
4
11 12
REFRIGERANT VOLTAGE
1
2
4
4
5
4
7 : 200 / 3 / 60
8 : 230 / 3 / 60
6 : 460 / 3 / 60
5 : 400 / 3 / 50
8 : 575 / 3 / 60
0 : 380 / 3 / 60
13 14
DUCT LOCATIONS
15 16
17
DESIGN SPECIAL GAS HEAT CAPACITY
N : No Gas Heat
L : Low (375 MBH)
M : Med (750 MBH)
H : High (1125 MBH)
B : Bottom Return
R : Rear Return
S : Side Return
X : Std. Product, IPU
S : Special Product, IPU
B : Bottom Supply
L : Left Supply
R : Right Supply
F
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................................................13
Ecological And Economical Design................................................................................................................. 13
Cooling and Heating...............................................................................................................................13
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ)..........................................................................................................................13
High-Efficiency Motors...........................................................................................................................13
Modulating Gas Heat..............................................................................................................................13
Condensing Section........................................................................................................................................ 13
Scroll Compressors................................................................................................................................13
Multiple Compressor Staging................................................................................................................. 13
Compressor Circuiting............................................................................................................................14
Compressor Sound Blankets.................................................................................................................. 14
Replaceable Core Filter Driers............................................................................................................... 14
Low Ambient Operation..........................................................................................................................14
Condenser Fan Motors...........................................................................................................................14
Coils.......................................................................................................................................................14
Condenser Coil Protection.....................................................................................................................14
Heating Section............................................................................................................................................... 14
Gas Heat Design and Control Options................................................................................................... 14
Staged Gas Heat....................................................................................................................................14
Electric....................................................................................................................................................14
Air Management.............................................................................................................................................. 14
DWDI Airfoil Fans...................................................................................................................................14
Building Pressure Control.......................................................................................................................14
Low Sound Options................................................................................................................................15
Variable Frequency Drives..................................................................................................................... 15
Fan Spring Isolation...............................................................................................................................15
Controls........................................................................................................................................................... 15
Indoor Air Quality ............................................................................................................................................ 15
Electrical.......................................................................................................................................................... 16
Service And Installation................................................................................................................................... 16
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION.................................................................................................................................17
Approvals........................................................................................................................................................ 17
Limitations....................................................................................................................................................... 17
Unit Inspection................................................................................................................................................. 17
Locations And Clearances............................................................................................................................... 18
Rigging And Handling...................................................................................................................................... 18
Electrical Data................................................................................................................................................. 26
Electrical Service Sizing.........................................................................................................................26
Load Definitions......................................................................................................................................26
Filters...............................................................................................................................................................29
Condensate Drain........................................................................................................................................... 29
Condensate Drain Piping.......................................................................................................................29
Condensate Drain Trap..........................................................................................................................29
Air Hoods For Economizer.............................................................................................................................. 30
Air Hoods For Fixed Outside Air (Units Without Economizer)......................................................................... 30
Air Hoods For Exhaust Air............................................................................................................................... 30
Field Wiring..................................................................................................................................................... 30
Space Sensor.........................................................................................................................................30
CO2 Sensor............................................................................................................................................30
TEMPMASTER
5
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT'D)
Occupied/Unoccupied Input...................................................................................................................30
Shutdown Input......................................................................................................................................30
Smoke Purge Input.................................................................................................................................30
VAV Heat Relay Output..........................................................................................................................31
Bacnet Communication................................................................................................................................... 31
Dirty Filter Switch............................................................................................................................................ 31
Alarm Contacts................................................................................................................................................ 31
Electrical Service Sizing.................................................................................................................................. 34
Transducer Pneumatic Tubing......................................................................................................................... 38
Static Pressure Control Plastic Tubing (Pneumatic Tubing)................................................................... 38
Duct Static Transducer...........................................................................................................................38
Building Pressure Transducer................................................................................................................ 38
Static Pressure Probe Installation.......................................................................................................... 38
Roof Curb Installation...................................................................................................................................... 38
General Information................................................................................................................................38
Duct System.................................................................................................................................................... 39
Duct Connection Guidelines................................................................................................................... 39
Sound And Vibration Transmission................................................................................................................. 39
Gas Heating.................................................................................................................................................... 40
Gas Piping..............................................................................................................................................40
Gas Connection......................................................................................................................................40
Gas Piping Recommendations............................................................................................................... 40
Combustion Vent....................................................................................................................................41
SECTION 3 – START-UP.........................................................................................................................................43
Crankcase Heaters.......................................................................................................................................... 43
Checking The System Prior To Initial Start (No Power)................................................................................... 43
Unit Checks............................................................................................................................................43
Unit Checks – Power Applied.......................................................................................................................... 45
Verifying Compressor Rotation............................................................................................................... 45
Compressor Oil Level Check.................................................................................................................. 45
Initial Start‑Up.................................................................................................................................................. 46
Refrigerant Charge ................................................................................................................................46
Checking Superheat and Subcooling..................................................................................................... 46
Subcooling (R-410A)..............................................................................................................................46
Superheat (R-410A)...............................................................................................................................48
Leak Checking........................................................................................................................................48
Gas Heat Models....................................................................................................................................48
Pre-Start Checks....................................................................................................................................49
Post Start Checks...................................................................................................................................50
Manifold Pressure – Modulating Gas.............................................................................................................. 51
Manifold Gas Pressure Adjustment........................................................................................................ 51
SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE................................................................................................................................53
General............................................................................................................................................................ 53
Periodic Maintenance – Monthly..................................................................................................................... 53
Filters......................................................................................................................................................53
Linkages.................................................................................................................................................53
Compressors..........................................................................................................................................53
Fan Bearing Lubrication ........................................................................................................................53
6
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT'D)
Recommended Lubricant for Fan Bearings............................................................................................ 53
Condenser Coils.....................................................................................................................................54
Periodic Maintenance – Three To Six Months................................................................................................. 54
Motor Bearing Lubrication......................................................................................................................54
Belt Tension............................................................................................................................................54
Periodic Maintenance – Yearly........................................................................................................................ 54
Entire Unit Inspection.............................................................................................................................54
Sheave Alignment..................................................................................................................................54
Belts.......................................................................................................................................................54
Belt Replacement...................................................................................................................................55
Filter Drier Replacement........................................................................................................................55
Forward Curved Fans.............................................................................................................................56
Fan Motor...............................................................................................................................................56
Fan Shaft Bearings.................................................................................................................................57
Mounting Details.....................................................................................................................................57
Bearing Lock Devices.............................................................................................................................57
Eccentric Type........................................................................................................................................58
Torquing of Set Screws .........................................................................................................................59
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION..........................................................................................................61
Unit Type......................................................................................................................................................... 61
Occupancy/Unoccupancy Determination........................................................................................................ 61
Current Operating Mode.................................................................................................................................. 61
Variable Air Volume (VAV)......................................................................................................................61
Single Zone VAV (SZVAV)......................................................................................................................62
Unit Mode Determination................................................................................................................................. 62
Single Zone VAV....................................................................................................................................62
Supply Air Temp Active Setpoint Determination.............................................................................................. 63
Single Zone VAV....................................................................................................................................63
Variable Air Volume................................................................................................................................64
Compressor Control........................................................................................................................................ 65
Compressor Operation With Economizer............................................................................................... 65
Compressor Staging Sequence............................................................................................................. 66
Fast Compressor Start .........................................................................................................................67
Compressor Data...................................................................................................................................67
Compressor Safety Circuit.....................................................................................................................68
Suction Temperature Monitoring............................................................................................................ 70
System Pump Down Control.................................................................................................................. 70
High Discharge Pressure Unloading...................................................................................................... 70
Low Ambient Lockout.............................................................................................................................71
Evaporator Superheat Calculation......................................................................................................... 72
Supply Fan Operation..................................................................................................................................... 72
Variable Air Volume (VAV)......................................................................................................................72
Single Zone VAV....................................................................................................................................73
Condenser Fan Operation............................................................................................................................... 73
Low Ambient Condenser Fan Operation................................................................................................ 74
Economizer..................................................................................................................................................... 74
Dry Bulb..................................................................................................................................................74
Single Enthalpy......................................................................................................................................74
Dual Enthalpy.........................................................................................................................................75
Best Method...........................................................................................................................................75
TEMPMASTER
7
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT'D)
Supply Air Tempering...................................................................................................................................... 75
Modulating Gas Heat, Hot Water and Steam......................................................................................... 75
Staged Gas or Electric Heat...................................................................................................................76
Heating Operation........................................................................................................................................... 76
Electric Heat...........................................................................................................................................76
Staged Gas Heat....................................................................................................................................77
Modulating Gas Heat..............................................................................................................................80
Hot Water/Steam Heat...........................................................................................................................83
Morning Warm Up..................................................................................................................................84
Adaptive Morning Warm Up................................................................................................................... 85
Exhaust Fan Operation................................................................................................................................... 86
On/Off Control Based On Building Pressure.......................................................................................... 86
Modulating Damper with Fixed Speed Exhaust..................................................................................... 87
Modulating Exhaust with VFD................................................................................................................ 87
VFD Exhaust Fan Control BAS.............................................................................................................. 88
Return Fan Operation...................................................................................................................................... 88
VFD Return Fan without Exhaust........................................................................................................... 88
VFD Return Fan with Exhaust................................................................................................................ 88
VFD Return Fan with Exhaust BAS Control........................................................................................... 89
Ventilation System .......................................................................................................................................... 89
Overview ...............................................................................................................................................89
2-Position Damper .................................................................................................................................90
Standard Damper w/ Demand Ventilation ............................................................................................. 90
Standard Damper w/ Fixed Minimum..................................................................................................... 90
Tek-Air: Air Measuring Station................................................................................................................ 91
TEK Air Full IAQ.....................................................................................................................................93
Air Measurement Station Auto Zero....................................................................................................... 93
Air Measurement Station Field Adjustment............................................................................................ 93
TEK Air Full IAQ Air Measurement Station ............................................................................................ 93
Comfort Ventilation.......................................................................................................................................... 94
The unit switches into the OCCUPIED HEATING OR OCCUPIED COOLING mode as a result of a space
sensor demand for cooling or heating. .................................................................................................................94
Smoke Purge................................................................................................................................................... 94
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER.........................................................................................97
User Interface Control Center......................................................................................................................... 97
Data Entry Keys.....................................................................................................................................97
Navigation Keys.....................................................................................................................................98
Menu Select Keys..................................................................................................................................98
Setpoints....................................................................................................................................................... 110
Program......................................................................................................................................................... 110
Options.......................................................................................................................................................... 110
Date / Time.................................................................................................................................................... 110
Schedule....................................................................................................................................................... 111
Operating Hours / Start Counter.................................................................................................................... 112
Printer............................................................................................................................................................ 113
Set Up.................................................................................................................................................. 113
Report Section...................................................................................................................................... 113
Service.......................................................................................................................................................... 114
History........................................................................................................................................................... 123
8
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT'D)
Password....................................................................................................................................................... 124
Power Up Banner.......................................................................................................................................... 125
Connecting BAS to a TempMaster OmniElite Unit with the IPU Controller................................................... 125
BACnet MS/TP.............................................................................................................................................. 125
BACnet IP...................................................................................................................................................... 125
LON...............................................................................................................................................................127
N2..................................................................................................................................................................128
Other Protocols............................................................................................................................................. 128
End of Line Termination................................................................................................................................. 128
Miscellaneous................................................................................................................................................ 128
Technical Support.......................................................................................................................................... 128
SECTION 7 – PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS AND OPTIONS............................................................................141
SECTION 8 – SERVICE.........................................................................................................................................149
Analog Input Operation................................................................................................................................. 149
Temperature Sensors...........................................................................................................................149
Duct Pressure Transducer....................................................................................................................149
Building Pressure Transducer.............................................................................................................. 150
Return Fan Pressure Transducer......................................................................................................... 150
Discharge Pressure Transducer........................................................................................................... 151
Suction Pressure Transducer............................................................................................................... 151
Humidity Sensors.................................................................................................................................152
CO2 Sensor..........................................................................................................................................152
Furnace Status Input............................................................................................................................152
Faults.............................................................................................................................................................154
Multi Media Card........................................................................................................................................... 163
Temperature.................................................................................................................................................. 165
TEMPMASTER
9
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017

LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 - Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Unit ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������13
FIGURE 2 - Double Sloped SS Drain Pan��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������15
FIGURE 3 - Unit Clearances�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������18
FIGURE 4 - Lifting Lug Locations����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������19
FIGURE 5 - Drain Trap Showing Water Location During Draw Through Operation Stages������������������������������������ 29
FIGURE 6 - Trap Detail For Draw Through Application�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������29
FIGURE 7 - Field Control Wiring - Inputs����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������32
FIGURE 8 - Field Control Wiring - Outputs�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������33
FIGURE 9 - Single-Point Power Supply Wiring�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������35
FIGURE 10 - Single-Point Power Supply Wiring With Non-Fused Disconnect������������������������������������������������������� 36
FIGURE 11 - Dual-Point Power Supply Wiring��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������37
FIGURE 12 - Static Pressure Probe Location���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������39
FIGURE 13 - Typical Gas Piping Connection����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������40
FIGURE 14 - Combustion Vent�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������41
FIGURE 15 - Fan Isolator Spring Bolts (Total Of 8)������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������44
FIGURE 16 - Manifold Gas Pressure Adjustment���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������51
FIGURE 17 - Sheave Alignment������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������54
FIGURE 18 - Fan Data Plate - Belt Tension������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������55
FIGURE 19 - Belt Tensioning Gauge�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������55
FIGURE 20 - Example Of FC Fan Shaft/Wheel Marking����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������56
FIGURE 21 - Bearing With Setscrew Type Locking Device������������������������������������������������������������������������������������57
FIGURE 22 - Bearing With Eccentric Cam��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������58
FIGURE 23 - Eccentric Cam Locking Collar Bearing Installation����������������������������������������������������������������������������58
FIGURE 24 - Split Bearing��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������59
FIGURE 25 - Operational Mode : Single Zone VAV������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������63
FIGURE 26 - Active Sat Setpoint Vs. Supply Air Temp RST Voltage����������������������������������������������������������������������64
FIGURE 27 - Active Sat Setpoint Vs. Outside Air Temp������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������64
FIGURE 28 - active Sat Setpoint Vs. Return Air Temp��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������65
FIGURE 29 - Active Sat Setpoint Vs. Supply Fan Speed����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������65
FIGURE 30 - Active DSP Setpoint Vs. Duct Static Pres RST Voltage�������������������������������������������������������������������� 66
FIGURE 31 - Modulating Gas Heat Staging Sequence������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������80
FIGURE 32 - Sat Error��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������82
FIGURE 33 - Active Return Plenum Pressure Setpoint Vs. Exhaust Output���������������������������������������������������������� 89
FIGURE 35 - tEK-aIR Probe and Transducer���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������91
FIGURE 36 - tEK-aIR Monitor���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������91
FIGURE 34 - Fixed Minimum Ventilation Control - OA Damper vs. Supply Fan VFD Speed���������������������������������� 91
FIGURE 37 - EK Air Full IAQ Flow Control�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������93
FIGURE 38 - TEK Air Full IAQ Economizer�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������93
FIGURE 39 - User Interface Control Panel�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������97
FIGURE 40 - IPU Controller Port Locations����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������126
FIGURE 41 - E-Link Connections and Addressing Instructions����������������������������������������������������������������������������127
FIGURE 42 - I/O Control Board�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������155
FIGURE 43 - I/O Control Board - Binary Outputs��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������156
FIGURE 44 - I/O Control Board - Binary Inputs����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������157
FIGURE 45 - I/O Control Board - Analog Outputs�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������157
FIGURE 46 - I/O Control Board - Analog Inputs (See Table 49 For Pin Outs)������������������������������������������������������ 157
10
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017

LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 - Voltage Limitations �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������17
TABLE 2 - Lifting Lug Locations������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������19
TABLE 3 - Physical Data�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������20
TABLE 4 - Electrical Data���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������27
TABLE 5 - Airflow And Entering Air/Ambient Limitations�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������28
TABLE 6 - Pipe Sizes����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������40
TABLE 7 - R410-A Pressure / Temperature Chart �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������47
TABLE 8 - Low Fire / High Fire Pressure - Staged�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������50
TABLE 9 - Low Fire / High Fire - Modulating����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������50
TABLE 10 - Low Fire (Inducer Fan On Low, 1.4" W.C. Input To Maxitrol Valve)����������������������������������������������������� 51
TABLE 11 - High Fire (Inducer Fan On High, 3.5" W.C. Input To Maxitrol Valve)��������������������������������������������������� 51
TABLE 12 - Gas Heat Performance Data���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������52
TABLE 13 - Fan Bearing – Lubrication Intervals ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������53
TABLE 14 - Set Screw Torque��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������59
TABLE 15 - Active Sat Setpoint Determination, Zone Temperature������������������������������������������������������������������������63
TABLE 16 - 70-105 Ton Units���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������66
TABLE 17 - Supply Fan VFD Speed Determination�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������73
TABLE 18 - CFM�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������77
TABLE 19 - Heat Stages�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������77
TABLE 20 - CFM�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������78
TABLE 21 - Heat Stages�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������78
TABLE 22 - Status��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������99
TABLE 23 - Unit Data��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������100
TABLE 24 - Cooling����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������101
TABLE 25 - Compressor Systems (1, 2, Or 3)������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������102
TABLE 26 - Supply System�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������103
TABLE 27 - Heating����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������104
TABLE 28 - Economizer����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������107
TABLE 29 - Ventilation������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������108
TABLE 30 - Exhaust����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������109
TABLE 31 - Operating Hours / Start Counter�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 112
TABLE 32 - Service����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 115
TABLE 33 - BACnet MS/TP, MODBUS, BACnet IP����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������129
TABLE 34 - Definitions������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������141
TABLE 35 - Temperature Sensor Resistance�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������149
TABLE 36 - Duct Pressure Transducer�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������150
TABLE 37 - Building Pressure Transducer Output������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������150
TABLE 38 - Return Fan Pressure Transducer Output������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������150
TABLE 39 - Pressure Transducers�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������151
TABLE 40 - Humidity Sensor Outputs�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������152
TABLE 41 - CO2 Sensor Output���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 152
TABLE 42 - Furnace Status Input Modulating Gas Heat��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������153
TABLE 43 - Furnace Status Input Staged Gas Heat���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������153
TABLE 44 - I/O Control Board - Analog Input Pin Outs�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������158
TABLE 45 - Warning Description Table�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������159
TABLE 46 - Fault Auto - Reset������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������161
TABLE 47 - Faults Lockout�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������162
TABLE 48 - Data Log Error State��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������164
TABLE 49 - Data Log Error Log Detail������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������164
TABLE 50 - SI Metric Conversion�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������165
TEMPMASTER
11
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
12
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION
1
ECOLOGICAL AND ECONOMICAL DESIGN
Modulating Gas Heat
The first packaged RTU with R410A optimized design.
Fully modulating gas heat and greater steps of capacity control offer superior off-design performance while
maintaining optimum occupant comfort.
Cooling and Heating
Superior operating performance provides lower operating costs. Smaller steps of cooling capacity provide
tighter control of building environment and occupant
comfort while optimizing energy efficiency.
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ)
Outside air economizers provide energy savings in free
cooling mode, and can provide a healthier and more
comfortable building environment by introducing
fresh outside air into the building as needed. Indoor
Air Quality (IAQ) requirements for building ventilation and comfort are controlled through the microprocessor control panel. Optional airflow measurement
provides an accurate means of tracking air quality and
alerting the occupants or building owner to unhealthy
situations.
High-Efficiency Motors
High-efficiency motors are available for optimum energy efficiency. All motors used on the Packaged Rooftop air conditioner meet U.S. EPACT 1992 minimum
requirements.
CONDENSING SECTION
Scroll Compressors
Reliable, efficient, trouble-free operation is the true
measure of a packaged rooftop’s value. That’s why the
TempMaster® OmniElite™ Packaged Rooftop air conditioners use established scroll-compressor technology
to deliver dependable, economical performance in a
wide range of applications. With the Packaged Rooftop Unit, you get the latest generation of compressor
enhancements added to the scroll’s inherent strengths.
The simplicity of a hermetic scroll compressor allows
the use of fewer moving parts to minimize breakdown.
Multiple Compressor Staging
Through the use of the scroll compressor, the TempMaster OmniElite has the ability to stage its cooling by
enabling and disabling multiple single stage compressors on multiple circuits. These compressors are manifolded together in three independent circuits.
00406vip
Figure 1 - PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
TEMPMASTER
13
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION
Compressor Circuiting
Condenser Coil Protection
The TempMaster OmniElite is designed so that only
two scroll compressors are in tandem within one refrigeration circuit. This means more reliable compressors, and less equipment down time. With multiple circuits, if a compressor should ever fail on one circuit,
the other circuit/s will remain operational to work to
maintain occupied loads. The Packaged Rooftop Unit
system has two or three circuits in the unit depending
on the size.
The TempMaster OmniElite is available with either a
wire mesh covering or louvered panels for optimum
coil protection. In applications where unauthorized
personnel may have access to the units, or the units
may be susceptible to severe weather conditions such
as hail, the louvered panel provides protection around
the entire condensing section giving the maximum protection to the coils and refrigerant components.
Compressor Sound Blankets
Optional factory installed sound blankets can be installed to further reduce compressor sound attenuation.
Replaceable Core Filter Driers
The optional replaceable core filter driers provide a
convenient means for maintaining and optimizing the
unit's refrigeration system. Eliminating additional field
penetrations into the refrigerant circuit, which could
lead to potential problems, reduce the worry of refrigerant circuit contamination.
Low Ambient Operation
Head-pressure control is accomplished via a VFD
motor controller rather than an inefficient and noisy
condenser fan damper. By varying the speed of the
condenser fan, better control and quieter operation is
obtained during the colder months. Low ambient controls are available on all systems offering higher rooftop cooling capacity than competitive units.
Condenser Fan Motors
The condenser fan motors used on the Packaged Rooftop Unit are Totally Enclosed Air Over (TEAO) to provide maximum durability through any season.
Coils
Condenser coils are microchannel type and made of a
single material to avoid galvanic corrosion due to dissimilar metals. Coils and headers are brazed as one
piece. Integral sub cooling is included. The design
working pressure of the coil is 650 PSIG (45 bar).
HEATING SECTION
Gas Heat Design and Control Options
Include an unsurpassed 24:1 turndown modulating gas
furnace, and staged heating control. A Staged furnace
is also available that allows up to six stages of capacity.
Staged Gas Heat
The rooftop gas furnace is an induced-draft gas furnace
designed for high efficiency and reliability. The furnace uses an aluminized steel tubular heat exchanger
and operates at temperatures sufficient to prevent acidic exhaust gases from condensing in the heat exchanger
at low fire rates, unlike drum and tube style furnaces
that generate condensation formation.
Electric
The TempMaster OmniElite is also available with
an electrical heater that can range from 40kW up to
250kW. Depending on the size of the heat required, the
Packaged Rooftop Unit can have three to six steps of
control helping to provide tighter control of the supply
and zone conditioned air. With the utilization of this
multi-step function, the TempMaster OmniElite can effectively reduce energy consumption by bringing on
smaller stages of heat while maintaining the maximum
level of comfort.
AIR MANAGEMENT
DWDI Airfoil Fans
High efficiency fans are used to improve application
flexibility, and address sound and application concerns.
Building Pressure Control
Return fans, exhaust fans, and barometric relief dampers are available to meet building pressure control requirements. Select the most appropriate option for a
given application.
14
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION
Low Sound Options
1
Allow for application of the unit in sound-sensitive applications such as theaters and downtown areas. Contact TempMaster for more details on site-specific requirements.
Variable Frequency Drives
When a VAV unit is ordered, it comes standard with
variable frequency drives (VFDs). The VFD can optimize a systems performance by modulating the supply
fan motor speed to reduce energy consumption by as
much as 40% while maximizing occupant comfort.
Fan Spring Isolation
Two-inch spring isolation is used to prevent vibration
transmission from the rooftop unit’s supply fan to the
building.
CONTROLS
• Rooftop Controller – The ColdFire™ processorbased controller uses the latest in processor technology to provide the highest level of rooftop control with BACnet open protocol communication
capabilities. An 80-character display and keypad
are standard for simple, and easy to understand
manipulation of control setpoints and readout of
operating parameters and diagnostics. Shutdown
and alarm faults are all recorded in memory, and
include a time and day stamp for easy troubleshooting.
• BACnet – The TempMaster OmniElite can be
adapted to operate with any building automation
system that is BACnet compatible making it the
most flexible large commercial rooftop units on
the market.
INDOOR AIR QUALITY
• Double Sloped Stainless Steel Drain Pan – The
standard Stainless Steel drain pan meets ASHRAE
62 requirements for condensate drainage to improve indoor air quality. Solid wall liners encase
insulation and prevent moisture from damage.
Additional benefits include easy cleanability and
isolates insulation from conditioned airstream.
TEMPMASTER
Figure 2 - DOUBLE SLOPED SS DRAIN PAN
LDO8022
This is a visual reference only. Actual
drain pan pitch will vary.
• Double Wall Construction – is the standard construction of the unit and incorporates powder coated pre-fabricated outer panels and corner post for
maximum exterior surface protection.
• Factory Shrinkwrap – all Packaged Rooftop
Units can be ordered from the factory with an optional factory-fresh shrinkwrap packaging. This
eliminates the contractor's worries about dirt and
debris clogging up condenser coils or moisture
leaking into the air handler on the units way to the
job site or rigging yard.
• Demand Ventilation – can be incorporated into
the unit to improve indoor air quality and help
manage indoor pollutants such as CO2 or other
harmful airborne contaminates out of the occupied
spaces for maximum comfort and safety. Activation of this sequence can easily be accomplished
using CO2 sensors connected to the unit. The rooftop unit controller includes two analog inputs for
sensors to sense indoor and/or outdoor CO2 levels
to maintain optimum occupant comfort and safety.
CO2 sensors are typically used with demand ventilation; however other sensors may be applied to
control indoor contaminants such as volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
• Smoke Purge – is also available through the User
Interface to evacuate smoke due to fire from a
room or zone.
• Filtration – The TempMaster OmniElite is configured for various types of filtration to meet the
different needs and requirements of today's rooftop applications, including 2-inch throwaway,
pleated, carbon, and cleanable filters and 12-inch
high efficiency rigid filters.
15
SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION
ELECTRICAL
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SERVICE AND INSTALLATION
• Single Point Power – The unit comes standard
with single point power connections to make installation quick and easy.
• Access Doors – Full-sized access doors provide
easy access into the unit for routine maintenance
and inspection.
• Dual Point Power – can be factory installed for
applications that require the mechanical heating
and cooling functions to be separated from the air
handling functions. This enables the unit to be operated in an emergency condition while minimizing power consumption.
• Service Valves – Oversized service valves to provide isolation and quick reclamation and charging
of system refrigerant are available to minimize
downtime and simplify the service and repair task.
• Unit-Mounted Disconnect – is available as an
option to minimize time at installation of equipment and to reduce necessary field installed items.
• Convenience Outlet – For maintenance tasks
requiring power tools, an optional 110V GFCI
power supply can power lights, drills or any other
power hand tool needed.
• Factory Run-Tested – Each unit is subjected to a
series of quality assurance checks as well as an automated quality control process before being runtested. Fans and drives are balanced at the factory
during testing. The factory run-test ensures safe
proper operation when the unit is installed, and
reduces installation and commissioning time.
• Replaceable core filter drier option provides a
means to remove moisture, dirt and debris from
the refrigeration circuit in the event it is opened.
16
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
APPROVALS
Designed certified by ETL and CETL as follows:
1. For use as a forced air furnace with cooling unit
(gas heat models).
2. For outdoor installation only.
3. For installation on combustible material and may
be installed directly on combustible flooring or
Class A, Class B or Class C roof covering materials.
Refer to Table 5 on page 28 for airflow and entering
air/ambient conditions limitations, and Table 1 on page
17 for voltage limitations.
If the VAV boxes in the conditioned space
have hydronic heating coils installed, it
is the responsibility of the installing contractor to take appropriate measures to
protect the hydronic coils against low unit
supply air temperatures that could result
in the freeze up and rupture of the coils.
4. For use with natural gas or LP.
UNIT INSPECTION
5. When used with LP propane gas one of the following conversion kits must be installed before
the gas heat section is fired:
Immediately upon receiving the unit, it should be inspected for possible damage, which may have occurred
during transit. If damage is evident, it should be noted
in the carrier’s freight bill. A written request for inspection by the carrier’s agent should be made at once.
6. 375,000 BTU Input - 385-01866-001
7. 750,000 BTU Input - 385-01866-002
8. 1,125,000 BTU Input - 385-01866-003
Not suitable for use with conventional venting systems.
LIMITATIONS
The installation of this unit must conform to local
building codes, or in the absence of local codes, with
ANSI 223.1 Natural Fuel Gas Code and /or CAN/CGA
B149 installation codes.
In U.S.A.:
1. National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA No. 70 Latest Edition.
2. National Fuel Gas Code Z223.1 - Latest Edition.
To ensure warranty coverage, this equipment must be commissioned and serviced
by an authorized TempMaster service
mechanic or a qualified service person
experienced in packaged rooftop installation. Installation must comply with all
applicable codes, particularly in regard to
electrical wiring and other safety elements
such as relief valves, HP cut-out settings,
design working pressures, and ventilation
requirements consistent with the amount
and type of refrigerant charge.
Lethal voltages exist within the control
panels. Before servicing, open and tag
all disconnect switches.
Table 1 - VOLTAGE LIMITATIONS
NOMINAL
VOLTAGE
UNIT
POWER
SUPPLY
VOLTAGE VARIATIONS
MIN. VOLTS
MAX. VOLTS
600
575-3-60
540
630
480
480-3-60
432
504
240
230-3-60
216
252
208
200-3-60
182
218
3. Gas-Fired Central Furnace Standard ANSI Z21.47
- Latest Edition.
4. Local gas utility requirements.
TEMPMASTER
17
2
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
LOCATIONS AND CLEARANCES
The clearances shown are to provide
adequate condenser airflow and service
access to inside the unit. Additional clearance should be considered for component
replacement such as compressors, evaporator coils, and supply or exhaust fans.
The following guidelines should be used to select a
suitable location for unit installation.
1. Unit is designed for outdoor installation only.
2. Condenser coils must have an unlimited supply of
air. Where a choice of location is possible, position the unit on either north or east side of building.
While it is a common practice to operate
the fan as soon as possible (air movement
during construction)on the job site, the
incomplete ductwork and missing diffuser
grilles will greatly reduce air resistance
and will allow the fan to operate beyond
design parameters. This practice may
result in water carry over and flooding of
the unit. Also, the supply fan motor may
overamp and become damaged.
3. Suitable for roof mount on curb.
4. Roof structures must be able to support the weight
of the unit and its accessories. Unit must be installed on a solid level roof curb or appropriate
angle iron frame.
5. Maintain level tolerance to 1/2 inch across width
and 2 inches along the length.
Unit clearances are shown in Figure 3 on page 18.
CP
A I R F L OW
CO
DP
10'
FS
CC
72"
R E AR
_F
MB
NOTES:
1. Ten foot clearance minimal over the top of the condensing unit.
2. Only one adjacent wall can exceed unit height.
3. Twelve foot clearance required to adjacent units.
4. Eight foot service access recommended on one side.
EE
FE
72"
F R ONT
72"
S IDE
72"
S IDE
F R ONT V IE W
LD06685A
5. Economizer and exhaust hoods, where applicable, are folded
inside unit for shipment.
6. Dim. is to outside of lifting lugs.
Figure 3 - UNIT CLEARANCES
RIGGING AND HANDLING
Proper rigging and handling of the equipment is mandatory during unloading and setting it into position to
retain warranty status. All lifting lugs must be used to
prevent twisting and damage to the unit.
Care must be taken to keep the unit in the upright position during rigging and to prevent damage to the watertight seams in the unit casing. Avoid unnecessary jarring or rough handling.
See Figure 4 on page 19 for number and location of
the lifting lugs by unit size. It is also mandatory that an
18
experienced and reliable rigger be selected to handle
unloading and final placement of the equipment. The
rigger must be advised that the unit contains internal
components and that it be handled in an upright position. Care must be exercised to avoid twisting the
equipment structure.
Unit weights are listed under Table 3 on page 20 in
this manual. These weights must be referred to when
selecting a crane for rigging and figuring roof weight
loads. Contact your TempMaster Sales Office if you
have any questions regarding unit weights.
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
Table 2 - LIFTING LUG LOCATIONS
See
Figure 4 on
page 19
For Rigging
Model
Cabinet
Use Figure
A
B
C
D
E
050
051
060
061
050
051
060
061
120
130
150
070
070
075
075
080
080
090
090
105
105
120
130
150
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
EXTENDED
EXTENDED
EXTENDED
EXTENDED
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
EXTENDED
STANDARD
EXTENDED
STANDARD
EXTENDED
STANDARD
EXTENDED
STANDARD
EXTENDED
EXTENDED
EXTENDED
EXTENDED
Lift Points Dimensions Taken From End Opposite Condenser
#1
Inch Metric
16.9 430
16.9 430
16.9 430
16.9 430
16.9 430
16.9 430
16.9 430
16.9 430
22.8 578
22.8 578
22.8 578
29.9 759
29.9 759
29.9 759
29.9 759
29.9 759
29.9 759
29.9 759
29.9 759
29.9 759
29.9 759
22.8 578
22.8 578
22.8 578
#2
Inch Metric
79.3 2015
79.3 2015
79.3 2015
79.3 2015
79.3 2015
79.3 2015
79.3 2015
79.3 2015
117.6 2981
117.6 2981
117.6 2981
77.0 1956
77.0 1956
77.0 1956
77.0 1956
77.0 1956
77.0 1956
99.0 2515
99.0 2515
99.0 2515
99.0 2515
117.6 2981
117.6 2981
117.6 2981
#3
Inch Metric
147.9 3757
147.9 3757
147.9 3757
147.9 3757
147.9 3757
147.9 3757
147.9 3757
147.9 3757
181.9 4591
181.9 4591
181.9 4591
197.0 5004
197.0 5004
197.0 5004
197.0 5004
197.0 5004
197.0 4826
190.0 4826
190.0 4826
190.0 4826
190.0 4826
181.9 4591
181.9 4591
181.9 4591
#4
Inch Metric
207.8 5278
207.8 5278
207.8 5278
207.8 5278
207.8 5278
207.8 5278
207.8 5278
207.8 5278
239.4 6172
239.4 6172
239.4 6172
270.5 6871
270.5 6871
270.5 6871
270.5 6871
270.5 6871
270.5 6871
302.5 7684
302.5 7684
302.5 7684
302.5 7684
239.4 6172
239.4 6172
239.4 6172
#5
Inch Metric
315.0 8802
315.0 8802
315.0 8802
315.0 8802
254.6 6467
254.6 6467
254.6 6467
254.6 6467
296.3 7526
296.3 7526
296.3 7526
318.6 8093
381.6 9693
318.6 8093
381.6 9693
318.6 8093
381.6 9693
353.1 8970
422.1 10722
353.1 8970
422.1 10722
307.0 7798
307.0 7798
307.0 7798
#6
Inch Metric
361.9 9191
361.9 9191
361.9 9191
361.9 9191
406.4 10323
406.4 10323
406.4 10323
373.8 9493
436.8 11093
373.8 9493
436.8 11093
373.8 9493
436.8 11093
408.3 10370
477.3 12122
408.3 10370
477.3 12122
360.3 9151
360.3 9151
360.3 9151
2
#7
Inch Metric
428.9 10894
491.9 12494
428.9 10894
491.9 12494
428.9 10894
491.9 12491
463.4 11770
532.4 13522
463.4 11770
532.4 13522
470.4 11949
470.4 11949
470.4 11949
LD18266
Figure 4 - LIFTING LUG LOCATIONS
TEMPMASTER
19
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
Table 3 - PHYSICAL DATA
MODEL SIZE
General Data
Standard cabinet length without hoods
(inches)
Extended cabinet length without hoods
(inches)
Width (Inches)
Height (Inches)
70 TON MODELS
070
454
517
92
92
11,817
13,027
1045
1044
125
45
486
40 kW/480/3/60 2 Steps Electric Heat
80 kW/208/3/60 or 108 kW/240/3/60 6
Steps Electric Heat
108 kW/480/3/60 3 steps Electric Heat
NA
470
150 kW/480/3/60 4 Steps Electric Heat
490
200 kW/480/3/60 6 Steps Electric Heat
510
250 kW/480/3/60 7 Steps Electric Heat
530
Condenser Wire Guard
40
Copper Condenser Coils (additional)
617
Copper Evaporator Coils (additional)
280
Hot Water Coil
318
Steam Heating Coil
236
Diffuser2
53
NA
2
535
Final filters, racks only2
297
Roof Curb Weights (Lbs.)
1,020
577
Compressor Data
Capacity Steps (Qty x %)
20
30.8
Refrigerant Charge (R410A EXTD Cabinet) *
SYS 1 - LB (KG)
38.2
SYS 2 - LB (KG)
32.9
SYS 3 - LB (KG)
33.5
* Always verify proper charge values using the charge
information printed on the rating plate on the unit
Supply Fan and Drive
4x10, 2x13
Scroll
1
Type
FC
Size
28-25
Motor Size Range (min. to max. HP)
7.5-50
Air Flow Range (min. to max. CFM)
14000-32000
Static Pressure Range (min. to max. ESP)
45
1125 MBH Gas Heat
Type
SYS 3 - LB (KG)
Type
324
Quantity/Size (Nominal HP)
30.2
146
750 MBH Gas Heat
14” Open Condenser Roof Curb
35.5
SYS 2 - LB (KG)
Optional Airfoil Supply Fan
162
14” Full Perimeter Roof Curb
SYS 1 - LB (KG)
Quantity
375 MBH Gas Heat
Final filters
070
Refrigerant Charge (R410A STD Cabinet) *
Weights (Lbs.) (base unit, no option)
Base cabinet, cooling only with economizer
Extended cabinet, cooling only with
economizer
Option Weights (Lbs.)
Power Exhaust (Blower, mtr, mtr base, fan
skid, mod damper & hood)
Power Exhaust (Blower, mtr, mtr base, fan
skid, VFD,baro damper & hood)
100% AMS
(Measurement Station & Mounting)
25/75% AMS
(Measurement Station & Mounting)
Min. AMS
(Measurement Station & Mounting)
Barometric only
MODEL SIZE
Quantity
Size
0-4”
1/1
AF
32
Motor Size Range (min. to max. HP)
7.5-50
Air Flow Range (min. to max. CFM)
14s000-32000
Static Pressure Range (min. to max. ESP)
0-6”
Exhaust Fan
Quantity
2
Type
FC
Size
18-18
Motor Size Range (min. to max. HP)
5-20
Air Flow Range (min. to max. CFM)
0-27000
Static Pressure Range (min. to max. ESP)
0-1”
Optional Exhaust Fan
Quantity Fans/Motors
2/1
Type
FC
Size
20-18
Motor Size Range (min. to max. HP)
5-30
Airflow Range (min. to max. CFM)
Static pressure range (min. to max., IWG)
0-32000
0-2”
Optional Return Fan
Quantity Fans/Motors
2/2
Type
Plenum
Size
270
Motor Size Range (min. to max. HP)
Airflow Range (min. to max. CFM)
Static pressure range (min. to max., IWG)
5-30
0-32000
0-3”
4x15, 2x20
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
TABLE 3 - PHYSICAL DATA (CONT'D)
70 TON MODELS
MODEL SIZE
070
Evaporator Coil
MODEL SIZE
070
Size (square feet)
56.9
Quantity
Number of rows / fins per inch
31/17
Size (length x width) (in.)
Tube Diameter / Enhanced Surface
3/8"
10 / 15
25X16 / 25x20
Total Filter Face Area (square feet)
77.1
Model Size Condenser Coil (R410A Microchannel)
Filters - 12” rigid 95% in Post-filter Position
Size (square feet)
162.2
Quantity
Number of rows / fins per inch
1/21
Diameter
1 mm
Number of channels
18
Condenser Fans
Quantity
Size (length x width) (in.)
Total Filter Face Area (square feet)
Prop.
Diameter (inches)
36
Power (hp each)
2
Staged Furnace Sizes
(input/output/stages)
Filters - 2” Throwaway (Pre-Filter Position)
Quantity
10 / 15
25X16 / 25x20
Total Filter Face Area (square feet)
77.1
Filters - 2” Cleanable (Pre-Filter Position)
Quantity
Size (length x width) (in.)
Total Filter Face Area (square feet)
Quantity
Size (length x width) (in.)
Total Filter Face Area (square feet)
Filters -12” Rigid 65%, 2” 30% Prefilter
(Pre-Filter Position)
Quantity
Size (length x width) (in.)
Total Filter Face Area (square feet)
Filters -12” Rigid 95%, 2” 30% Prefilter
(Pre-Filter Position)
Quantity
Size (length x width) (in.)
Total Filter Face Area (square feet)
Natural
Propane
Airflow Range (min. to max. CFM)
Inlet Gas Pressure Range
(min. to max. IWG)
10 / 15
25X16 / 25x20
77.1
Filters - 2” Pleated, 30% Efficient (Pre-Filter Position)
10 / 15
Modulating Furnace Sizes
(input/output/turndown)
25X16 / 25x20
77.1
2/8/9
16x20/25x
16/25x20
55.8
Natural
Inlet Gas Pressure Range
(min. to max. IWG)
Propane
Minimum Heat Exchanger Entering
Supply Air Temperature
Airflow Range (min. to max. CFM)
375 mbh / 300
mbh / 2 stages
750 mbh / 600
mbh / 4 stages
1125 mbh /
900 mbh / 6
stages
4.5–10.5” w.c.
11.0–13.0” w.c.
6,950-36,000
375 mbh /
300 mbh / 8:1
turndown
750 mbh / 600
mbh / 16:1
turndown
1125 mbh /
900 mbh /
24:1 turndown
4.5–10.5” w.c.
11.0–13.0” w.c.
40.0 °F
8,250-36,000
Electric Heaters
Size Range (min. to max. kW)
2/8/9
16x20/25x
16/25x20
55.8
2/7/9
16x20/25x
16/25x20
55.1
Gas Furnace
6
Type
Size (length x width) (in.)
2
Filters - 2” Carbon (Pre-Filter Position)
Heating Steps1
Minimum Outside Air Temp. For Mech.
Cig.
Low Ambient Option Min. Outside Air
Temp
80-200
2-7
45
0
1. Electric heat steps and airflow range depends on voltage and
size. Consult the air pressure drop tables for specific number of
steps for a given voltage.
2. Weights are for components only and need to be added to the
extended cabinet weights. The diffuser is required in the extended
cabinet for any unit with hot water or final filter option.
TEMPMASTER
21
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
TABLE 3 - PHYSICAL DATA (CONT'D)
75 - 105 TON MODELS
MODEL SIZE
075
080
090
105
Standard cabinet length without hoods
(inches)
454
454
488
488
Extended cabinet length without hoods
(inches)
517
517
557
557
Width (Inches)
92
92
92
92
Height (Inches)
92
92
92
92
Base cabinet, cooling only with economizer
11,880
12,066
12,171
12,391
Extended cabinet, cooling only with
economizer
13,090
13,276
13,467
14,687
Power Exhaust (Blower, mtr, mtr base, fan
skid, mod damper & hood)
1045
1045
1074
1074
Power Exhaust (Blower, mtr, mtr base, fan
skid, VFD,baro damper & hood)
1044
1044
1068
1068
100% AMS (Measurement Station &
Mounting)
125
125
140
140
25/75% AMS (Measurement Station &
Mounting)
146
146
162
162
Min. AMS (Measurement Station & Mounting)
45
45
50
50
Barometric only
45
45
55
55
375 MBH Gas Heat
162
162
162
162
750 MBH Gas Heat
324
324
324
324
1050 MBH Gas Heat
486
486
486
486
40 kW/415/3/60 or 40 kW/480/3/60 2 Steps
Electric Heat
NA
NA
NA
NA
80 kW/208/3/60 or 108 kW/240/3/60 5 Steps
Electric Heat
510
510
NA
NA
108 kW/415/3/60 4 steps Electric Heat
470
470
510
510
150 kW/415/3/60 5 Steps Electric Heat
490
490
530
530
200 kW/415/3/60 or 200 kW/480/3/60 6
Steps Electric Heat
510
510
550
550
250 kW/480/3/60 7 Steps Electric Heat
NA
NA
570
570
General Data
Weights (Lbs.) (base unit, no option)
Option Weights (Lbs.)
Condenser Wire Guard
40
40
45
45
Copper Condenser Coils (additional)
617
1,058
1,190
1,190
Copper Evaporator Coils (additional)
460
280
460
580
Hot water coil
318
318
318
318
Steam heating coil
236
236
236
236
Diffuser3
53
53
53
53
Final filters3
535
535
565
565
Final filters, racks only3
297
297
327
327
1,020
1,020
1,040
1,040
577
577
615
615
Roof Curb Weights (Lbs.)
14” Full Perimeter Roof Curb
14” Open Condenser Roof Curb
22
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
TABLE 3 - PHYSICAL DATA (CONT'D)
75 - 105 TON MODELS
MODEL SIZE
075
080
090
105
4x11, 2x13
4x13, 2x11
2x13, 4x15
4x20, 2x15
2
Compressor Data
Quantity/Size (Nominal HP)
Type
Scroll
Scroll
Scroll
Scroll
4x15, 2x20
4x18, 2x14
4x18, 2x14
4x18, 2x14
SYS 1 - LB (KG)
38
38
41.5
42
SYS 2 - LB (KG)
32.4
35.3
32
32
SYS 3 - LB (KG)
33
33
36.2
38
SYS 1 - LB (KG)
40.7
40.7
44.2
44.7
SYS 2 - LB (KG)
35.1
38
34.7
34.7
SYS 3 - LB (KG)
35.7
35.7
38.9
40.7
Capacity Steps (Qty x %)
Refrigerant Charge (R410a STD Cabinet)
Refrigerant Charge (R410a EXTD Cabinet)
Supply Fan and Drive
Quantity
1
1
1
1
Type
FC
FC
FC
FC
Size
28-25
28-25
28-28
28-28
Motor Size Range (min. to max. HP)
Air Flow Range (min. to max. cfm)
Static Pressure Range (min. to max. ESP)
7.5-50
7.5-50
7.5-60
7.5-60
14000-32000
14000-32000
18000-36000
18000-36000
0-4”
0-4”
0-4”
0-4”
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1
AF
AF
AF
AF
Optional Airfoil Supply Fan
Quantity
Type
Size
Motor Size Range (min. to max. HP)
Air Flow Range (min. to max. cfm)
Static Pressure Range (min. to max. ESP)
32
32
32
32
7.5-50
7.5-50
7.5-60
7.5-60
14000-32000
14000-32000
18000-36000
18000-36000
0-6”
0-6”
0-6”
0-6”
2
2
2
2
Exhaust Fan
Quantity
Type
FC
FC
FC
FC
Size
18-18
18-18
18-18
18-18
Motor Size Range (min. to max. HP)
Air Flow Range (min. to max. cfm)
Static Pressure Range (min. to max. ESP)
5-20
5-20
5-20
5-20
0-20000
0-20000
0-20000
0-27000
0-1”
0-1”
0-1”
0-1”
Optional Exhaust Fan
Quantity Fans/Motors
2/1
2/1
2/1
2/1
Type
FC
FC
FC
FC
Size
20-18
20-18
20-18
20-18
Motor Size Range (min. to max. HP)
5-30
5-30
5-30
5-30
0-32000
0-32000
0-36000
0-36000
0-2”
0-2”
0-2”
0-2”
Airflow Range (min. to max. CFM)
Static pressure range (min. to max., IWG)
TEMPMASTER
23
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
TABLE 3 - PHYSICAL DATA (CONT'D)
75 - 105 TON MODELS
MODEL SIZE
075
080
090
105
2/2
2/2
2/2
2/2
Type
Plenum
Plenum
Plenum
Plenum
Size
270
270
270
270
Motor Size Range (min. to max. HP)
5-30
5-30
5-40
5-40
0-32000
0-32000
0-36000
0-36000
0-3”
0-3”
0-3”
0-3”
Size (square feet)
56.9
56.9
56.9
56.9
Number of rows/fins per inch
3/17
3/17
3/17
3/17
Tube Diameter (enhanced tubes)
3/8"
3/8"
3/8"
3/8"
Size (square feet)
162.2
162.2
162.2
162.2
Number of rows/fins per inch
1/21
1/21
1/21
1/21
Diameter
1 mm
1 mm
1 mm
1 mm
18
18
18
18
Optional Return Fan
Quantity Fans/Motors
Airflow Range (min. to max. CFM)
Static pressure range (min. to max., IWG)
Evaporator Coil R410A
Condenser Coil (R410A Microchannel)
Number of channels
Condenser Fans
Quantity
6
6
6
6
Prop.
Prop.
Prop.
Prop.
Diameter (inches)
36
36
36
36
Power (hp each)
2
2
2
2
10 / 15
10 / 15
12 / 18
12 / 18
25X16 / 25x20
25X16 / 25x20
25X16 / 25x20
25X16 / 25x20
77.1
77.1
92.5
92.5
Type
Filters - 2” Throwaway (Pre-Filter Position)
Quantity
Size (length x width) (in.)
Total Filter Face Area (square feet)
Filters - 2” Cleanable (Pre-Filter Position)
Quantity
Size (length x width) (in.)
Total Filter Face Area (square feet)
10 / 15
10 / 15
12 / 18
12 / 18
25X16 / 25x20
25X16 / 25x20
25X16 / 25x20
25X16 / 25x20
77.1
77.1
92.5
92.5
10 / 15
10 / 15
12 / 18
12 / 18
25X16 / 25x20
25X16 / 25x20
25X16 / 25x20
25X16 / 25x20
77.1
77.1
92.5
92.5
2/8/9
2/8/9
8 / 12
8 / 12
16x20/25x16/25x20
16x20/25x16/25x20
25x16/25x20
25x16/25x20
55.8
55.8
61.6
61.6
Filters - 2” Pleated, 30% Efficient (Pre-Filter Position)
Quantity
Size (length x width) (in.)
Total Filter Face Area (square feet)
Filters -12” Rigid 65%, 2” 30% Prefilter (Pre-Filter Position)
Quantity
Size (length x width) (in.)
Total Filter Face Area (square feet)
24
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
TABLE 3 - PHYSICAL DATA (CONT'D)
75 - 105 TON MODELS
MODEL SIZE
075
080
090
105
2/8/9
2/8/9
8 / 12
8 / 12
16x20/25x16/25x20
16x20/25x16/25x20
25x16/25x20
25x16/25x20
55.8
55.8
61.6
61.6
2
Filters -12” Rigid 95%, 2” 30% Prefilter (Pre-Filter Position)
Quantity
Size (length x width) (in.)
Total Filter Face Area (square feet)
Filters - 2” Carbon (Pre-Filter Position)
Quantity
10 / 15
10 / 15
12 / 18
12 / 18
25X16 / 25x20
25X16 / 25x20
25X16 / 25x20
25X16 / 25x20
77.1
77.1
92.5
92.5
2/7/9
2/7/9
7 / 12
7 / 12
16x20/25x16/25x20
16x20/25x16/25x20
25x16/25x20
25x16/25x20
55.1
55.1
61.1
61.1
Size (length x width) (in.)
Total Filter Face Area (square feet)
Filters - 12” Rigid 95% In Post-Filter Position
Quantity
Size (length x width) (in.)
Total Filter Face Area (square feet)
Gas Furnace
375 mbh / 300 mbh / 2 stages
Staged Furnace Sizes
(input/output/stages)
Inlet Gas Pressure Range
(min. to max. iwg)
750 mbh / 600 mbh / 4 stages
1125 mbh / 900 mbh / 6 stages
Natural
4.5–10.5” w.c.
Propane
11.0–13.0” w.c.
The Heat Exchanger
40 °F
Minimum Air ON Temperature
Airflow Range (min. to max. cfm)
6,950-36,000
15,150-36,000
375 mbh / 300 mbh / 8:1 turndown
Modulating Furnace Sizes
(input/output/turndown)
Inlet Gas Pressure Range
(min. to max. IWG)
11,150-36,000
750 mbh / 600 mbh / 16:1 turndown
1125 mbh / 900 mbh / 24:1 turndown
Natural
4.5–10.5” w.c.
Propane
11.0–13.0” w.c.
Minimum Heat Exchanger Entering Supply
Air Temperature
Airflow Range (min. to max. cfm)
40 °F
8,250-36,000
11,150-36,000
15,150-36,000
80-200
80-200
108-250
108-250
Heating steps1
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-8
Minimum Outside Air Temp. for Mech. Cig.
45
45
45
45
Low Ambient Option Min. Outside Air Temp
0
0
0
0
Electric Heaters
Size Range (min. to max. kW)
1. E
lectric heat steps and airflow range depends on voltage and size. Consult the air pressure drop tables for specific number of steps for a
given voltage.
3. W
eights are for components only and need to be added to the extended cabinet weights. The diffuser is required in the extended cabinet for
any unit with hot water or final filter option.
TEMPMASTER
25
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
ELECTRICAL DATA
Electrical Service Sizing
In order to use the electrical service required for the
cooling-only Packaged Rooftop Unit, use the appropriate calculations listed below from U.L. 1995. Based on
the configuration of the rooftop, the calculations will
yield different MCA (minimum circuit ampacity), and
MOP (maximum overcurrent protection).
Using the following load definitions and calculations,
determine the correct electrical sizing for your unit. All
concurrent load conditions must be considered in the
calculations, and you must use the highest value for
any combination of loads.
Load Definitions
Use the following calculations to determine MCA
and MOP for units supplied with a single-point power
connection:
MCA = (1.25 x LOAD1) + LOAD2 + LOAD3 + LOAD4
MOP = (2.25 x LOAD1) + LOAD2 + LOAD3 + LOAD4
If the MOP does not equal a standard current rating
of an overcurrent protective device, then the marked
maximum rating is to be the next lower standard rating.
However, if the device selected for MOP is less than
the MCA, then select the lowest standard maximum
fuse size greater than or equal to the MCA.
• LOAD1 is the current of the largest motor – compressor or fan motor.
• LOAD2 is the sum of the remaining motor currents that may run concurrently with LOAD
• LOAD3 is the current of the electric heaters –
zero for cooling only units.
• LOAD4 is the sum of any remaining currents
greater than or equal to 1.0 amp.
26
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
Table 4 - ELECTRICAL DATA
SUPPLY, EXHAUST, RETURN FAN MOTOR DATA
2
OPEN MOTOR PREMIUM EFFICIENCY
OPEN MOTOR HIGH EFFICIENCY
MOTOR HP
208/3/60
FLA
230/3/60
FLA
460/3/60
FLA
575/3/60
FLA
5
16.1
13.2
6.6
7.5
25.0
21.6
10.8
10
33.0
28.0
15
44.8
40.6
20
61.0
25
30
MOTOR HP
208/3/60
FLA
230/3/60
FLA
460/3/60
FLA
575/3/60
FLA
5.3
5
14.9
8.2
7.5
21.3
12.8
6.4
5.2
20.0
10.0
7.4
14.0
11.0
10
20.3
16.2
15
29.0
25.8
12.9
10.3
40.7
35.4
17.7
14.1
50.0
25.0
20.0
20
54.3
47.0
23.5
18.9
74.0
62.0
31.0
87.0
72.0
36.0
23.8
25
69.5
60.0
30.0
24.2
28.0
30
81.0
70.0
35.0
28.0
92.0
46.0
37.4
40
113.0
98.0
49.0
38.8
40
111.0
50
144.0
124.0
62.0
49.2
50
137.0
114.0
57.0
46.0
60
167.0
144.0
72.0
57.4
60
160.0
136.0
68.0
56.0
TOTALLY ENCLOSED HIGH EFFICIENCY
TOTALLY ENCLOSED PREMIUM EFFICIENCY
MOTOR HP
208/3/60
FLA
230/3/60
FLA
460/3/60
FLA
575/3/60
FLA
MOTOR HP
208/3/60
FLA
230/3/60
FLA
460/3/60
FLA
575/3/60
FLA
5
15.2
13.4
6.7
5.4
5
14.6
13.0
6.5
5.2
7.5
24.8
20.4
10.2
8.2
7.5
22.0
20.0
10.0
8.0
10
29.5
28.4
14.2
11.4
10
28.5
25.0
12.5
10.0
15
43.7
38.8
19.4
15.5
15
42.4
37.0
18.5
14.8
20
60.0
48.0
24.0
19.1
20
56.0
48.0
24.0
19.0
25
73.0
60.0
30.0
24.2
25
68.4
60.0
30.0
23.9
30
87.0
74.0
37.0
29.6
30
83.0
72.0
36.0
29.0
40
113.0
94.0
47.0
38.0
40
107.0
94.0
47.0
37.0
50
140.0
118.0
59.0
47.4
50
131.0
118.0
59.0
46.0
60
161.0
140.0
70.0
56.0
60
159.0
138.0
69.0
55.0
CONDENSER FAN MOTORS / TOTAL
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
NOMINAL
TONS
208/3/60
FLA
230/3/60
FLA
460/3/60
FLA
575/3/60
FLA
70
43.8
37.2
18.6
15
75
43.8
37.2
18.6
15
80
43.8
37.2
18.6
15
85
43.8
37.2
18.6
15
90
43.8
37.2
18.6
15
95
43.8
37.2
18.6
15
105
43.8
37.2
18.6
15
TEMPMASTER
NOMINAL VOLTAGE
DESCRIPTION
208/3/60
AMPS
230/3/60
AMPS
460/3/60
AMPS
575/3/60
AMPS
TMAL070-105
4.8
4.3
2.2
1.7
27
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
TABLE 4 – ELECTRICAL DATA (CONT'D)
COMPRESSOR DATA R-410A
NOMINAL VOLTAGE
MODEL
070
075
080
090
105
COMPRESSOR
MODEL
208-230/360
460-3-60
575/3/60
RLA
LRA
RLA
LRA
RLA
LRA
80
1A&B
ZP120
33.3
239
17.9
125
12.8
2A&B
ZP120
33.3
239
17.9
125
12.8
80
3A&B
ZP137
48.0
245
18.6
125
14.7
100
1A&B
ZP137
48.0
245
18.6
125
14.7
100
2A&B
ZP137
48.0
245
18.6
125
14.7
100
3A&B
ZP154
51.3
300
22.4
150
19.8
109
1A&B
ZP137
48.0
245
18.6
125
14.7
100
2A&B
ZP154
51.3
300
22.4
150
19.8
109
3A&B
ZP154
51.3
300
22.4
150
19.8
109
1A&B
ZP154
51.3
300
22.4
150
19.8
109
2A&B
ZP182
55.7
340
26.9
172
23.7
132
3A&B
ZP182
55.7
340
26.9
172
23.7
132
1A&B
ZP235
73.9
505
30.4
225
24.6
180
2A&B
ZP182
55.7
340
26.9
172
23.7
132
3A&B
ZP235
73.9
505
30.4
225
24.6
180
All data given applies to individual compressors
ELECTRIC HEAT
NOMINAL VOLTAGE
KW
208/3/60
AMPS
230/3/60
AMPS
460/3/60
AMPS
575/3/60
AMPS
40
96
96
48
40
80
193
193
96
80
108
260
260
130
109
150
—
—
181
151
200
—
—
241
201
250
—
—
301
251
Table 5 - AIRFLOW AND ENTERING AIR/AMBIENT LIMITATIONS
Limitations
Model Size
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
90
105
Minimum Airflow at Standard
Design Conditions. CFM*
(min to max)
10000 22500
12000 24000
14000 27000
14000 27000
14000 32000
14000 32000
14000 32000
18000 36000
20000 36000
Entering Wet Bulb Temp (°F)
(min/max)
57/75
57/75
57/75
57/75
57/75
57/75
57/75
57/75
57/75
Entering Dry Bulb Temp (°F)
(min/max)
68/90
68/90
68/90
68/90
68/90
68/90
68/90
68/90
68/90
Ambient Temp (°F)
without Low Amb option
50/120
50/120
50/120
50/120
50/120
50/120
50/120
50/120
50/120
Ambient Temp (°F)
with Low Amb option
0/120
0/120
0/120
0/120
0/120
0/120
0/120
0/120
0/120
* Cooling Only Units
28
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
FILTERS
CONDENSATE DRAIN
Two-inch “throwaway” filters are standard and factory
installed in a filter rack located prior to the evaporator
coil. Any optional pre-filters ordered with the unit will
be shipped inside the unit, but must be filed installed.
The unit can also be ordered with an extended cabinet
and 95% efficient post-filters. These post-filters are installed at the factory.
Condensate Drain Piping
Pre-filters must always be installed ahead of the evaporator coil. Post and pre-filters must be kept clean and
replaced with the same size and type as shipped with
the unit. Dirty filters will reduce the capacity of the unit
and may result in frosted coils and safety shutdowns.
Required filter sizes and qualities are shown in Table
3 on page 20. The unit should never be operated for
any length of time without the proper filters installed
in the unit.
DRAIN
PAN
TRAP
The two cooling coils are located in the units so that the
supply air is drawn through them. This results in the
condensate being subjected to negative (-) static pressure. Unless some means of pressure equalization is
provided in the condensate drain, the air rushing back
through the drainpipe will cause the condensate to
build up in the drain pan. As the unit continues to operate, the accumulated water will be carried with the air
stream, overfilling the drain pan causing possible water
leaks into the supply duct and/or causing water damage
in the building. A trap must be installed to prevent this
condensate water build-up (see Figure 5 on page 29
and Figure 6 on page 29).
H Must Be At Least
1 Plus Fan Total
Static Pressure
H
DRAIN
NIPPLE
X
NO.1 - FAN OFF
"X"= 1/2 "H"
DRAIN
PAN
LD05370
Figure 6 - TRAP DETAIL FOR DRAW THROUGH
APPLICATION
NO. 2 - TRAP CONDITION WHEN FAN STARTS
DRAIN
PAN
Condensate Drain Trap
COOLING COIL
DRAIN PAN
NO. 3 - FAN RUNNING AND CONDENSATE
LD06342-1
Figure 5 - DRAIN TRAP SHOWING WATER
LOCATION DURING DRAW THROUGH
OPERATION STAGES
For “Draw-through” applications install a trapped condensate drain line at unit drain connection (see Figure
6 on page 29) according to all governing codes. “H”
dimension must be at least 1 inch greater than design
Total Static Pressure (TSP) of fan.
The trap and drain lines should be protected from
freezing. Plumbing must conform to local codes. Use
a sealing compound on male pipe threads. Install condensate drain lines from the 1-1/4 inch NPT female
connections on the unit to an open drain.
The unit must be properly trapped and
charged with water before the units are
started.
TEMPMASTER
29
2
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
AIR HOODS FOR ECONOMIZER
CO2 Sensor
There are three economizer outside air intake hoods
provided with the unit. The hood on the end of the unit
is factory mounted. The two front and rear hoods are
made operational per the following instructions:
The optional CO2 sensor is used for demand ventilation. When ordered a CO2 sensor is installed in the outdoor and return air stream.
1. Remove the screws holding the economizer hood
shipping covers in place. Discard covers.
2. Apply a bead of RTV sealer along the edge of
both hoods and each pivot joint to prevent water
leakage.
3. Rotate the hoods out (each hood is hinged). Secure
the hoods with screws along the top and sides.
4. Seal any unused screw holes with RTV or by replacing the screw.
AIR HOODS FOR FIXED OUTSIDE AIR (UNITS
WITHOUT ECONOMIZER)
These hoods are factory installed. The dampers may be
adjusted by loosening the thumb screw, turning the lever to the desired position, and retightening the thumb
screw.
AIR HOODS FOR EXHAUST AIR
When furnished, these hoods and dampers are factory
installed.
FIELD WIRING
Figure 7 on page 32 and Figure 8 on page 33
show the field control wiring to CTB1. All field control
wiring is field supplied and installed.
Space Sensor
The space sensor (if used) can be used on either VAV
units. For SZVAV units, only a space sensor can be
used. This can be hardwired or a communicated signal.
Even if a thermostat is wired to the rooftop unit, the
space sensor will supply space air temperature values
if connected. When mounting a space sensor, it should
be located on an inside wall approximately 56 inches
above the floor where it will not be subject to drafts,
sun exposure or heat from electrical fixtures or appliances. Shielded Wire must be used that is grounded
at control panel only.
30
Occupied/Unoccupied Input
A contact-closure input is provided for hard-wiring an
external device such as a central time clock, a thermostat with scheduling or BAS, or a manual switch.
• Contact Closure = Occupied
• Contacts Open = Unoccupied
Note that 24 volts (24VAC), terminal 1 of the terminal
block CTB1, must be used as the 24VAC source for
switching the contact to the Unit Controller Occupied/
Unoccupied input. Use of any power source external to
the controller will result in damage to the Unit Controller.
Shutdown Input
A contact-closure input is provided for emergency
shutdown of the unit. When this circuit is open, the unit
shuts down with supply fan, exhaust fan turned OFF,
and outside air dampers are closed. This state is maintained until the input is activated (contacts closed).
• Contact Closed = Normal Operation
• Contacts Open = Shutdown
Note that a jumper is installed at the factory between
terminals 3 (24VAC) and terminal 4 (SD) of the low
voltage terminal block CTBl. When a field shutdown
input is used, the jumper must be removed and the external dry contact connected between terminal 3 and 4.
The connection of an external power supply to these
terminals will result in damage to the Unit Controller.
Smoke Purge Input
There are three field connection points for Smoke
Purge operation, “Smoke Purge l,” “Smoke Purge 2,”
and “Smoke Purge 3.” When a field supplied dry contact is closed between terminal 3 (24VAC) and terminal
6 (SMK1), the unit will initiate whatever smoke purge
sequence has been programmed into the Unit Controller for Smoke Purge Sequence 1. When a field supplied
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
dry contact is closed between terminal 3 (24VAC) and
terminal 7 (SMK2), the unit will initiate whatever
smoke purge sequence has been programmed into the
Unit Controller for Smoke Purge Sequence 2. When a
field supplied dry contact is closed between terminal 3
(24VAC) and terminal 8 (SMK3), the unit will initiate
whatever smoke purge sequence has been programmed
into the Unit Controller for Smoke Purge Sequence 3.
Refer to "Comfort Ventilation" on page 94 for additional programming information. The Smoke Purge
operating state will be maintained until the contact is
opened.
No external power source may be used
when field wiring any of the above inputs.
The 24VAC source on terminal 3 of the
terminal block CTB1 must be used as the
power source when field wiring these inputs, as shown in Figure 7 and 8. Failure
to do so will result in improper unit operation and damage to the Unit Controller.
VAV Heat Relay Output
This is a field wired OUTPUT that is used to command the VAV boxes to full open during morning
warm up operation. This 24VAC signal should have
a maximum current draw not to exceed 20VA. If the
VA requirement of the VAV boxes approaches 20VA,
isolation relays should be field supplied and installed
to avoid overloading the unit power supply.
Note that this signal is used to drive the VAV boxes
open in morning warm up operations. Failure to drive
the VAV boxes open during this mode of operation can
cause unit shutdown and/or damage to the ductwork
due to over pressurization.
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
BACNET COMMUNICATION
The Packaged Rooftop Unit can communicate to any
building automation system using BACnet MS/TP
communication protocol.
The field connections are made by connecting shielded
two-wire cable to Port 1 on the IPU control board.
Refer to BACnet MS/TP on page 125 for additional
information.
DIRTY FILTER SWITCH
On units with a dirty filter switch option, an adjustable
differential pressure switch is installed to monitor the
pressure drop across the filters. When the pressure drop
across the filters exceeds the setting of the switch the
switch closes sending a 24-volt signal to the Unit Controller. The Unit Controller posts a trouble fault in the
service memory buffer; but will not shut down the unit.
ALARM CONTACTS
The Unit Controller has three sets dry Alarm Contacts
that are closed during a fault. If the unit experiences a
Supply Fan Fault, the Unit Controller will close a set
of dry contacts between terminals 28 and 29 of the low
voltage terminal block (CTB1). If the unit experiences
a Cooling/Heating Fault, the Unit Controller will close
a set of dry contacts between terminals 30 and 31 of the
low voltage terminal block (CTB1). If the unit experiences a Sensor/Misc. Fault, the Unit Controller will
close a set of dry contacts between terminals 32 and 33
of the low voltage terminal block (CTB1).
The VAV Heat Relay Output cannot exceed a current draw of 20VA. If the power
requirements of the VAV boxes exceed this
amount, isolation relays must be field supplied and installed to prevent overloading
the Unit Controller power supply.
TEMPMASTER
31
2
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
CTB1 FIELD CONTROL WIRING (INPUTS)
24V (24VAC)
or
COM (24VAC
COM)
24V - (24VAC)
SD - (SHUTDOWN)
1
OCC - (OCCUPIED/UNOCCUPIED)
SMK1 - (SMOKE PURGE 1)
SMK2 - (SMOKE PURGE 2)
SMK3 - (SMOKE PURGE 3)
ZR + (ZONE TEMP SENSOR +)
ZR - (ZONE TEMP SENSOR -)
SHLD - (SHIELD (GND))
+5V (SAT SP + 5V)
Supply Air Temp. Setpoint Reset
SAT + (SUPPLY AIR TRMP RESET +)
SAT - (SUPPLY AIR TRMP RESET -)
Duct Pressure Setpoint Reset
Or
Supply Fan Sync Command
25
+5V (DUCT STATIC SP + 5V)
26
DSP+ (DUCT STATIC RESET +)
22
DSP- (DUCT STATIC RESET -)
LD08184C
WIRING NOTES
1. Wiring shown indicates typical wiring.
2. All wiring is Class 2, low voltage.
3. Maximum power available from the 24VAC terminal is 40VA.
4. Use shielded wire where shown.
5. Potentiometer application shown. As an alternative, signal inputs can be driven from an analog output of a third party controller.
Note: Input resistance is 15 K ohms.
Figure 7 - FIELD CONTROL WIRING - INPUTS
32
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
CTB1 FIELD CONTROL WIRNG (OUTPUTS)
2
AL1C
Supply Fan Fault AL1
AL2C
Cooling/Heating Fault
AL2
AL3C
Sensor Misc. Fault AL3
HRC
HR
AL1
AL2
AL3
HR
ld08186C
WIRING NOTES:
1. Wiring shown indicates typical wiring. Refer to the IOM for more detailed wiring methods and options.
2. All wiring is Class 2, low voltage.
3. Maximum power available from the 24VAC terminal is 40VA.
4. Use shielded wire where shown.
5. Relay contacts suitable for pilot duty to 1A from 24VAC to 120VAC.
Figure 8 - FIELD CONTROL WIRING - OUTPUTS
TEMPMASTER
33
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
POWER WIRING
Field wiring to the unit must conform to provisions
of National Electrical Code (NEC) ANSI / NFPA 70
latest edition and / or local ordinances. The unit must
be electrically grounded in accordance with the NEC
and / or local codes. Voltage tolerances, which must be
maintained during starting and running conditions, are
indicated on the unit data plate.
The internal wiring harnesses furnished with this unit
are an integral part of the design certified unit. Field
alteration to comply with electrical codes should not
be required. If any of the wire supplied with the unit
must be replaced, replacement wire must be of the type
shown on the wiring diagram and the same minimum
gauge as the replaced wire.
Power supply to the unit must be NEC Class 1 and must
comply with all applicable codes. A disconnect switch
must be provided (factory option available). The switch
must be separate from all other circuits. Wire entry at
knockout openings requires conduit fittings to comply
with NEC and/or Local Codes.
Refer to Figure 9 on page 35, Figure 10 on page 36,
and Figure 11 on page 37 for typical field wiring and
to the appropriate unit wiring diagram mounted inside
control doors for control circuit and power wiring
information.
Field power wiring connected to the incoming power termination point must be
copper conductor only. Aluminum wire
cannot be connected to the incoming
power termination point.
ELECTRICAL SERVICE SIZING
Electrical service is required for the cooling-only Packaged Rooftop Unit; use the appropriate calculations
listed below from U.L. 1995. Based on the operating
mode and configuration of the rooftop, the calculations
will yield different MCA (minimum circuit ampacity),
and MOP (maximum overcurrent protection). MCA
and Overcurrent Protection Device Data is supplied
on the unit data plate.
34
The following calculations apply to electrical data for
the rooftop unit. All concurrent load conditions must
be considered in the calculations, and you must use the
highest value for any combination of loads.
Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA) is based on
125% of the rated load amps for the largest motor plus
100% of the rated load amps for all other loads included in the circuit, per N.E.C. Article 440-34.
The minimum recommended disconnect switch is
based on 115% of the rated load amps for all loads included in the circuit, per N.E.C.
Maximum overcurrent protection is based upon
225% of the rated load amps for the largest motor
plus 100% of the rated load amps for all other loads
included in the circuit, per N.E.C. Article 440-22. If
the maximum overcurrent protection does not equal a
standard current rating of an overcurrent protective device, then the marked maximum rating is to be the next
lower standard rating. However, if the device selected
for maximum overcurrent protection is less than the
MCA, then select the lowest standard maximum fuse
size greater than or equal to the MCA.
Figure 9 on page 35, Figure 10 on page 36, and
Figure 11 on page 37 show the power wiring that
must be field supplied and installed.
For dual point power connections, TB1 in the power
panel supplies the all unit compressors and condenser
fans. TB2 in the power panel supplies power to the unit
supply, return and exhaust fans, and control circuitry.
All wiring must conform to the National
Electrical Code (NEC) and local codes
that may be in addition to NEC.
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
SINGLE-POINT POWER SUPPLY WIRING
2
E lectrical / C ontrols B ox
C ontrol S ide
G ND
1L1
1L2
1L3
P ower S ide
TB1
CTB1
F ield C ontrol
Wiring T erminal
B lock
LD06414A
F ield P ower
S upply
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
E arth
G round
NOTES:
1. All field wiring must be provided through a field-supplied fused disconnect switch to the unit terminals (or optional molded disconnect
switch).
2. All electrical wiring must be made in accordance with all N.E.C. and/or local code requirements.
3. Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA) is based on U.L. Standard 1995, Section 36.14 (N.E.C. Section 440-34).
4. Maximum Dual Element Fuse size is based on U.L. Standard 1995, Section 36.15 (N.E.C. Section 440-22).
5. Use copper conductors only.
6. On units with an optional disconnect switch, the supplied disconnect switch is a “Disconnecting Means” as defined in the N.E.C. Section
100, and is intended for isolating the unit from the available power supply to perform maintenance and troubleshooting. This disconnect
switch is not intended to be a Load Break Device.
Figure 9 - SINGLE-POINT POWER SUPPLY WIRING
TEMPMASTER
35
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
SINGLE-POINT POWER SUPPLY WIRING
WITH NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH
E lectrical / C ontrols B ox
C ontrol S ide
G ND
Molded
C as e
Dis connect
S witch
1L1
1L2
1L3
P ower S ide
CTB1
F ield C ontrol
Wiring T erminal
B lock
LD06415A
F ield P ower
S upply
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
E arth
G round
NOTES:
1. All field wiring must be provided through a field-supplied fused disconnect switch to the unit terminals (or optional molded disconnect
switch).
2. All electrical wiring must be made in accordance with all N.E.C. and/or local code requirements.
3. Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA) is based on U.L. Standard 1995, Section 36.14 (N.E.C. Section 440-34).
4. Maximum Dual Element Fuse size is based on U.L. Standard 1995, Section 36.15 (N.E.C. Section 440-22).
5. Use copper conductors only.
6. On units with an optional disconnect switch, the supplied disconnect switch is a “Disconnecting Means” as defined in the N.E.C. Section
100, and is intended for isolating the unit from the available power supply to perform maintenance and troubleshooting. This disconnect
switch is not intended to be a Load Break Device.
Figure 10 - SINGLE-POINT POWER SUPPLY WIRING WITH NON-FUSED DISCONNECT
36
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
DUAL-POINT POWER SUPPLY WIRING
2
E lectrical / C ontrols B ox
C ontrol S ide
P ower S ide
G ND
1L1
1L2
1L3
TB1
G ND
2L1
2L2
2L3
TB2
CTB1
F ield C ontrol
Wiring T erminal
B lock
F ield P ower
S upply #2
F ield P ower
S upply #1
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
LD06416A
E arth
G round
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
E arth
G round
NOTES:
1. All field wiring must be provided through a field-supplied fused disconnect switch to the unit terminals (or optional molded disconnect
switch).
2. All electrical wiring must be made in accordance with all N.E.C. and/or local code requirements.
3. Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA) is based on U.L. Standard 1995, Section 36.14 (N.E.C. Section 440.34).
4. Maximum Dual Element Fuse size is based on U.L. Standard 1995, Section 36.15 (N.E.C. Section 440.22).
5. Use copper conductors only.
6. On units with an optional disconnect switch, the supplied disconnect switch is a “Disconnecting Means” as defined in the N.E.C. Section
100, and is intended for isolating the unit from the available power supply to perform maintenance and troubleshooting. This disconnect
switch is not intended to be a Load Break Device.
Figure 11 - DUAL-POINT POWER SUPPLY WIRING
TEMPMASTER
37
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
TRANSDUCER PNEUMATIC TUBING
Static Pressure Control Plastic Tubing
(Pneumatic Tubing)
Duct static transducers (all VAV units) and any unit
with an optional building pressure control transducer,
require pneumatic tubing to be field supplied and installed. The “High” side of the respective transducer
must be routed to the location in the building or ductwork where a constant pressure is desired. Both the
duct static transducer (VAV only) and optional building
pressure transducer are mounted behind the left hand
damper door. All wiring from the transducers is factory
installed.
Duct Static Transducer
Plastic tubing (1/4" ID) must be run from the high pressure tap of the transducer to a static pressure tap (field
supplied) in the supply duct, located at a point where
constant pressure is desired. This is normally 2/3rds of
the way down the duct, before the first take off.
Building Pressure Transducer
Plastic tubing (1/4” ID) must be run from the high pressure tap of the building static pressure transducer to a
static pressure tap (field supplied) located in the conditioned space. The tap should be placed in a location
where over pressurization will cause a problem (e.g., in
the lobby area where excessive pressure will cause the
doors to remain open). The tap should never be placed
above the ceiling.
This will allow for standard building pressure control
through the unit controller. There is an option to control the VFD Driven Exhaust Fan speed through the
BAS, if desired. If the unit has a return fan, the same
point can be used to control the Modulating Exhaust
Damper. The point for BAS control can be enabled in
the Service key.
Static Pressure Probe Installation
On units with duct static transducers (VAV units) and
any unit with an optional building pressure, a factory
supplied Static Pressure Probe must be field installed
at the top of the rear corner post on the unit (see Figure
12 on page 39).
38
The factory supplied atmospheric pressure probe and
associated mounting hardware are shipped inside
the unit controller panel. The hardware consists of a
mounting bracket and a short section of pneumatic tubing. The pneumatic tubing must be field installed
from a factory pressure tap (next to the mounting
location for the static pressure probe) to the atmospheric pressure probe (see Static Pressure Probe
Installation Instructions (Form TPM-N1)).
If the unit is equipped with both a building pressure
transducer and a duct static transducer, a “tee” will
be factory installed, and both the duct static pressure
transducer and building pressure will be connected to
the “tee” - both building static pressure transducer and
duct static transducer will use the same factory supplied atmospheric pressure probe.
The “Low” side connection of the duct
static or building pressure transducers are
shipped with the pneumatic tubing factory
installed and routed, to the external factory pressure tap.
ROOF CURB INSTALLATION
General Information
When ordered, the roof curb is shipped knocked-down
in a separate container and needs to be field assembled and installed. Refer to Installation Manual that
is shipped with the roof curb for specific instructions.
On full perimeter roof curb the opening in the roof
should not extend under the condenser section of the
curb. The condenser section of the roof curb is not insulated and could result in condensation build up under the condenser section as well as higher than normal
sound levels in the conditioned space.
The roof curb drawings contained in the Tempmaster
literature are not intended as construction documents
for the field fabrication of a roof curb. TempMaster
will not be responsible for the unit fit up, leak integrity,
or sound level with field fabricated roof curbs. Construction documents for field fabricated roof curbs are
available upon request.
Wood or Fiber Cant Strips, Roofing Felts,
Roofing Material, Caulking and Curb-ToRoof Fasteners are to be field supplied.
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
DUCT SYSTEM
SOUND AND VIBRATION TRANSMISSION
Duct Connection Guidelines
All roof mounted air handling units generate some
sound and vibration, which may or may not require
some special treatment of the air conditioned space.
The noise generated by the air handling unit is dependent on the speed of the fan, the amount of air the fan
is moving, the fan type and the static efficiency of the
fan. In applications where sound and vibration transmissions may be objectionable, good acoustical engineering practices must be incorporated in the system
design.
All intake and discharge air duct connection to the
unit may be made directly to the unit. These air duct
connections should be on flexible material and should
be installed so they are sufficiently loose. Duct runs
and transitions must be made carefully to hold friction
loss to a minimum. Avoid short turns, and duct elbows
should contain splitters or turning vanes.
Duct work connected to the fan discharge should run in
a straight line for at least two equivalent outlet diameters. Never deadhead the discharge into the flat surface
of a plenum.
Installation of elbows, discharge damper
and other abrupt flow area changes installed directly at the fan outlet will cause
system losses. These losses must be taken
into account during the design phase and
must be added to any field measurements.
Static Pressure Probe
A
A
LD06758A
VIEW A-A
Figure 12 - STATIC PRESSURE PROBE LOCATION
TEMPMASTER
39
2
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
GAS HEATING
Proper sizing of the gas piping depends on the cubic
feet per hour of gas flow required, specific gravity of
the gas and the length of run. The latest edition of the
National Fuel Gas Code Z223.1 should be followed in
all cases unless superseded by local codes or gas company requirements. Refer to Table 6 on page 40.
Table 6 - PIPE SIZES
1
UNIT BASERAIL
FACTORY
PIPING
Gas Piping
NOMINAL IRON PIPE SIZE
LENGTH IN
FEET
1-1/2 IN.1
2 IN.1
10
1,600
3,050
20
1,100
2,100
30
890
1,650
40
760
1,450
50
1,270
60
1,150
70
1,050
80
990
Maximum capacity of pipe in cubic feet of gas per hour (based
upon a pressure drop of 0.3 inch water column and 0.6 specific
gravity gas).
The heating value of the gas may differ with locality.
The value should be checked with the local gas utility.
There may be a local gas utility requirement specifying a minimum diameter for
gas piping. All units require a 1 1/2-inch
pipe connection at the entrance fitting.
Line size should not be sized smaller than
the entrance fitting size.
Gas Connection
The gas supply line should be routed within the space
and penetrate the roof at the gas inlet connection of the
unit. Many local codes require that a shut off valve be
located external to the unit. In these cases it is easier to
run the gas piping on the roof and enter the unit through
the side of the base rail. Typical supply piping arrangements are shown in Figure 13 on page 40.
UNION (For Servicing)
1/8" NPT PLUG
MANUAL GAS
VALVE
1-1/2" FPT
ROOF
CURB
DRIP LEG
PITCH POCKET
ROOF
LD11765A
Figure 13 - TYPICAL GAS PIPING CONNECTION
Gas Piping Recommendations
1. A drip leg and a ground joint union must be installed in the gas piping.
2. When required by local codes, a manual shut-off
valve will have to be installed outside of the unit.
3. Use wrought iron or steel pipe for all gas lines.
Pipe dope should be applied sparingly to male
threads only.
Natural gas may contain some propane.
Propane being an excellent solvent will
quickly dissolve white lead or most standard commercial compounds. Therefore,
a special pipe dope must be applied when
wrought iron or steel pipe is used. Shellac base components such as Gaskolac
or Stalastic, and compounds such as
Rectorseal #5, Clyde’s or John Crane
may be used.
4. All piping should be cleaned of dirt and scale by
hammering on the outside of the pipe and blowing out the loose particles. Before initial start-up,
be sure that all of the gas lines external to the unit
have been purged of air.
5. The gas supply should be a separate line and installed in accordance with all safety codes as
prescribed under “Limitations” listed in the beginning of SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION of this
manual. After the gas connections have been completed, open the main shutoff valve admitting gas
pressure to the mains. Check all joints for leaks
with soap solution or other material suitable for
the purpose. NEVER USE A FLAME!
6. The furnace and its individual manual shut-off
valve must be disconnected from the gas supply
piping system during any pressure testing of that
system at test pressures in excess of 0.5 PSIG.
40
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
Disconnect gas piping from unit when
leak testing at pressures greater than 0.5
PSIG. Pressures greater than 0.5 PSIG
will cause gas valve damage resulting
in a hazardous condition. If gas valve
is subjected to pressure greater than 0.5
PSIG, it must be replaced.
2
7. A 1/8 inch N.P.T plugged tapping, accessible for
test gage connection, must be installed immediately upstream of the gas supply connection to the
furnace.
Combustion Vent
The combustion vent assembly is shipped in the return
air section of the unit. The combustion vent assembly
must be mounted over the flue gas outlet fixed panel
located to the right of the gas heat access door. Install
as follows:
1. Remove the combustion vent assembly from the
return compartment.
2. Remove the vertical row of six screws on either
side of the flue gas outlet fixed panel.
3. Mount the combustion vent assembly over the
flue gas outlets and attach to the gas outlet fixed
panel using the screws removed in step 2.
4. See Figure 14 on page 41 for the proper orientation of the combustion vent. The internal baffle(s)
must direct the flue gases upward.
Figure 14 - COMBUSTION VENT
TEMPMASTER
41
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
42
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 3 – START-UP
To protect warranty, this equipment must
be installed and serviced by an authorized TempMaster service mechanic or a
qualified service person experienced in
air handling and condenser unit installation. Installation must comply with all
applicable codes, particularly in regard to
electrical wiring and other safety elements
such as relief valves, HP cut-out settings,
design working pressures and ventilation
requirements consistent with the amount
and type of refrigerant charge.
Lethal voltages exist within the Control
Panel. Before servicing, open and tag all
disconnect switches.
Reference TempMaster OmniElite StartUp Guide (Form TPM-SU1) for additional
information.
CRANKCASE HEATERS
With power applied to the rooftop unit, the crankcase
heater for each compressor will be ON whenever the
compressor is not running. The heater is interlocked
into the compressor motor contactor and is not controlled by the microprocessor.
The purpose of the crankcase heater is to prevent the
migration of refrigerant to the crankcase during shutdown, assuring proper lubrication of the compressor
on start-up.
Anytime power is removed from the unit for more than
an hour, the crankcase heater should be left ON for 24
hours prior to start.
Power must be applied to the rooftop unit
24 hours prior to starting the unit compressors. Failure to observe this requirement can lead to compressor damage and
voiding of the compressor warranty.
CHECKING THE SYSTEM PRIOR TO INITIAL
START (NO POWER)
Unit Checks
1. Inspect the unit for shipping or installation damage.
2. Visually check for refrigerant piping leaks.
3. The compressor oil level should be maintained so
that an oil level is visible in the sight glass. The
oil level can only be tested when the compressor
is running in stabilized conditions, guaranteeing
that there is no liquid refrigerant in the lower shell
of the compressor. In this case, the oil must be between 1/4 and 3/4 in the sight glass. At shutdown,
the oil level can fall to the bottom limit of the oil
sight glass.
4. Check the control panel to assure it is free of foreign material (wires, metal chips, etc.).
5. Visually inspect field wiring (power and control).
Wiring MUST meet N.E.C. and local codes.
6. Check tightness of terminal lugs inside the power
panel on both sides of the contactors, overloads,
fuses, and power connections.
7. Verify fuse sizing in main circuits.
8. Verify field wiring for thermostat (if applicable),
optional zone sensor, etc.
9. Verify all applicable pneumatic tubing has been
field installed for duct static pressure transducers (VAV units), optional building pressure transducer for power exhaust option, and outdoor static
pressure prove.
10. Supply fan isolators spring bolts removed (refer to
Figure 15 on page 44).
11. Verify proper bearing and locking collar torque
values on supply and exhaust fans (refer to SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE of this manual).
12. Verify proper drive alignment of supply and
exhaust fans (refer to SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE of this manual).
TEMPMASTER
43
3
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 3 – START-UP
The supply, exhaust and return fans have
tie down bolts installed at the factory to
prevent movement in the fan assemblies
during shipment. THESE HOLD DOWN
BOLTS MUST BE REMOVED PRIOR
TO OPERATION OF THE ABOVE
FANS. There are eight bolts per assembly
two at each comer of the fan skids, front
and rear. The bolt locations are shown
in Figure 15. The bolt heads are red in
color and a label identifies their location
in the unit.
13. Verify proper belt tension of supply fan, exhaust
fan or return fan (refer to SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE of this manual). Belts must be checked
after 24 hours of initial operation.
14. Manually rotate condenser fan blades, supply exhaust and return blower wheels and motors, to assure freedom of movement.
15. Verify proper condensate drain trap installation
(refer to Figure 15 on page 44). Fill traps with
water prior to unit start-up.
16. If applicable, verify installation of air filters (refer
to SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION of this manual
for size and quantity).
SUPPLY FAN ASSEMBLY
EXHAUST FAN ASSEMBLY
RETURN FAN ASSEMBLY
Figure 15 - FAN ISOLATOR SPRING BOLTS (TOTAL OF 8)
44
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
17. Verify Variable Frequency Drive setpoints for
VAV units and optional Variable Frequency Drive
Exhaust or Return Fans. Both VFDs are located in
the supply blower section of the unit.
18. If equipped, open suction line ball valve, discharge line ball valve, and liquid line ball valve
for each refrigerant system.
UNIT CHECKS – POWER APPLIED
1. Apply 3-phase power and verify its value. Voltage imbalance should be no more than 2% of the
average voltage.
2. Verify programmed units setpoints (refer to TempMaster OmniElite Start-Up Guide (Form TPMSU1)).
3. Verify correct fan rotation (fan should rotate in direction of arrow on fan housing).
4. Insure proper compressor rotation. See the following section for instruction on Verifying Compressor Rotation.
SECTION 3 – START-UP
Verifying Compressor Rotation
This unit uses scroll compressors, which
will only operate in one direction. Failure
to observe these steps could lead to compressor failure.
3
The Packaged Rooftop Unit uses hermetic scroll compressors, which only pump in one direction. Therefore,
it is necessary to verify proper rotation at unit start-up.
Operation of the compressor in the reverse direction
will not produce any capacity, and cause the compressor to cycle on internal overload. Operating the compressor in reverse for “extended” periods can result in
failure of the compressor.
To verify proper rotation, monitor the suction and
discharge pressures of the respective refrigerant circuit while the compressor cycles ON. If the discharge
pressure increases and suction pressure decreases as
the compressor cycles ON, the compressor is properly
phased and operating in the correct rotation.
Suction and discharge pressure may be monitored with
the User Interface if the optional suction and discharge
pressure transducers are installed (for menu navigation, refer to User Interface Control Center on page
97). If the optional transducers are not installed,
pressures must be monitored with a manifold gauge
connected to the service valves located on the suction
and discharge lines.
Compressor Oil Level Check
The oil level can only be tested when the compressor
is running in stabilized conditions, to ensure that there
is no liquid refrigerant in the lower shell of the compressor. When the compressor is running in stabilized
conditions, the oil level must be between 1/2 and 3/4
in the oil sight glass.
At shutdown, the oil level can fall to the
bottom limit of the oil sight glass.
TEMPMASTER
45
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 3 – START-UP
INITIAL START‑UP
Refrigerant Charge
After all of the preceding checks have been completed and the control panel has been programmed as required, the unit may be placed into operation by performing the following:
This rooftop unit comes fully charged from the factory
with refrigerant R-410A as standard.
1. Place the Unit Switch in the control panel to the
ON position.
2. With a demand, the supply fan will cycle ON, and
permit compressor operation if the air proving
3. The first compressor will start. After several minutes of operation, a flow of refrigerant will be noted in the sight glass, the vapor in the sight glass
will clear, and there should be a solid column of
liquid visible in the sight glass when the TXV stabilizes.
4. Allow the compressor to run a short time, being
ready to stop it immediately if any unusual noise
or adverse conditions develop.
5. Check the system operating parameters by checking evaporator superheat and condensing subcooling. Connect a gauge manifold set to the Schrader
service valve connections on the liquid and common suction line in the condensing section of the
unit. After the system is running and the pressures have stabilized, measure the temperature
at the liquid and common suction lines near the
Schrader service valves. Calculate evaporator superheat and condensing subcooling. Both should
be approximately 15°, Refer to the proceeding
section Checking Superheat and Subcooling for
information on how to calculate evaporator superheat and condenser subcooling. Repeat the
above process for each of the refrigerant systems.
Checking Superheat and Subcooling
An R-410A temperature and pressure chart lists the associated saturation temperature in one column, with
the associated pressure in another column. As a result,
only one temperature/pressure column is needed to
show the relationship.
Subcooling (R-410A)
When the refrigerant charge is correct, there will be no
vapor in the liquid sight glass with the system operating under full load conditions.
The subcooling temperature of each system can be calculated by recording the temperature of the liquid line
at the outlet of the condenser and subtracting it from
the saturation temperature listed in Table 7 on page
47, for the corresponding discharge pressure.
Example:
On a TMAL070 the liquid pressure is 375 PSIG and
the liquid temperature is 97.0 °F
Saturation Temperature for 375 PSIG
= 112.0 °F
Minus the liquid line temp
= 97.0 °F
Liquid Line Subcooling of
= 15.0 °F
The subcooling should be 15.0 °F at design conditions.
6. With an ammeter, verify that each phase of the
condenser fans, compressors, supply fan, and exhaust fan are within the RLA/FLA as listed on the
unit data plate.
46
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 3 – START-UP
Table 7 - R410-A PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE CHART
PSIG
TEMP °F
PSIG
TEMP °F
0
-60
78
20
2
-58
80
21
4
-54
85
24
6
-50
90
26
8
-46
95
29
10
-42
100
32
12
-39
105
34
14
-36
110
36
16
-33
115
39
18
-30
120
41
20
-28
125
43
22
-26
130
45
24
-24
135
47
26
-20
140
49
28
-18
145
51
30
-16
150
53
32
-14
160
57
34
-12
170
60
36
-10
180
64
38
-8
190
67
40
-6
200
70
42
-4
210
73
44
-3
220
76
46
-2
225
78
48
0
235
80
50
1
245
83
52
3
255
85
54
4
265
88
56
6
275
90
58
7
285
92
60
8
295
95
62
10
305
97
64
11
325
101
66
13
355
108
68
14
375
112
70
15
405
118
72
16
500
134
74
17
600
149
76
19
700
159
TEMPMASTER
3
47
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 3 – START-UP
Superheat (R-410A)
The superheat should be checked only after steady state
operation of the unit has been established, the discharge
air temperature has been pulled down to within the control range, and the unit is running in a fully loaded condition.
Gas Heat Models
Installation of this furnace at altitudes
above 2000 ft (610 m) shall be made
in accordance with the High Altitude
Accessory Kit Installation Instructions
(100.50-N16) available with this furnace.
L'installation de ce générateur de chaleur à des altitudes supérieures à 610 m
(2000 pi) doit être effectuée conformément aux instructions d'installation
du kit d'accessoires de haute altitude
(TPM-N2) fournie avec cet appareil.
The superheat is calculated as the difference between
the actual temperature of the refrigerant gas in the suction line and the temperature corresponding to the Suction Pressure as shown in Table 7 on page 47.
Example:
ELECTRICAL SHOCK, FIRE, OR
EXPLOSION HAZARD
The suction pressure is 130 PSIG and the
suction line temperature is 57.0 °F
Suction Line Temperature = 57.0 °F
Saturation Temperature for 130 PSIG
= 45.0 °F
Evaporator Superheat
= 12.0 °F
When adjusting the expansion valve, the adjusting
screw should be turned not more than one turn at a
time, allowing sufficient time (approximately 15 minutes) between adjustments for the system and the thermal expansion valve to respond and stabilize.
The superheat setting should be adjusted to 12.0 °F at
design conditions.
Failure to follow safety warnings exactly
could result in dangerous operation, serious injury, death, or property damage.
Improper servicing could result in dangerous operation, serious injury, death, or property damage.
• Before servicing, disconnect all electrical power
to furnace.
• When servicing controls, label all wires prior to
disconnecting. Reconnect wires correctly.
• Verify proper operation after servicing.
RISQUE D'ÉLECTROCUTION,
D'INCENDIE OU D'EXPLOSION
Leak Checking
Leak check compressors, fittings and piping to assure
no leaks. Verify the evaporator distributor tubes do not
have bare copper touching each other or are against
a sheet metal edge. If you are leak checking a unit
charged with R-410A make sure the leak test device is
capable of sensing refrigerant R-410A.
If the unit is functioning satisfactorily during the initial
operating period, no safeties trip and the unit controls
are functioning properly, the rooftop unit is ready to be
placed into operation.
$9(57,66(0(17
Si les consignes de sécurité ne sont pas
suivies à la lettre, cela peut entraîner
la mort, de graves blessures, un fonctionnement dangereux ou des dommages
matériels.
Un entretien inadéquat peut entraîner la mort, de
graves blessures, un fonctionnement dangereux ou
des dommages matériels.
• Avant de faire l'entretien de l'appareil de
chauffage, le débrancher de l'alimentation
électrique.
• Avant l'entretien des commandes, étiqueter tous
les fils avant de les déconnecter. Rebrancher
correctement les fils.
• Vérifier que l'appareil fonctionne correctement
aprés l'entretien.
48
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 3 – START-UP
FIRE OR EXPLOSION HAZARD
FIRE OR EXPLOSION HAZARD
Failure to follow safety warnings exactly
could result in serious injury, death, or
property damage.
Failure to follow safety warnings exactly
could result in serious injury, death, or
property damage.
Never test for gas leaks with an open
flame.
Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors
and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance.
Use a commercially available soap solution made specifically for the detection
of leaks to check all connections. A fire
or explosion may result causing property
damage, personal injury, or loss of life.
WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS
• Do not try to light any appliance.
• Do no touch any electrical switch; do not use
any phone in your building.
RISQUE D'INCENDIE
D'EXPLOSION
• Leave the building immediately.
• Immediately call your gas supplier from a neighbor's phone. Follow the gas supplier's instructions.
• If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the
fire department.
Installation and service must be performed by a qualified installer, service agency, or the gas supplier.
RISQUE D'INCENDIE
D'EXPLOSION
$9(57,66(0(17
OU
Si les consignes de sécurité ne sont pas
suivies à la lettre, cela peut entraîner la
mort, de graves blessures ou des dommages matériels.
Ne pas entreposer ni utiliser d'essence ni autres vapeurs ou liquides inflammables à proximité de cet
appareil ou de tout autre appareil.
QUE FAIRE SI UNE ODEUR DE GAZ EST
DÉTECTÉE
• Ne mettre en marche aucun appareil.
• Ne toucher aucun interrupteur électrique; ne
pas utiliser de téléphone dans le bâtiment.
• Quitter le bâtiment immédiatement.
• Appeler immédiatement le fournisseur de gaz en
utilisant te téléphone d'un voisin. Suivre les instructions du fournisseur de gaz.
• Si le fournisseur de gaz n'est pas accessible, appeler le service d'incendie.
L'installation et l'entretien doivent être effectués par
un installateur ou une entreprise d'entretien qualifié,
ou le fournisseur de gaz.
TEMPMASTER
$9(57,66(0(17
OU
Si les consignes de sécurité ne sont pas
suivies à la lettre, cela peut entraîner la
mort, de graves blessures ou des dommages matériels.
Ne jamais vérifier la présence de fuites de
gaz au moyen d'une flamme nue.
Vérifier tous les raccords en utilisant une
solution savonneuse commerciale conçue
spécialement pour la détection de fuites.
Un incendie ou une explosion risque de
se produire, ce qui peut entraîner la mort,
des blessures ou des dommages matériels.
Pre-Start Checks
Startup of gas heat includes verification of incoming gas
line pressure and leak checks of the field installed gas
lines, these items are the responsibility of the installing
contractor; however, they should also be verified prior to
unit start-up. Correct values and the proper procedures
are described later in this section of the manual.
Verify wiring inside the burner compartment to insure
the wiring/terminals are tight and securely connected
to the components, such as the ignition control, flame
sensor, gas valve, rollout switches and igniter.
The gas heat start up sequence begins with a 30 second prepurge. The next step in the sequence is the closure of the air proving switch. The heat section has a
combustion air-proving switch. This switch must close
before the ignition sequence can initiate. If the airproving switch is closed after the 30 second prepurge
the ignition control will energize the spark igniter and
open the gas valve.
49
3
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 3 – START-UP
The furnace ignition control uses flame rectification as
verification of burner operation. The minimum allowable flame current for operation is 0.7 DC microamps.
If the furnace ignition control does not prove flame in
7 seconds, it will turn off the spark signal and close the
gas valve. It will wait 30 seconds and then initiate a
second ignition sequence. If flame is not proven during
the second 7 second trial for ignition the control will
turn off the spark signal, close the gas valve, wait 30
seconds and initiate a third ignition sequence. If flame
rectification is not proven on the third try, the ignition
control will lock out.
The heat section has two roll out switches mounted
above the burners. The purpose of the roll out switch
is to protect the gas heat section from flame roll out,
flame burning outside the heat exchanger. A restriction
in the heat exchanger or breach in the flue passages
could result in a roll out situation. The roll out switch
is a manual reset device.
The unit has two high temperature limit switches. One
located at the heat exchanger vestibule panel and the
other located in the area of the heat exchanger return
bend. These limits are automatic reset devices. If the
limit opens the ignition control will de-energize the gas
valve. On staged gas heat, as soon as the limit closes
the ignition control will reinitiate the ignition sequence.
If the limit opens on a modulating gas heat section the
Unit Controller will lockout the heat section.
The control circuit is tested in the factory to insure that
all of these steps are followed, however, natural gas
is not actually introduced to the system in the plant;
nitrogen is used in its place.
Post Start Checks
When a signal is received at the gas heat control module from the Unit Controller, verify:
• Combustion blower starts and runs for 30 seconds
before the spark is initiated.
• Spark igniter sparks.
• Gas valve opens.
• Burners light from right to left, in a 2.5-second
time frame.
• Each burner lights in sequential order from right
to left; and establishes stable flame immediately
upon ignition.
50
• No gas leaks in the unit piping as well as the supply piping.
• Correct manifold gas pressures. See Manifold Gas
Pressure Adjustment on page 51.
• The supply pressure is adequate. It must be within
the limitations shown in Table 8 on page 50.
Supply pressure should be checked with all
gas appliances in the building at full fire.
At no time should the standby gas pressure
exceed 10.5" W.C. or the operating pressure drop below 4.5" W.C. for natural gas
or the standby gas pressure exceed 13.0"
W.C. or the operating pressure drop below
11.0" W.C. for propane. If the gas pressure
is outside these limits, contact the installing
mechanical contractor for corrective action.
• The flame is stable, with the flame present only at
the end of the burner and that there isn't any burning occurring inside the burner.
There should be a little yellow tipping of
the flame.
There may be some smoke through the
flue, due to tooling oil burning off of the
heat exchanger tubing.
Table 8 - LOW FIRE / HIGH FIRE PRESSURE STAGED
TYPE
OF
GAS
LINE PRESSURE
MIN
MAX
MANIFOLD
PRESSURE
LO FIRE +/- HI FIRE /0.3" W.C. 0.3" W.C.
NATURAL 4.5" W.C. 10.5" W.C.
1.4" W.C.
PROPANE 11.0" W.C. 13.0" W.C.
4.2" W.C. 10.0" W.C.
3.5" W.C.
Table 9 - LOW FIRE / HIGH FIRE - MODULATING
TYPE
OF
GAS
LINE PRESSURE
MIN
MAX
PRESSURE TO
MAXITROL VALVE
LO FIRE +/- HI FIRE+/0.3" W.C. 0.3" W.C.
NATURAL 4.5" W.C. 10.5" W.C.
1.4" W.C.
3.5" W.C.
PROPANE 11.0" W.C. 13.0" W.C.
4.2" W.C. 10.0" W.C.
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 3 – START-UP
MANIFOLD PRESSURE – MODULATING GAS
5. Turn the gas back ON.
Table 10 - LOW FIRE (INDUCER FAN ON LOW, 1.4"
W.C. INPUT TO MAXITROL VALVE)
6. Place the heat section into high fire operation.
INPUT VOLTAGE TO SIGNAL
CONDITIONER (VDC)
MANIFOLD
PRESSURE (“W.C.)
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
0.22
0.22
0.22
0.22
0.22
0.32
0.45
0.66
0.84
1.05
1.25
1.30
1.30
1.30
Table 11 - HIGH FIRE (INDUCER FAN ON HIGH,
3.5" W.C. INPUT TO MAXITROL VALVE)
INPUT VOLTAGE TO SIGNAL MANIFOLD PRESSURE
CONDITIONER (VDC)
(“W.C.)
4.0
1.10
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
1.40
1.70
2.10
2.50
2.90
3.15
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
3.25
3.30
3.30
3.30
Manifold Gas Pressure Adjustment
Small adjustments to the manifold gas pressure can be
made by following the procedure outlined below. Refer
to Figure 16 on page 51 for the high and low fire
pressure regulator adjustment locations.
1. Turn the gas OFF to the unit.
2. Use a 3/16 inch Allen wrench to remove the 1/8
inch NPT plug from the outlet pressure tap of the
valve.
3. Install a brass adapter to allow the connection of a
hose to the outlet pressure tap of the valve.
4. Connect the hose to a manometer capable of reading the required manifold pressure value.
TEMPMASTER
7. Compare the high fire manifold pressure to
Table 8 on page 50.
8. To adjust the high fire manifold pressure remove
the cap from the high fire pressure regulator. Use a
3/32 Allen wrench to make the manifold pressure
adjustment. To increase the manifold pressure,
turn the screw clockwise; to decrease the manifold pressure, turn the screw counterclockwise.
Place your finger over the adjustment opening
while verifying the manifold pressure.
9. Place the heat section into low fire operation.
10. Compare the low fire manifold pressure to
Table 8 on page 50.
HIGH FIRE PRESSURE
REGULATOR
REGULATOR VENT COVER
LOW FIRE
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
TWO STAGE
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
INLET
Figure 16 - MANIFOLD GAS PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
11. To adjust the low fire manifold pressure remove
the cap from the low fire pressure regulator. Use
a 3/32 inch Allen wrench to make the manifold
pressure adjustment. To increase the manifold
pressure, turn the screw clockwise; to decrease
the manifold pressure, turn the screw counterclockwise. Place your finger over the adjustment
opening while verifying the manifold pressure.
12. Turn the heat OFF.
13. Turn the gas OFF.
14. Remove the brass tubing adapter and replace the
plug in the outlet pressure tap.
51
3
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 3 – START-UP
Table 12 - GAS HEAT PERFORMANCE DATA
UNIT
70-85
90-105
52
AIRFLOW
GAS INPUT CAPACITY
(BTU/HR X 1000)
MAXIMUM OUTPUT CAPACITY
(BTU/HR X 1000)
MIN.
MAX.
375
300
6,950
27,750
10-40
750
600
11,150
27,750
20-50
1125
900
15,150
33,325
25-55
375
300
6,950
27,750
10-40
750
600
11,150
27,750
20-50
1125
900
15,150
33,325
25-55
TEMP. RISE (°F)
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE
Make sure power is removed from the unit
before performing the maintenance items
contained in this section of the manual.
frigerant and amount per system is listed on the unit
rating plate. A change in the oil color or odor may be an
indication of contaminates in the refrigeration system.
If this occurs, an oil sample should be taken and analyzed. If contaminations are present, the system must
be cleaned to prevent compressor failure. This can be
accomplished through the installation of oversized suction and liquid line driers. The driers may have to be
changed several times to clean up the system depending on the degree of contamination.
GENERAL
A planned program of regularly scheduled maintenance
will return dividends by averting possible costly and
unexpected periods of down time. It is the responsibility of the owner to provide the necessary maintenance
for the air handling units and coils. If a system failure
occurs due to improper maintenance during the warranty period, TempMaster will not be liable for costs
incurred to return the unit to satisfactory operation.
Never use the scroll compressor
to pump the refrigerant system down
into a vacuum. Doing so will cause
internal arcing of the compressor
motor, which will result in failure of
compressor.
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE – MONTHLY
Fan Bearing Lubrication
Filters
Add grease slowly with shaft rotating until a slight
bead forms at the seals. If necessary, re-lubricate while
bearing is stationary. The fan data plate (attached to
the fan scroll) lists the type of grease that must be used
for lubricating the bearings. Refer to Table 13 on page
53 for lubricating schedule.
Check the cleanliness of the filters and replace or clean
as required.
Linkages
Examine the damper and operator linkages to insure
that each is free and operating smoothly.
Re-lubrication is generally accompanied by a temporary rise in operating temperature. Excess grease will
be purged at seals.
Compressors
Oil Level Check: The oil level can only be tested
when the compressor is running in stabilized conditions, to ensure that there is no liquid refrigerant in the
lower shell of the compressor. When the compressor
is running in stabilized conditions, the oil level must
be between 1/4 and 3/4 in the oil sight glass. Note: at
shutdown, the oil level can fall to the bottom limit of
the oil sight glass.
Recommended Lubricant for Fan Bearings
A Lithium / Petroleum base grease conforming to an
NLGI Grade II consistency is normally used. Lubricant must be free of any chemical impurities such as
free acid or free alkali, dust, rust, metal particles or
abrasive. This light viscosity, low torque grease is rust
inhibited and water resistant, has a temperature range
of -30.0 °F to +200.0 °F with intermittent highs of
+250.0 °F. Lubricate bearings as required by the severity of required duty.
Oil Analysis: Use YORK Type “T” POE oil (clear) for
units charged with R-410a refrigerant. The type of reTable 13 - FAN BEARING – LUBRICATION INTERVALS
RELUBRICATION SCHEDULE (MONTHS) BALL BEARING PILLOW BLOCKS
SPEED (RPM)
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
1/2” thru 1-11/16”
6
6
5
3
3
2
2
2
1
1-15/16” thru 2-7/16”
6
5
4
2
2
1
1/2
1/4
1/4
2-11/16” thru 2-15/16”
5
4
3
2
1
1/2
1/2
3-7/16” thru 3-15/16”
4
3
2
1
1/2
1/2
Shaft Dia
TEMPMASTER
53
4
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE
Condenser Coils
Dirt should not be allowed to accumulate on the condenser coil surfaces. Cleaning should be as often as
necessary to keep coil clean.
If the coil needs to be cleaned, it should be washed
with water or with non-acidic Calgon Coilclean (mix
one part Coilclean with seven parts water). Allow the
Coilclean solution to remain on the coil for 30 minutes before rinsing with water. The solution should not
be allowed to come into contact with painted surfaces.
Do not use pressurized water greater than that found in
common garden hose/pressure nozzle equipment. Use
of a high pressure power washer to clean the coil will
damage the coil and could result in poor system performance or system failure.
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE – THREE TO SIX
MONTHS
Disconnect and lock-out power from the
unit anytime service is being performed
on the fan section. Failure to do so could
result in serious injury or death due to the
fan turning ON while work is in progress.
Squealing belts during starting is caused
by slipping belts that are not tensioned
properly.
When it is necessary to replace one belt in a given set,
the entire set of belts must be replaced.
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE – YEARLY
Check the fan wheels and inspect the drain pan for
sludge and foreign material. Clean if required.
Observe the operation of all dampers and make any
necessary adjustments in linkage and blade orientation
for proper operation.
Entire Unit Inspection
In addition to the checks listed in this section of the
manual, periodic overall inspections of the unit should
be accomplished to ensure proper equipment operation. Items such as loose hardware, component operation, refrigerant leaks, unusual noises, etc. should be
investigated and corrected immediately.
Sheave Alignment
To check sheave alignment, a straight edge or a piece of
string can be used. If the sheaves are properly aligned,
the string or straight edge will touch at all points, as
indicated in Figure 17 on page 54. Rotating the
sheaves will determine if the sheave is wobbly or the
drive shaft is bent. Alignment error must be corrected
to avoid bearing and belt failure.
Cord Tied
To Shaft
Motor Bearing Lubrication
Bearings must be re-lubricated periodically to assure
long life. Motor bearing should be lubricated yearly,
but may need lubrication more frequently, depending
on severe operating conditions.
Belt Tension
Adjust the belt tension if necessary. Required belt tension data is supplied on the fan “skid” data plate, attached to the fan housing. Never use a belt dressing
on the belts. If belts slip with the proper tension, use a
good grade of belt cleanser to clean the belts. Refer to
Figure 17 on page 54.
Never use excessive belt tension,
as this could result in damaging
the bearing, motor pulleys or motor
base. See drive label on fan housing
adjacent to drive for specific details on
tension.
54
Cord Touching Sheaves At
Points Indicated By Arrows
Figure 17 - SHEAVE ALIGNMENT
LD07634
Belts
New belts should be re-checked after 24 hours of operation. On multiple belt adjustable pulleys, the pitch
depth should be checked to insure identical belt travel,
power transfer and wear. Adjustable motor bases are
provided for belt adjustment.
Motor pulleys and blower shaft pulleys are locked
in position with either set screws or split taper lock
bushings. All set screws and/or taper lock bolts must
be checked for tightness and alignment before putting
equipment into operation.
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE
An incorrectly aligned and tensioned belt can substantially shorten belt life or overload blower and motor
bearings, shortening their life expectancy. A belt tensioned too tightly can overload the motor electrical,
causing nuisance tripping of the motor overloads and/
or motor failure and/or shaft failure.
Belt Replacement
4
Always replace belts as a set. Follow the steps below
to replace belts:
1. Release the tension on the belts by loosening the
adjusting nuts on the fan motor.
2. Remove old belts and recheck the sheave alignment with a straight edge.
3. Install the new belts on the sheaves.
Never place the belts on the sheaves by using a screwdriver to pry the belt over the rim of the sheave. This
will permanently damage the belts.
Belt Tensioning
Belt tension information is included on the fan skid
data plate as shown in Figure 18 on page 55. Sample
data plate shows 4.3 lbs pressure at .30-inches deflection.
A Browning Belt tension gauge is used in Figure 19 on
page 55 to properly tension belts.
00494vip
Figure 18 - FAN DATA PLATE - BELT TENSION
LD06354
Figure 19 - BELT TENSIONING GAUGE
Filter Drier Replacement
The filter/drier should be replaced any time work is
performed on the refrigerant circuit. The rooftop unit
comes with sealed type (non-replaceable) cores as
standard. If the unit is not equipped with the optional valve package (suction, discharge, and liquid line
valves); the refrigerant will need to be recovered with
a recovery machine to replace the filter/drier.
If the unit is equipped with a valve package, the unit
can be pumped down by closing the liquid line ball
valve (prior to the filter/drier) while the unit is running, initiating a unit pump-down. The unit will shut
off when the mechanical low-pressure switch opens.
When the unit shuts down, close the ball valve located
after the filter/drier and remove power from the unit
to prevent the unit from running. Once the filter/drier
core has been replaced, the filter/drier section should
be evacuated via the Schrader access valve located
next to the filter/drier prior to opening the ball valves
and restoring the unit to normal operation.
Never shut the discharge valve while the
unit is running. Doing so could cause a
rupture in the discharge line or components, resulting in death or serious injury.
Never close the suction line ball valve with
the compressor running. Doing so will
cause the compressor to pump-down into
a vacuum and damage the compressor due
to internal arcing.
TEMPMASTER
55
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE
Forward Curved Fans
pletely free of the wheel. Be sure that key does
not get bent by allowing it to ride up the key way
edge. The slightest bend will prevent quick assembly. Should this occur, replace the key stock.
The forward curved fan wheel must be removed
through the fan discharge opening. The location of
other clamps, fan wheel, and shaft must be marked so
each of these components can be reassembled in the
same location (see Figure 20 on page 56). This will
preserve the balance of the rotating assembly. Proceed
with the following steps:
8. Remove the shaft, supporting the weight of the
wheel, particularly for larger diameter wheels. Do
not allow the weight of the shaft to be supported
by one bearing as you disassemble.
1. Disconnect all duct work or guards attached to the
blower housing to permit unobstructed access.
9. Remove the wheel through the discharge or outlet
area of the blower housing.
2. Remove the cut off plate attached at the discharge
or blast area of the blower housing.
10. Reassemble in reverse order, centering the wheel
between the edges of the inlet venturi. If bearings
were removed or replaced, be sure to reuse any
shim stock found between the mounting support/
plate and bearing housings.
3. Thoroughly clean the shaft of all grease and rust
inhibitor. Be careful not to contaminate the bearing grease. Use emery cloth to remove all rust or
the wheel may become “locked” to the shaft.
11. Torque all hardware.
Disconnect and lock-out power from the
unit anytime service is being performed
on the fan section. Failure to do so could
result in serious injury or death due to the
fan turning ON while work is in progress.
Fan Motor
1. Shut OFF unit power and lock out.
2. Disconnect and tag power wires at motor
terminals.
3. Loosen motor base-to-mounting-rail attaching
bolts.
LD06355
Figure 20 - E
XAMPLE OF FC FAN SHAFT/WHEEL
MARKING
4. Loosen and remove set screws on both bearing
locking collars. Inspect and, if necessary, replace.
5. Loosen and remove set screws from both sides of
the wheel hub. Inspect and, if necessary, replace.
6. Using a rubber mallet or brass bar, slowly drive
the shaft in one direction until the set screw marks
on the shaft are fully exposed. File the marks completely smooth. Drive the shaft in the opposite direction and file smooth the set screw marks. Continue to clean the shaft of all dirt and residuals.
7. To remove the key, use a rubber mallet or brass
bar to drive the shaft and wheel in one direction.
Drive the key in the opposite direction using a nail
set or smaller size key stock until the key is com56
4. Mark belt as to position. Remove and set aside
belts.
5. Remove motor bracket hold down bolts.
6. Remove motor pulley and set aside.
7. Remove motor.
8. Install new motor. Reassemble by reversing steps
1 through 6. Be sure to reinstall multiple belts in
their original position. Use a complete new set if
required. Do not stretch belts over sheaves. Review the sections on motor and sheave installation, sheave alignment, and belt tensioning discussed previously in this manual.
9. Reconnect motor leads and restore power. Check
fan for proper rotation as described in Start-Up
Check List.
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
Fan Shaft Bearings
General – When removing and replacing the bearings,
care should be taken to ensure that the area where the
bearings fit on the shaft does not become scored or
damaged. The shaft in this area should be thoroughly
cleaned before the bearing is removed and again before
the new bearing is installed.
Mounting Details
1. Check the shaft. It should be straight, free of burrs
and full size. Be sure the bearing is not seated on
a worn section of shafting.
2. Make certain any set screws are not obstructing
the bearing bore.
3. Align the bearing in its housing and slide the bearing into position on shaft (never hammer the ends
of the inner race). If necessary, use a brass bar or
pipe against the inner race to drift bearing into
place (never hit the housing, as bearing damage
may result). Make sure there is lubricant between
the bearing outer ring and the housing.
4. Fasten the bearing housing to the unit mounting
support with hex head cap screws, washers, new
lock washers and hex nuts before securing the
bearing to the shaft. This permits the bearing to
align itself in position along the shaft and eliminates any possibility of cramping loads.
5. Rotate the shaft to make certain it turns freely.
6. Bearings may employ one of several different
methods to lock the bearing to the shaft.
Shaft should be free from burrs. If old
shaft is used, be sure a ball bearing is
not seated on worn section and shaft is
not bent.
SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE
Prior to installing the bearing on the shaft, it should
be worked around in the housing to make sure that
self-alignment will be obtained where the bearing is
installed. After the shaft journal has been inspected for
cleanliness, metal chips or burrs, the bearing is slipped,
not forced, onto the shaft. Forcing the bearing onto the
shaft by the use of flange, pillow block, or outer ring
will damage the bearing internally. Force applied in
this way transmits the load to the inner race through
the balls in the bearing. Since the bearings are not designed for axial loading, the sides of the races in which
the balls turn can be damaged. If the bearing cannot
be made to slip onto the shaft by pressing on the inner
ring of the bearing, check the shaft for burrs. Install the
bearing so the part of the inner race, which receives
the locking collar or contains setscrews, is toward the
outside of the unit.
If the grease fitting must be changed on bearings that
utilize a locking pin under the fitting, it is important
to properly replace it. If an adapter or grease fitting of
improper size and length is used, the locking pin may
be either too tight or loose and can affect the alignment
and re-lubrication of the bearing.
Bearing Lock Devices
Various types of locking devices are used to secure
bearing(s) to the fan shaft. Refer to the instructions
packed with bearings for special information. Figure
21 on page 57 is a typical bearing with a setscrewtype locking device. The various locking devices can
be classified under basic types: eccentric locking type,
concentric locking type, and Skwezloc type.
Set
Screws
Lube
Fitting
Seal
There are various degrees of self-alignment in bearings of the same manufacturer. The force required
for the self-alignment of the bearings used in YORK
manufactured units has been specified and is closely
monitored at the factory. If it is necessary to purchase a
bearing locally, be sure it can be worked around in the
housing with a short shaft made of wood or other soft
material placed in the bearing.
TEMPMASTER
Lock
Ring
Inner
Race
Pillow
Block
Outer
00418VIP
Race
Figure 21 - BEARING WITH SETSCREW TYPE
LOCKING DEVICE
57
4
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE
Eccentric Type
An eccentric self-locking collar is turned and driven
with a punch in the direction of shaft rotation to lock
the bearing inner ring to the shaft. See Figure 23 on
page 58.
SEAL ASSEMBLY
OUTER RING
RECESSED CAM OR SELFLOCKING COLLAR
INNER RING
SELF LOCKING COLLAR
BALLS AND RACEWAY
CAM OR INNER RING
LD06357
Figure 22 - BEARING WITH ECCENTRIC CAM
Do not apply excessive force to the bearing housing (pillow block or flange) when
installing the bearing on the shaft.
When the eccentric collar is engaged to the cam on the
bearing inner ring and turned in direction of rotation, it
grips the shaft with a positive binding action. The collar is then locked in place with the setscrew provided
in the collar.
The self-locking collar is placed on the shaft with its
cam adjacent to the cam on the end of the bearing’s
wide inner ring. In this position, with collar and bearing
cams disengaged, the collar’s bore is concentric with
that of the bearing’s inner ring. The wide inner ring is
loose on the shaft. By turning the collar in the direction
of normal shaft rotation, the eccentric recessed cam
will drop over and engage with the corresponding cam
on the bearing inner, causing it to grip the shaft tightly
with a positive binding action. See Figure 23 on page
58 and Figure 24 on page 59. Make sure the two
cams engage smoothly and the locking collar is down
flat against the shoulder of the inner ring. The wide
inner ring is now locked to the shaft. Using a punch
or similar tool in the drilled hole of the collar, tap the
tool lightly to lock the collar in the direction of normal
shaft rotation.
As a final step, the setscrew is tightened. Torque per
Table 14 on page 59. It exerts a wedging action to
hold the collar always in the engaged position, even
under shock and reversing loads.
LD06358
Figure 23 - ECCENTRIC CAM LOCKING COLLAR
BEARING INSTALLATION
To disassemble, loosen the setscrew and tap the collar
in the direction opposite shaft rotation.
58
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE
Table 14 - SET SCREW TORQUE
SET SCREW
DIA.
HEX. SIZE
ACROSS
FLATS
LBS.
MIN. RECOMMENDED
TORQUE
INCH LBS.
1/4 1/8
66 - 85
5.5 - 7.2
5/16
5/32
126 - 164
3/8 3/16
228 - 296
19.0 - 24.7
7/16
7/32
348 - 452
1/2 1/4
504 - 655
42.0 - 54.6
5/8 5/16
1104 - 1435
92.0 - 119.6
FOOT LBS.
10.5 - 13.7
29.0 - 37.7
When replacing split bearings, refer to manufacturer’s
instruction provided with the bearing. It is extremely
important to ensure that proper radial clearances are
observed between the roller bearings and outer face.
Failure to make proper adjustments will cause premature failure of the bearing.
Grease Fitting
Bearing Cap
4
Torquing of Set Screws
1. Torque screw “A” to 1/2 recommended torque.
Outer Race
2. Torque screw “B” to full min. recommended value.
3. Torque screw “A” to full recommended value.
After proper installation of the bearing(s),
run the unit for 10 to 15 minutes. Shut
the unit down and lock it out. Check for
proper engagement of locking collar and
tightness of set screw(s).
Tapered
Sleeve
Nut
Figure 24 - SPLIT BEARING
TEMPMASTER
Lock Washer
Bearings
Seal
00536vip
59
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
60
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
UNIT TYPE
• “UNOCC COOLING LOW” (SZVAV)
The Unit Controller is capable of being programmed
for two different unit types, which establish the mode
of operation. The “UNIT TYPE” is set through the OPTIONS key, UNIT DATA subsection of the User Interface. The two options are:
• “UNOCC COOLING HIGH” (SZVAV)
• Variable Air Volume (VAV)
• Single Zone VAV (SZVAV)
OCCUPANCY/UNOCCUPANCY
DETERMINATION
The Current Operating mode, OCC or UNOCC, is a
derived value and can be established in three ways:
• Digital
Input:
“OCCUPANCY
STATE”
ON/OFF input – “ON” occupied / “OFF” unoccupied. The Digital input is made through a connection between “24V” and “OCC” on the unit
field low voltage terminal block.
• Serial Input: “OCCUPANCY COMMAND”
Usually originates from a BAS.
• Internal Time Clock: “OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE”
The Internal Time Clock can be turned ON and
OFF through the SCHEDULE key of the User
Interface. The OCC/UNOCC schedule can be
programmed through the SCHEDULE key of the
User Interface.
CURRENT OPERATING MODE
Within the Current Operating mode are 20 sub-modes
of operation:
• “OCC COOLING” (VAV)
• “OCC COOLING LOW” (SZVAV)
• “OCC COOLING HIGH” (SZVAV)
• “OCC HEATING” (VAV)
• “OCC HEATING LOW” (SZVAV)
• “OCC HEATING HIGH” (SZVAV)
• “OCC STANDBY”
• “UNOCC COOLING” (VAV)
TEMPMASTER
• “UNOCC HEATING” (VAV)
• “UNOCC HEATING LOW” (SZVAV)
• “UNOCC HEATING HIGH” (SZVAV)
• “UNOCC STANDBY”
5
• “COMFORT VENT COOLING” (SZVAV)
• “COMFORT VENT HEATING” (SZVAV)
• “MORNING WARM UP”
The Current Operating mode can be viewed in the
STATUS menu.
The operation of the unit in each of the above modes of
operation will be defined later in this manual.
The Unit Controller monitors the switching from the
standby mode to an active cooling or heating mode.
The unit must be in the standby mode for 3 minutes
before the control will allow it to switch to an active
heating or cooling mode.
The Unit Controller also monitors the switching between the active cooling and heating modes. The unit
must remain in one of the active heating or cooling
modes for 30 seconds before it can be turned OFF or
switched.
Variable Air Volume (VAV)
Occupied Cooling
In the OCCUPIED COOLING mode, the Unit Controller monitors the “RETURN AIR TEMP” and compares it to the “RAT COOLING SETPOINT” setpoint.
The “RAT COOLING SETPOINT” setpoint is entered
into the Unit Controller through the SETPOINTS key,
COOLING subsection of the User Interface. If the
“RETURN AIR TEMP” is equal to or greater than the
“RAT COOLING SETPOINT” setpoint plus 0.5 °F, the
Unit Controller will place the unit in the OCCUPIED
COOLING mode.
The unit will remain in the OCCUPIED COOLING
mode until the “RETURN AIR TEMP” is equal to or
less than the “RAT COOLING SETPOINT” setpoint
minus 0.5 °F.
61
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Occupied Heating
Single Zone VAV (SZVAV)
In the OCCUPIED HEATING mode, the Unit Controller monitors the “RETURN AIR TEMP” and compares it to the “RAT HEATING SETPOINT”setpoint.
The “RAT HEATING SETPOINT” setpoint is entered
into the Unit Controller through the SETPOINTS key,
HEATING subsection of the User Interface. If the
“RETURN AIR TEMP” is equal to or LESS than the
“RAT HEATING SETPOINT” setpoint minus 0.5 °F,
the Unit Controller will place the unit in the OCCUPIED HEATING mode.
Units configured for Single Zone VAV operation shall
contain a supply fan VFD. The unit shall switch between cooling mode, heating mode, and standby mode
based on zone temperature. In cooling mode, the supply
fan speed shall be varied based on zone temperature. If
the zone temperature gets warmer, the supply fan speed
shall increase. Conversely, if the zone temperature gets
cooler, the supply fan speed shall decrease. In heating
mode, the supply fan shall run at full speed. When the
zone temperature is satisfied, the unit is neither in cooling mode nor heating mode, and the supply fan shall
run at minimum speed. Control of cooling and heating
stages shall operate with Unit Mode Determination, as
described in the following section.
The unit will remain in the OCCUPIED HEATING
mode until the “RETURN AIR TEMP” is equal to or
greater than the “RAT HEATING SETPOINT” setpoint
plus 0.5 °F.
Unoccupied Cooling
In the UNOCCUPIED COOLING mode, the Unit Controller will monitor the “ZONE TEMP” and compare
it to the “UNOCC ZONE COOLING SETPOINT.” The
“UNOCC ZONE COOLING SETPOINT” is set through
the SETPOINTS key, COOLING subsection of the User
Interface. If the “ZONE TEMP” is equal to or greater
than the “UNOCC ZONE COOLING SETPOINT” temperature plus 0.5 °F, the Unit Controller will place the
unit in the UNOCCUPIED COOLING mode.
The unit will remain in the UNOCCUPIED COOLING
mode until the “ZONE TEMP” is equal to or less than
the “UNOCC ZONE COOLING SETPOINT” setpoint
minus 0.5 °F.
Unoccupied Heating
In order for the UNOCCUPIED HEATING to function, the “NIGHT SET BACK” setting must be set to
ENABLE. This can be done through the PROGRAM
key, HEATING subsection of the User Interface.
In the UNOCCUPIED HEATING mode, the Unit Controller will monitor the “ZONE TEMP” and compare
it to the “UNOCC ZONE HEATING SETPOINT.”
The “UNOCC ZONE HEATING SETPOINT” is set
through the SETPOINTS key, HEATING subsection
of the User Interface. If “ZONE TEMP” is equal to or
less than the “UNOCC ZONE HEATING SETPOINT”
minus 0.5 °F, the Unit Controller will place the unit in
the UNOCCUPIED HEATING mode.
UNIT MODE DETERMINATION
Single Zone VAV
The unit compares the analog “WIRED ZONE TEMP”
or “COMM ZONE TEMP” input to the “OCC ZONE
COOLING,” “OCC ZONE HEATING,” ”UNOCC
ZONE COOLING,” or “UNOCC ZONE HEATING”
setpoints to determine the sub-mode of operation. The
following parameters must be programmed through the
User Interface:
• “OCC ZONE COOLING SETPOINT”
SETPOINTS key / COOLING subsection
–
• “UNOCC ZONE COOLING SETPOINT” –
SETPOINTS key / COOLING subsection
• “OCC ZONE HEATING SETPOINT”
SETPOINTS key / HEATING subsection
–
• “UNOCC ZONE HEATING SETPOINT” –
SETPOINTS key / HEATING subsection
Figure 25 on page 63 shows what the UNIT MODE
would be based on the difference between the zone
temperature and the zone temperature setpoints.
The only difference between Hardwired and Communicated is the method the Unit Controller uses to determine the zone temperature. In the Hardwired mode the
input is an analog input to the control. In the Communicated mode, the input is a serial input from a BAS.
The unit will remain in the UNOCCUPIED HEATING
mode until the “ZONE TEMP” is equal to or greater
than the “UNOCC ZONE HEATING SETPOINT” plus
0.5 °F.
62
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
OCC HEATING HIGH
ZONE TEMP IS MORE
THAN 1.5 °F BELOW THE
ZONE TEMP SP
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
OCC HEATING LOW
ZONE TEMP IS
BETWEEN .5 °F AND
1.5 °F BELOW ZONE
TEMP SP
SUPPLY FAN AT 100%
H
E
A
T
I
N
G
SUPPLY FAN AT 100%
H
E
A
T
I
N
G
H
I
G
H
OCC STANDBY
ZONE TEMP IS
LESS THAN .5 °F
BELOW ZONE
TEMP SP
SUPPLY FAN AT
SZVAV MIN SP
L
O
W
Z
O
N
E
OCC STANDBY
ZONE TEMP IS
LESS THAN .5 °F
ABOVE ZONE TEMP
SP
S
E
T
P
O
I
N
T
SUPPLY FAN AT
SZVAV MIN SP
OCC COOLING HIGH
ZONE TEMP IS MORE THAN
1.5 °F ABOVE THE ZONE
TEMP SP
OCC COOLING LOW
ZONE TEMP IS
BETWEEN .5 °F AND
1.5 °F ABOVE THE
ZONE TEMP SP
SUPPLY FAN AT
SZVAV MIN SP
C
O
O
L
I
N
G
L
O
W
C
O
O
L
I
N
G
SUPPLY FAN SPEED
STARTS TO INCREASE.
SUPPLY FAN AT 100%
WHEN THE ZONE TEMP IS
MORE THAN 2.5 °F ABOVE
THE ZONE TEMP SP
5
H
I
G
H
LD010572
NOTES:
1- WHENEVER THE UNIT ENTERS AN ACTIVE COOLING OR HEATING MODE, THE UNIT CONTROLLER WILL UTILIZE AS MANY OR AS FEW STAGES OF COOLING or HEATING
THAT IT NEEDS TO ACHIEVE AND MAINTAIN THE ACTIVE SUPPLY AIR TEMP SP.
2- UNOCCUPIED SEQUENCE WILL BE THE SAME AS ABOVE EXCEPT THE ZONE TEMP SPs USED WILL BE THE UNOCC SP’s VALUES.
3- UNIT MODES WILL STAGE DOWN WHEN THE ZONE TEMP IS .5 °F UNDER SPs FOR COOLING AND .5 °F OVER SPs FOR HEATING.
Figure 25 - OPERATIONAL MODE : SINGLE ZONE VAV
Where:
SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SETPOINT
DETERMINATION
• ∆TOC = “
ZONE TEMP” – “OCC ZONE COOLING SETPOINT”
Single Zone VAV
When the “CONTROL METHOD” is set to Zone Temperature Control (either hardwired or communicated),
the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” is determined
by the difference between the zone temperature and
the appropriate zone setpoint. Table 15 on page 63
shows the parameters that are used to determine the
“SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP.”
• ∆TOH = “
ZONE TEMP” – “OCC ZONE HEATING SETPOINT”
• ∆TUC= “
ZONE TEMP” – “UNOCC ZONE
COOLING SETPOINT”
• ∆TUH= “
ZONE TEMP” – “UNOCC ZONE HEATING SETPOINT”
Table 15 - ACTIVE SAT SETPOINT DETERMINATION, ZONE TEMPERATURE
∆TOC
OCC
COOL
∆TOH
OCC
HEAT
∆TUC
UNOCC
COOL
∆TUH
UNOCC
HEAT
OCCUPANCY
MODE
> 0.5 °F
---
---
---
Occupied
Occupied Cooling Low
1st Stage Cooling Setpoint
> 1.5 °F
---
---
---
Occupied
Occupied Cooling High
2nd Stage Cooling Setpoint
---
< -0.5 °F
---
---
Occupied
Occupied Heating Low
1st Stage Heating Setpoint
---
< -1.5 °F
---
---
Occupied
Occupied Heating High
2nd Stage Heating Setpoint
---
---
---
---
Occupied
Occupied Standby (See Also
Comfort Ventilation Operation)
None
---
---
> 0.5 °F
---
Unoccupied
Unoccupied Cooling Low
1st Stage Cooling Setpoint
---
---
> 1.5 °F
---
Unoccupied
Unoccupied Cooling High
2nd Stage Cooling Setpoint
---
---
---
< -0.5 °F
Unoccupied
Unoccupied Heating Low
1st Stage Heating Setpoint
---
---
---
< -1.5 °F
Unoccupied
Unoccupied Heating High
2nd Stage Heating Setpoint
---
---
---
---
Unoccupied
Unoccupied Standby
None
TEMPMASTER
UNIT MODE
ACTIVE SP
63
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Variable Air Volume
Outside Air Based SAT Reset
The “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” is always derived from three programmed parameters: “SAT HIGH
SETPOINT,” “SAT LOW SETPOINT,” and the “SAT
RESET METHOD.” The Unit Controller determines
the derived “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” value
to use based on the reset command sent to the controller.
There are four options available to select from for the reset command method. “SAT RESET METHOD” can be
set for “HARDWIRED,” “OUTSIDE AIR,” “RETURN
AIR,” or “SUPPLY FAN SPEED.” If “HARDWIRED”
is used and no input is available, the Unit Controller will
control to the “SAT HIGH SETPOINT.” The following
parameters are programmed through the User Interface:
When the “SAT RESET METHOD” is set to “OUTSIDE AIR,” the Unit Controller monitors the “OUTSIDE AIR TEMP” and sets the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP
ACTIVE SP” to a value between the “SAT HIGH
SETPOINT” and the “SAT LOW SETPOINT.” If
the “OUTSIDE AIR TEMP” is equal to or less than
the “OAT SETPOINT FOR HIGH SAT,” the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” is the “SAT HIGH
SETPOINT.” If the “OUTSIDE AIR TEMP” is equal to
or greater than the “OAT SETPOINT FOR LOW SAT,”
the “ACTIVE SAT SP” is the “SAT LOW SETPOINT.”
When the “OUTSIDE AIR TEMP” is between the
“OAT SETPOINT FOR HIGH SAT” and the “OAT
SETPOINT FOR LOW SAT,” the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP
ACTIVE SP” is linearly interpolated between the “SAT
HIGH SETPOINT” and the “SAT LOW SETPOINT”
(see Figure 27 on page 64).
• “SAT RESET METHOD” – OPTIONS key /
UNIT DATA subsection
• “SAT LOW SETPOINT” – SETPOINTS key /
COOLING subsection
• “SAT HIGH SETPOINT” – SETPOINTS key /
COOLING subsection
• “OAT SETPOINT FOR LOW SAT” - SETPONTS
key / COOLING subsection
• “OAT SETPOINT FOR HIGH SAT” - SETPOINTS
key / COOLING subsection
• “RAT SETPOINT FOR LOW SAT” - SETPOINTS
key / COOLING subsection
• “RAT SETPOINT FOR HIGHH SAT”
SETPOINTS key / COOLING subsection
-
• “FAN SPEED SETP FOR LOW SAT” SETPOINTS key / COOLING subsection
• “FAN SPEED SETP FOR HIGH SAT” SETPOINTS key / COOLING subsection
Hardwired SAT Reset
When the “SAT RESET METHOD” is set to “HARDWIRED,” the Unit Controller monitors the “SUPPLY
AIR TEMP RST.” If the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP RST” is
equal to 0.00 volts, the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE
SP” is the “SAT HIGH SETPOINT.” If the “SUPPLY
AIR TEMP RST” is equal to 5.00 volts, the “ACTIVE
SP” is the “SAT LOW SETPOINT.” When the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP RST” is between 0.00 and 5.00 volts,
the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” is linearly interpolated between the “SAT HIGH SETPOINT” and the
“SAT LOW SETPOINT” (see Figure 26 on page 64).
64
SAT HIGH SETPOINT
(Default = 65.0 °F)
Acti ve SAT
Setpoint
SAT LOW SETPOINT
(Default = 55.0 °F)
0 Volts
5 Volts
Supply Air Temp Rst
Voltage
(Volts DC)
LD12587
Figure 26 - ACTIVE SAT SETPOINT VS. SUPPLY
AIR TEMP RST VOLTAGE
SAT HIGH SETPOINT
(Default = 65.0 °F)
Active SAT
Setpoint
SAT LOW SETPOINT
(Default = 55.0 °F)
OAT SETPOINT
FOR HIGH SAT
Outside Air Temp
(OAT)
OAT SETPOINT
FOR LOW SAT
Increasing OAT
LD12588
Figure 27 - ACTIVE SAT SETPOINT VS. OUTSIDE
AIR TEMP
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Return Air Based SAT Reset
When the “SAT RESET METHOD” is set to “RETURN
AIR,” the Unit Controller monitors the “RETURN AIR
TEMP” and sets the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE
SP” to a value between the “SAT HIGH SETPOINT”
and the “SAT LOW SETPOINT.” If the “RETURN AIR
TEMP” is equal to or greater than the “RAT SETPOINT
FOR LOW SAT,” the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE
SP” shall be the “SAT LOW SETPOINT.” If the “RETURN AIR TEMP” is equal to or less than the “RAT
SETPOINT FOR HIGH SAT,” the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP
ACTIVE SP” shall be the “SAT HIGH SETPOINT.”
When the “RETURN AIR TEMP” is between the “RAT
SETPOINT FOR HIGH SAT” and the “RAT SETPOINT
FOR LOW SAT,” the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE
SP” shall be linearly interpolated between the “SAT
HIGH SETPOINT” and the “SAT LOW SETPOINT”
(see Figure 28 on page 65).
Supply Fan Speed Based SAT Reset
When the “SAT RESET METHOD” is set to “SUPPLY FAN SPEED,” the Unit Controller will monitor
the “SUPPLY FAN VFD SPEED” command and set
the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” to a value between the “SAT HIGH SETPOINT” and the “SAT LOW
SETPOINT.” If the “SUPPLY FAN VFD SPEED” is
equal to or greater than the “FAN SPEED SETP FOR
LOW SAT,” the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” shall
be the “SAT LOW SETPOINT.” If the “SUPPLY FAN
VFD SPEED” is equal to or less than the “FAN SPEED
SETP FOR HIGH SAT,” the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP
ACTIVE SP” shall be the “SAT HIGH SETPOINT.”
When the “SUPPLY FAN VFD SPEED” is between the
“FAN SPEED SETP FOR LOW SAT” and the “FAN
SPEED SETP FOR HIGH SAT,” the “SUPPLY AIR
TEMP ACTIVE SP” shall be linearly interpolated between the “SAT HIGH SETPOINT” and the “SAT LOW
SETPOINT” (see Figure 29 on page 65).
SAT HIGH SETPOINT
(Default = 65.0 °F)
Active SAT
Setpoint
SAT LOW SETPOINT
(Default = 55.0 °F)
RAT SETPOINT
FOR HIGH SAT
Return Air Temp
(RAT)
RAT SETPOINT
FOR LOW SAT
Increasing RAT
LD10307A
SAT HIGH SETPOINT
(Default = 65.0 °F)
Active SAT
Setpoint
SAT LOW SETPOINT
(Default = 55.0 °F)
FAN SPEED
FOR HIGH SAT
Supply Fan Speed
%
FAN SPEED
FOR LOW SAT
5
Increasing Supply Fan Speed
LD10308A
Figure 29 - ACTIVE SAT SETPOINT VS. SUPPLY
FAN SPEED
COMPRESSOR CONTROL
Whenever a change in the unit cooling status is made
(compressor turned ON, compressor turned OFF, etc.),
a 3-1/2-minute Interstage Delay Timer is initiated.
During the countdown of the timer, no compressor can
be staged ON or OFF until the timer has timed down.
The only exception to this would be if the compressor
protection circuit experienced a fault.
When the Unit Controller enters an Active Cooling
mode, the Unit Controller sets the “COOLING CONTROL OFFSET” to 2.0 °F. The Unit Controller compares the current “SUPPLY AIR TEMP CURRENT” to
the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” plus or minus
the “COOLING CONTROL OFFSET.” If the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP CURRENT” is greater than the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” plus the “COOLING
CONTROL OFFSET” and all the compressors are not
ON, the Unit Controller will initiate a call for compressor or additional compressor operation based on the
“NEXT STAGE TO ENABLE” (see Table 16 on page
66).
If the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP CURRENT” is less than
the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” minus the
“COOLING CONTROL OFFSET” and all the compressors are not OFF, the Unit Controller will turn a
compressor OFF based on the “NEXT STAGE TO DISABLE” (see Table 16 on page 66).
Compressor Operation With Economizer
If the economizer is suitable, the Unit Controller will
set the “COOLING CONTROL OFFSET” to 4.5 °F. As
long as the economizer remains active, the Unit Controller will not recalculate the “COOLING CONTROL
OFFSET,” and it will remain at the 4.5 °F setting.
Figure 28 - ACTIVE SAT SETPOINT VS. RETURN
AIR TEMP
TEMPMASTER
65
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Economizer becomes active and no compressors are
operating:
Economizer becomes active and one or more compressors are operating:
1. Compressors will be turned ON based on the
“NEXT STAGE TO ENABLE,” when all the following are satisfied:
1. One compressor will be staged OFF, and the sequenced outlined above will be followed.
a. “ECONOMIZER CONTROL OUTPUT”
must be greater than 95% for 30 seconds.
This value can be viewed under the ECONOMIZER key of the User Interface.
b. “SUPPLY AIR TEMP CURRENT” must be
greater than or equal to the “SUPPLY AIR
TEMP ACTIVE SP” plus the “COOLING
CONTROL OFFSET” (4.5 °F).
c. The Interstage Delay Timer has expired.
2. Compressors will be turned OFF, based on the
“NEXT STAGE TO DISABLE,” when all the following are satisfied:
a. “ECONOMIZER CONTROL
less than 5% for 30 seconds.
OUTPUT”
b. “SUPPLY AIR TEMP CURRENT” equal to
the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” minus the “COOLING CONTROL OFFSET”
(4.5 °F).
c. The Interstage Delay Timer has expired.
Compressor Staging Sequence
Compressors are staged up or down to control the
“SUPPLY AIR TEMP CURRENT” to the “SUPPLY
AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP.”
The compressor staging sequence is determined by the
unit size. This parameter is set through the User Interface as follows:
• “UNIT SIZE” – OPTIONS key, UNIT DATA subsection
DUCT STATIC RESET
HIGH SETP
Active
DSP Setpoint
DUCT STATIC RESET
LOW SETP
0 Volts
5 Volts
Duct Static Pres Rst
Voltage
(Volts DC)
LD10309A
Figure 30 - ACTIVE DSP SETPOINT VS. DUCT
STATIC PRES RST VOLTAGE
Table 16 - 70-105 TON UNITS
STAGING
UP
NEXT STAGE TO ENABLE
Stage 0 to 1
If compressor 1A ready to run and compressor 1B ready to run are both true, the Unit Controller will set next
stage to enable to either 1A or 1B, whichever compressor has the smallest number of starts.
Stage 1 to 2
If compressor 2A ready to run, compressor 2B ready to run, compressor 3A ready to run and compressor
3B ready to run are all true, the Unit Controller will set next stage to enable to either 2A, 2B, 3A, or 3B,
whichever compressor has the smallest number of starts.
Stage 2 to 3
The Unit Controller will set next stage to enable to either the A or B compressor from the remaining system
without a compressor on. For example, if a compressor is on from system 1 and system 3, then the next
compressor on would be either 2A or 2B, whichever has the smallest number of starts.
Stage 3 to 4
The Unit Controller will set next stage to enable to the compressor remaining from the stage 0 to 1 transition.
Stage 4 to 5
The Unit Controller will set next stage to enable to the compressor remaining from the stage 1 to 2 transition.
Stage 5 to 6
The Unit Controllerwill set next stage to enable to the compressor remaining from the stage 2 to 3 transition.
66
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
TABLE 16 - 70-105 TON UNITS (CONT'D)
STAGING
DOWN
NEXT STAGE TO DISABLE
Stage 6 to 5
If compressor 3A ready to stop, compressor 3B ready to stop, compressor 2A ready to stop and compressor
2B ready to stop are all true, the Unit Controller will set next stage to disable to either 3A, 3B, 2A, or 2B,
whichever compressor has the fewest number of starts.
Stage 5 to 4
The Unit Controller will set next stage to disable to either the A or B compressor from system 2 or 3 with two
compressors on. For example, if system 3 has both compressors on, the Unit Controller will set the next
stage to disable to either 3A or 3B, whichever has the fewest number of starts.
Stage 4 to 3
The Unit Controller will set next stage to disable to either 1A or 1B, whichever has the fewest number of starts.
Stage 3 to 2
The Unit Controller will set next stage to disable to the remaining compressor on the system the transitioned
from 2 compressors to 1 compressor during the stage 6 to 5 operation.
Stage 2 to 1
The Unit Controller will set next stage to disable to the remaining compressor on the system the transitioned
from 2 compressors to 1 compressor during the stage 5 to 4 operation.
Stage 1 to 0
The Unit Controller will set next stage to disable to the compressor remaining from system 1.
Fast Compressor Start
Compressor Data
On the TempMaster OmniElite 70–105 ton, Rev F units,
there is the ability to User Enable a Fast Compressor
Start sequence. The Fast Compressor Start sequence
allows the unit to quickly stage on numerous compressors with only a 10-second delay between compressors
starting, as opposed to the standard 3.5-minute interstage time delay between compressors starting. This
function will only be utilized when transitioning from
the Occupied Standby mode to the Occupied Cooling
mode.
In order to assist the Service Technician and to assure
equal wear on all the compressors in the unit, the Unit
Controller records the following data pertinent to compressor operation for each compressor:
The TempMaster OmniElite 70–105 ton, Rev F units
have six stages of cooling.
Sequence of Operation
• Fast Compressor Start must be User Enabled
• Unit Controller transitions to Occupied Cooling
from Occupied Standby
• The unit controller will perform a calculation
looking at the current RAT, current SAT, and the
active SAT SP. The results of this calculation will
determine how many stages of mechanical cooling are needed to quickly achieve and maintain
the active SAT SP
• The unit controller will start the appropriate number of compressors with a 10-second delay between starts as per Table 16 on page 66.
• Once the unit controller has the appropriate number of compressors running, the compressor staging sequence will revert to the standard 3.5-minute
delay between starting another stage of mechanical cooling.
TEMPMASTER
Compressor Starts
Each time one of the compressors state transitions from
OFF to ON, the “COMPRESSOR # STARTS” will be
incremented by one, where # will vary to match the
compressor number the data is being recorded for: 1A,
1B, 2A, etc. This data can be view under the OPERATING HOURS / START COUNTER key of the User
Interface.
Compressor Operating Hours
While the compressor is in the ON state, the “COMPRESSOR # OPER HRS” will be incremented once for
every hour of operation. This value will be accumulated over the lifetime of the compressor. # will vary to
match the compressor number the data is being recorded for: 1A, 1B, 2A, etc. This data can be view under
the OPERATING HOURS / START COUNTER key
of the User Interface.
Compressor Run Time
While the compressor is in the ON state, the “COMPRESSOR # RUN TIME” shall be incremented once
per minute. The value will only be accumulated during
the current run state and will be reset to zero when the
COMPRESSOR RUN STATE switches from ON to
OFF. The # symbol will vary to match the compressor
number the data is being recorded for. This data can be
viewed under the COMPRESSOR SYSTEMS key of
the User Interface.
67
5
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Compressor Ready To Run
With the “COMPRESSOR # STATE” OFF, the Unit
Controller determines if a compressor is ready to run
by monitoring the following derived data:
• “HIGH DP UNLOAD”
• “LOW AMB INHIBIT”
• “LOW SUCTION TEMP UNL”
• “COMPR # SAFETY TRIP”
• “COMPR # SAFETY FAULT”
• “COMPR # STAFETY LOCK OUT”
If all of the above parameters are FALSE (not active)
and the minimum OFF time has been satisfied, the
compressor will be placed in the ready to run state.
# number will vary to match the compressor number
the data is being recorded for: 1A, 1B, 2A, etc.
Compressor Ready To Stop
The Unit Controller will set the “COMPRESSOR #
READY TO STOP” to true when the MINIMUM ON
TIMER (3 1/2 minutes) has been satisfied.
The # symbol will vary to match the compressor number the data is being recorded for: 1A, 1B, 2A, etc.
Compressor Safety Circuit
Each compressor system is equipped with external circuitry monitoring hardware. This hardware is intended
to protect the compressors in case the operating characteristics of the refrigeration system fall outside the safe
operating envelope for the compressors.
• TMAL070: Compressors 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 3A,
and 3B
• TMAL075: Compressors 2A, 2B, 3A, and 3B
• TMAL080: Compressors 3A and 3B
The following safeties comprise the safety circuit:
• Compressor Overload (Manual Motor Starter)
• High Pressure Cutout
• Internal Line Break In The Compressor.
Each of the compressors is protected from excessive
current or temperatures by internal line break protection imbedded in the windings of the compressor. The
Unit Controller will not be able to identify whether the
internal line break switch is open, and no fault will be
generated or reported by the Unit Controller.
68
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
If the internal line break is open, it will appear as a compressor failure. To troubleshoot, verify the contactor
for the compressor that is not running is closed and line
voltage is present on the load and line side of all three
legs. If so, remove power from the unit and remove the
cover from the compressor control box. Check for an
open winding. If all three windings are open, carefully
check the compressor shell. If the shell is hot, no determination can be made until the shell has cooled. If the
shell is cool and the winding is open, the compressor
is defective. If the windings close as the compressor
cools; the internal line break switch was open. Some
possible reasons for the switch to open are:
• High discharge super heat (low charge)
• Start of a bearing failure (partially locked rotor)
• High voltage
The unit also has a low-pressure cutout
and monitors the suction line temperature
to protect against liquid flood back to the
compressor. These items will be discussed
later in this section of the manual.
The above safety circuit supplies a digital 24V signal
to the Unit Controller. The input for compressor System 1 is terminal block TB7 pin 1, System 2 TB7 pin
2, and System 3 TB7 pin 4. If one of the safeties opens,
the signal is lost. When this occurs, the Unit Controller
turns off both compressors of the compressor system
having the fault. The Unit Controller then records the
time it takes for the safety circuit to reestablish the 24V
circuit to the Unit Controller. The time to reset is displayed in the history buffer and is identified as “COMP
STATUS (1, 2, OR 3) CLEAR TIME.” The length of time
it takes to reset is an indication of which of the safeties
opened. For example, the Compressor Solid State Motor Protector takes 30 minutes to reset. The High Pressure Cutout usually resets in less than a minute, and
the Manual Motor Starter must be reset by hand. If the
reset time is greater than 60 minutes, as would be the
case with the Manual Motor Starter, after 60 minutes,
the history buffer will replace “COMP STATUS (1, 2,
OR 3) CLEAR TIME” with “COMPRESSOR SYSTEM
(1, 2, OR 3) TOME OUT.”
• TMAL075 - Compressor 1A and 1B
• TMAL080 - Compressor 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B
• TMAL090, 105 - Compressors 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B,
3A and 3B
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
The following safeties comprise the safety circuit:
• Compressor Solid State Motor Protector
• Compressor Overload (Manual Motor Starter)
• High Pressure Cutout
This safety circuit supplies a digital 24V signal to the
Unit Controller. The input for compressor System 1 is
terminal block TB7 pin 1, System 2 TB7 pin 2 and System 3 TB7 pin 4. If one of the safeties opens, the signal
is lost. When this occurs, the Unit Controller shuts off
both compressors of the compressor system having the
fault. The Unit Controller then records the time it takes
for the safety circuit to reestablish the 24V circuit to the
Unit Controller. The time to reset is displayed in the history buffer and is identified as “COMP STATUS (1, 2,
OR 3) CLEAR TIME.” The length of time it takes to
reset is an indication of which of the safeties opened. For
example, the Compressor Solid State Motor Protector
takes 30 minutes to reset. The High Pressure Cutout usually resets in less than a minute and the Manual Motor
Starter must be reset by hand. If the reset time is greater
than 60 minutes (as would be the case with the Manual
Motor Starter), the history buffer will (after 60 minutes)
replace “COMP STATUS (1, 2, OR 3) CLEAR TIME”
with “COMP SYSTEM (1, 2, OR 3) TIME OUT.”
The safety circuit input is ignored when both compressors of the system are OFF. If either or both of the compressors are active and the 24-volt safety circuit input
is lost to the Unit Controller for 2 seconds, the Unit
Controller turns off the active compressors for that system. The compressor system will be made active again
when the safety circuit is reestablished. However, the
event will be stored in the History buffer. During the
time the safety circuit is open the User Interface will
display the following messages:
• STATUS screen: “COMPR SYS # STATUS SAFETY TRIP”
• COMPRESSOR SYSTEM # screen: “SAFETY
TRIP”
• The HISTORY buffer will store and display the
following: “COMP # SAFETY TRIP (1 OR 2)”
depending if this is the first or second trip
If the safety circuit opens three times in a 120-minute window, the Unit Controller will lock out the compressor system having the fault and prevent further
operation of that compressor system until the system
is manually reset. The User Interface will display the
following messages:
TEMPMASTER
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
• STATUS screen: “COMPR SYS # STATUS SAFETY LOCKOUT”
• COMPRESSOR SYSTEM # screen: “SAFETYLOCKOUT”
• The HISTORY buffer will store and display the
following: “COMP # SAFETY LOCKOUT”
Low Pressure Cutout
The operation of the low pressure cutout is the same as
the other safety controls described in the previous section except the Unit Controller ignores the input from
the Low Pressure cutout circuit during the first 45 seconds following the start up of the compressor system.
This allows the system pressure to rise during startup
particularly if the unit has the pump down option installed. The input to the Unit Controller is a 24-volt
digital input at terminal block TB7 pin 5 for System 1,
TB7 pin 7 for System 2, and TB7 pin 8 for System 3.
The Low Pressure Safety circuit input is ignored when
both compressors of the system are OFF. If either or
both of the compressors are active and the 24-volt
signal is lost to the Unit Controller for two seconds,
the Unit Controller turns off the active compressors
for that system. The compressor system will be made
active again when the safety circuit is reestablished.
However, the event will be stored in the History buffer. During the time the safety circuit is open the User
Interface will display the following messages:
• STATUS screen
SAFETY TRIP”
-
“COMPR SYS # STATUS -
• COMPRESSOR SYSTEM # screen - “SAFETY
TRIP”
• The HISTORY buffer will store and display the
following - “COMP # LPCO SAFETY TRTP (1
OR 2)” depending if this is the first or second trip
If the Low Pressure safety circuit opens three times in
a 120-minute window, the Unit Controller will lock
out the compressor system having the fault and prevent
further operation of that compressor system until the
system is manually reset. The User Interface will display the following messages:
• STATUS screen - “COMPR SYS # STATUS SAFETY LOCKOUT”
• COMPRESSOR SYSTEM # screen - “SAFETYLOCKOUT”
• The HISTORY buffer will store and display the following - “COMP # LPCO SAFETY LOCKOUT”
69
5
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Suction Temperature Monitoring
If either or both compressors of a system are active,
the Unit Controller will monitor the analog input from
the suction line temperature sensors for the system. If
the suction line temperature drops below the “SUCTION LOW LIMIT” setting (37.0 °F) for 10 continuous
seconds, the Unit Controller will post the following
messages: under the STATUS key “COMP SYS (1,2,
OR 3) STATUS – LOW SUCT TEMP UN,” under the
COMPRESSOR SYSTEM (1,2, or 3) key “SYSTEM
STATUS LOW SUCT TEMP UNL;” and under the
HISTORY key “LOW SUCTION TEMP (1,2, OR 3)
TRIP.” The analog suction temperature inputs enter the
Unit Controller through J3 pin 1 for System 1, J3 pin 4
for System 2 and J3 pin 7 for System 3.
If both compressors were operative at the time of the
fault, the Unit Controller will turn off the compressor
with the longest Compressor Run Time. The Unit Controller will then wait 1 minute and check the analog input from the suction line temperature sensor. If the suction line temperature drops below the setting, (34.0°F
for R-22 and 37.0 °F for R-407C and R-410A) for 10
continuous seconds, the Unit Controller will turn off
the other compressor of the system with the fault and
display under the STATUS key “COMP SYS (1,2, OR
3) STATUS – SAFETY TRIP,” COMPRESSOR SYSTEM (1,2, or 3) key “SYSTEM STATUS SAFETY
TRIP;” and under the HISTORY key LOW SUCTION
TEMP (1,2, or 3) TRIP.
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
Whenever either compressor of a compressor system is
turned ON, the Unit Controller will energize the digital
output to “PUMP DOWN LLSV (1, 2 OR 3).” This digital output can be found at terminal 2 of terminal block
TB5 for system 1, terminal 4 of terminal block TB5
for system 2, and terminal 6 of terminal block TB5 for
system 3. Terminal block TB5 is located on the Unit
Controller. This is done regardless of whether pump
down is enabled or not.
When the last compressor of a compressor system is
shut off and pump down is enabled, the Unit Controller
will de-energized the “PUMPDOWN LLSV” for that
system, start a 30-second Pump Down Monitor Timer,
and set the internal Pump Down Active flag to ON. The
compressor will continue to operate until the Pump
Down Active flag is turned OFF. The Pump down Active flag will be turned OFF if either of the following
conditions is met:
• The COMPRESSOR LPCO (low pressure cutout)
for that system opens.
• The 30-second Pump Down Monitor timer has
timed out.
If the liquid line solenoid valve is installed but “PUMP
DOWN” is set to USER DISABLED, the internal
Pump Down Active flag will remain OFF when the last
compressor of the system is shut off and the compressor will shut off and the solenoid valve will close as
soon as the call for compressor operation is terminated.
The fault will be cleared for each compressor when the
suction line temperature is greater than the “SUCTION
LOW LIMIT” setting plus 10.0 °F for 10 minutes.
If the compressor is shut down due to a Refrigerant
System Safety fault, the compressor will shut down
immediately and the system will not pump down.
System Pump Down Control
It is strongly recommended that the pump
down option be kept at USER DISABLED.
Failure to do so could result in the following nuisance faults: AUTO RESET
- LPCO 1, AUTO RESET - LPCO 2,
LOCKOUT LPCO.
High Discharge Pressure Unloading
In order for the pump down cycle to work, the unit
must have a liquid line solenoid valve installed in
the main liquid line of each compressor system at the
factory. In addition, “PUMP DOWN” must be set to
USER ENABLED through the User Interface. To do
this, enter the PROGRAM key, COMPRESSOR SYSTEM subsection, and scroll to “PUMP DOWN” and
enter USER ENABLED.
70
By unloading compressors before the discharge pressure reaches the high pressure cutout setting, it helps
prevent systems lock outs because of high pressure cut
out, and continue to provide some cooling with high
outside air temperatures, overcharged systems, or dirty
condenser coils.
The High Discharge Pressure Unloading setpoint
“SYSTEM UNLOADING PRESSURE” is programmed
through the User Interface SETPOINT subsection,
COMPRESSOR SYSTEMS key.
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
In order for this feature to be active, the unit must
have a discharge pressure transducer installed on each
system where High Discharge Pressure Unloading is
intended to function. The operation of the High Discharge Pressuring Unloading feature is as follows:
• Both compressors must be active in the system
before High Discharge Pressure Unloading can
occur.
• The system discharge pressure must be more than
or equal to the “SYSTEM UNLOADING PRESSURE SETPOINT” for 10 seconds.
• The Unit Controller will then turn off one of the
compressor from the system with the fewest number of starts.
• At the point the compressor is turned OFF, the Unit
Controller will record the Outdoor Temperature.
• The Unit Controller will them compare the current
Outdoor Air Temperature to the Outdoor Temperature at the time the compressor shut down.
• If the Current Outdoor Temperature is less than or
equal to the Outdoor Temperature at the time of
shut down minus 5.0 °F, the Unit Controller will
remove the High Pressure Unloading fault and allow the compressor to restart.
During the time the High Discharge Pressure is active,
the STATUS display of the User Interface will show
“HIGH DP UNLOAD” under the COMP SYS (1, 2
OR 3) STATUS subsection. The SYSTEM STATUS
subsection of the COMPRESSOR SYSTEM (1, 2, or
3) key will also show “HIGH DP UNLOAD.”
Low Ambient Lockout
The Unit Controller will allow compressor operation
down to 0.0 °F for each refrigerant system that has a
discharge pressure transducer and a condenser fan VFD
installed. If the refrigerant system does not have both a
discharge pressure transducer and a condenser fan VFD,
the minimum outdoor temperature is 50.0 °F. However
the decision can be made to prevent compressor operation above this minimum allowable setting; 0.0 °F
when discharge pressure transducers and condenser fan
VFDs are installed or 50.0 °F when discharge pressure
transducers and condenser fan VFDs are not installed.
TEMPMASTER
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
For low ambient operation, the Lock Out Temperature
(“MECH CLG LOCKOUT TEMP”) value is programmed
under the SETPOINT subsection, COOLING key of the
User Interface. THE “MECH COOL LOCKOUT TEMP”
can never be set lower than 0.0 °F. The addition of a condenser fan VFD is programmed through “LOW AMBIENT
PKG,” which is under the OPTION subsection, COMP
SYSTEM 01, 02, or 03 key of the User Interface. The
addition of discharge pressure transducers is programmed
through “PRESS TRANS PKG,” which is under the OPTION subsection, COMP SYSTEM 01, 02, or 03 key of
the User Interface. Both “PRESS TRANS PKG” and a
“LOW AMBIENT PKG” can be programmed for NONE;
SYS 1; SYS 1, 2; or SYS 1, 2, 3.
The Unit Controller will derive an “ACTIVE MECH COOL
LOCKOUT TEMP” value based on the following criteria:
• If the Discharge Pressure Transducer is unreliable,
the “ACTIVE MECH COOL LOCKOUT TEMP” is
the higher of the “MECH CLG LOCKOUT TEMP”
or 50.0 °F.
• If the Outdoor Temperature sensor is unreliable all
compressor operation is prohibited.
• If the Discharge Pressure Transducer and the Outdoor Temperature sensor are reliable, the “ACTIVE MECH COOL LOCKOUT TEMP” will be the
higher of the “MECH CLG LOCKOUT TEMP” or
0.0 °F.
• If a “PRESSURE TRANS PKG” or “LOW AMBIENT PKG” is not installed and the Outdoor Temperature sensor is reliable, the “ACTIVE MECH
COOL LOCKOUT TEMP” will be the higher of the
“MECH CLG LOCKOUT TEMP” or 50.0 °F.
If the Outside Air Temperature is less than or equal to the
“ACTIVE MECH COOL LOCKOUT TEMP” for 10 seconds, the Unit Controller will turn off all the compressors
for the system.
If the Outside Air Temperature is more than or equal to the
“ACTIVE MECH COOL LOCKOUT TEMP” plus 2.0 °F
for 10 seconds and the compressor minimum OFF time
has been satisfied, the compressors will be allow to restart.
During the time the Low Ambient Lock Out is active, the
STATUS display of the User Interface will show “LOW
AMB INHIBIT” under the COMP SYS (1, 2 OR 3) STATUS subsection. The SYSTEM STATUS subsection of
the COMPRESSOR SYSTEM (1, 2, or 3) key will also
show “LOW AMB INHIBIT.”
71
5
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Evaporator Superheat Calculation
In order to make it easier for the Service Technician to
set the proper superheat at the expansion valves, the
Unit Controller has the capability to calculate Evaporator Superheat.
In order to perform the calculation, the compressor system must have a suction pressure transducer installed.
If the suction pressure transducer and the suction line
temperature sensor are reliable, the Unit Controller
will display the derived “SUPERHEAT” value under
the COMPRESSOR SYSTEMS key of the User Interface whenever a compressor for that system is active.
SUPPLY FAN OPERATION
Variable Air Volume (VAV)
The Supply Fan will be turned ON if the Supply Fan
has been OFF for at least 60 seconds and one of the
following conditions apply:
• The FAN (G) digital input is high; 24 volts is present at terminal “G” of the unit low voltage terminal block, or
• The CURRENT OPER MODE is set to OCCUPIED, or
• The unit is in the MORNING WARMUP mode, or
• The UNIT MODE is UNOCCUPIED HEATING
or UNOCCUPIED COOLING.
The Supply Fan will be turned OFF if all the following
conditions are met:
• The Supply Fan has been ON for at least 60 seconds.
• The unit is in the UNOCCUPIED STANDBY
mode.
• The FAN (G) digital input is low; 24 volts is not
present at “G” of the unit low voltage terminal
block.
• The INACTIVE HEATING TIME is greater than
or equal to 60 seconds.
• The INACTIVE COOLING TIME is greater than
or equal to 60 seconds.
• The SUPPLY AIR TEMP is less than or equal to
85.0 °F.
The Unit Controller monitors the operation of the Supply Fan by checking the status of a digital input from
an air proven switch. After 45 seconds of operation,
the control looks for a high state (24 volt input) from
the air proving switch circuit at terminal block TB7 pin
10 of the Unit Controller. It then examines the current
status for 10 seconds. If the input does not go to a high
state during this time frame, the Unit Controller will
set a SUPPLY FAN LOCKOUT and shut down all unit
system operation.
The Unit Controller uses a proportional-integral control algorithm to maintain the “DUCT STATIC PRESSURE” by varying the speed of the supply fan. As the
pressure goes up, the speed goes down.
The bypass VFD is a standard Variable
Frequency Drive packaged with an additional set of contactors. When bypass mode
is activated, contactors route power around
the VFD, connecting the indoor fan motor
directly to the supply voltage. At this point,
the motor will go to full RPM regardless of
the duct pressure signal, because the VFD
is out of the loop, and there is a potential
for over pressuring the ducts.
The air balancer must set maximum duct
static/CFM to stay within a static pressure
that the ductwork of that installation can
tolerate when the motor is at full RPM,
considering that the VAV boxes, if they are
part of the system, may not be full open.
If the duct system includes VAV boxes,
they must be driven open in Bypass mode.
Failure to do so could result in damage to
the ductwork and the building structure.
VAV Supply Fan Speed Control
Setpoint Determination
The following parameters must be set through the User
Interface:
• “DUCT PRESS TRANSDUCER SPAN” – OPTIONS key, SUPPLY SYSTEM subsection
• “DUCT STATIC RESET LOW SETP” –
SETPOINTS key, SUPPLY SYSTEMS subsection
• “DUCT STATIC RESET HIGH SETP” –
SETPOINTS key, SUPPLY SYSTEMS subsection
The “DUCT PRESS TRANSDUCER SPAN” can be set
for 1.25" W.C., 2.50" W.C., or 5.00" W.C. based on the
duct static pressure transducer setting.
72
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
The Duct Static Limit can be varied through the “DUCT
STATIC PRES RESET,” a 0–5 volt analog input to the
Unit Controller. When the “DUCT STATIC PRES
RESET” analog input is 0 volts, the “DUCT STATIC
PRESS ACTIVE SP” is the “DUCT STATIC RESET
HIGH SETP” value. When the “DUCT STATIC PRESSURE RESET” analog input is 5.00 volts, the “DUCT
STATIC PRESS ACTIVE SETP” is the “DUCT STATIC
RESET LOW SETP” value. When the “DUCT STATIC
PRESSURE RESET” is between 0–5 volts, the “DUCT
STATIC PRESS ACTIVE SETP” is linearly interpolated between the “DUCT STATIC RESET LOW SETP”
and the “DUCT STATIC RESET HIGH SETP.”
Single Zone VAV
Supply Fan Speed Determination
When the "UNIT TYPE" is set to Single Zone VAV, the
"SUPPLY FAN VFD SPEED" is determined by the difference between the "ZONE TEMP" and the appropriate zone setpoint. Table 20 on page 73 shows the
parameters that are used to determine the "SUPPLY
FAN VFD SPEED."
When the "UNIT MODE" is Cooling High, a control
loop shall modulate the "SUPPLY FAN VFD SPEED."
The Feedback Signal shall be the "ZONE TEMP." The
Proportional Band shall be between the COOLING
SETPOINT + 1.5 °F to COOLING SETPOINT +
2.5 °F. The action of the control loop shall be direct
acting (i.e., an increase in Zone Temperature will
increase the Fan Speed).
The “DUCT STATIC HIGH SETP” can never be greater than the programmed “DUCT PRESS TRANSDUCER SPAN” (1.25” W.C., 2.50” W.C. or 5.00” W.C.).
The Unit Controller then varies the 0–10 volt analog
output to the VFD to maintain the “DUCT STATIC
PRESS ACTIVE SP.”
An adjustable "SINGLE ZONE VAV MIN VFD SPEED"
setpoint protects the unit from issues that may result
from reduced supply fan airflow.
Table 17 - SUPPLY FAN VFD SPEED DETERMINATION
Range: 33.0% to 66.0%
Default: 50.0%
∆TOC
OCC
COOL
∆TOH
OCC
HEAT
∆TUC
UNOCC
COOL
∆TUH
UNOCC
HEAT
OCCUPANCY
MODE
UNIT MODE
SUPPLY FAN VFD SPEED
> 0.5 °F
---
---
---
Occupied
Occupied Cooling Low
SZVAV Min Speed
> 1.5 °F
---
---
---
Occupied
Occupied Cooling High
SZVAV Min Speed
> 2.5 °F
---
---
---
Occupied
Occupied Cooling High
100%
---
< -0.5 °F
---
---
Occupied
Occupied Heating Low
100%
---
< -1.5 °F
---
---
Occupied
Occupied Heating High
100%
---
---
---
---
Occupied
Occupied Standby (See Also
Comfort Ventilation Operation)
SZVAV Min Speed
---
---
> 0.5 °F
---
Unoccupied
Unoccupied Cooling Low
SZVAV Min Speed
---
---
> 1.5 °F
---
Unoccupied
Unoccupied Cooling High
SZVAV Min Speed
---
---
> 2.5 °F
Unoccupied
Unoccupied Cooling High
100%
---
---
---
< -0.5 °F
Unoccupied
Unoccupied Heating Low
100%
---
---
---
< -1.5 °F
Unoccupied
Unoccupied Heating High
100%
---
---
---
---
Unoccupied
Unoccupied Standby
Off
CONDENSER FAN OPERATION
A call for the operation of compressor 1A or 1B will
close an output at terminal TB4-9. This 24VAC output
energizes the 7M contactor and turns on condenser fan
1A. This 24VAC output is also sent to pressure switch
11PS. If the discharge pressure rises above 360 plus or
minus 10 PSIG, the 11PS switch closes and energizes
the 8M contactor and energizes condenser fan 1B. If
the discharge pressure decreases below 240 plus or minus 10 PSIG, the 11PS switch opens and de-energizes
condenser fan 1B.
TEMPMASTER
A call for the operation of compressor 2A or 2B will
close an output at terminal TB6-2. This 24VAC output
energizes the 9M contactor and turns on condenser fan
2A. This 24VAC output is also sent to pressure switch
12PS. If the discharge pressure rises above 360 plus or
minus 10 PSIG, the 11PS switch closes and energizes
the 10M contactor and energizes condenser fan 2B. If
the discharge pressure decreases below 240 plus or minus 10 PSIG, the 12PS switch opens and de-energizes
condenser fan 2B.
73
5
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A call for the operation of compressor 3A or 3B will
close an output at terminal TB6-4. This 24VAC output
energizes the 11M contactor and turns on condenser fan
3A. This 24VAC output is also sent to pressure switch
13PS. If the discharge pressure rises above 360 plus or
minus 10 PSIG, the 13PS switch closes and energizes
the 12M contactor and energizes condenser fan 3B. If
the discharge pressure decreases below 240 plus or minus 10 PSIG, the 13PS switch opens and de-energizes
condenser fan 3B.
Low Ambient Condenser Fan Operation
The standard condenser fan arrangement will operate
down to an ambient temperature of 50.0 °F. If mechanical cooling is required below 50.0 °F, the unit must be
ordered with the pressure transducer option as well as
a VFD (Variable Frequency Drive) for each refrigerant system that is required to operate below 50.0 °F.
The speed of the primary condenser fan will be controlled to maintain a minimum discharge pressure of
220 PSIG.
ECONOMIZER
Economizer is used in cooling mode only. As soon as
the UNIT MODE switches to “OCCUPIED COOLING” or “UNOCCUPIED COOLING” and the conditions are within the programmed guidelines for economizer operation, the Unit Controller will attempt to use
outdoor air to lower the supply air temperature to the
“ACTIVE SAT SETPOINT.” The following parameters
must be programmed into the Unit Controller through
the User Interface to enable economizer operation:
• “ECONO METHOD TO USE” - OPTIONS key /
ECONOMIZER subsection.
• The choices are “DRY BULB,” “SINGLE ENTHALPY,” “DUAL ENTHALPY,” “BEST AVAILABLE.”
• “OUTSIDE AIR ENTHALPY SETPOINT” SETPOINTS key ECONOMIZER subsection.
• “ECONO INSTALLED” - OPTIONS key /
ECONOMIZER subsection.
• The choices are “NONE,” “DRYBULB,” “SINGLE ENTHALPY,” “DUAL ENTHALPY.”
Dry Bulb
When the “ECONO METHOD TO USE” is set to “DRY
BULB,” the Unit Controller will reference the “OUTSIDE AIR TEMP” only to determine the “ECONO SYS
STATUS.”
74
The “ECONO SYS STATUS” will be NORMAL - ACTIVE if all of the following conditions are met:
• The “OUTSIDE AIR TEMP” is less than or equal
to the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” plus
8.0 °F.
• The current “UNIT MODE” is OCC COOLING
or UNOC COOLING.
Once the “ECONO SYS STATUS” is NORMAL - ACTIVE, the “ECONO SYS STATUS” is set to NORMAL
- INACTIVE if any of the following are met:
• The “OUTSIDE AIR TEMP” is greater than or
equal to the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP”
plus 10.0 °F.
• The current “UNIT MODE” is not OCC COOLING or UNOCC COOLING.
Single Enthalpy
When the “ECONO METHOD TO USE” is set to
“SINGLE ENTHALPY,” the controller will reference
the “OUTSIDE AIR TEMP” and “OUTSIDE AIR ENTHALPY” (derived from the “OUTSIDE AIR TEMP”
and “OUTSIDE AIR HUMIDITY”) to determine the
“ECONO SYS STATUS.”
The “ECONO SYS STATUS” will be NORMAL - ACTIVE if all of the following conditions are met:
• The “OUTSIDE AIR TEMP” is less than or equal
to the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” plus
8.0 °F.
• The “OUTSIDE AIR ENTHALPY” is less than
or equal to the “OUTSIDE AIR ENTHALPY
SETPOINT.”
• The current “UNIT MODE” is OCCUPIED
COOLING or UNOCCUPIED COOLING.
Once the “ECONO SYS STATUS” is NORMAL - ACTIVE, the “ECONO SYS STATUS” is set to NORMAL
- INACTIVE if any of the following are met:
• The “OUTSIDE AIR TEMP” is greater than or
equal to the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP”
plus 10.0 °F.
• The “OUTSIDE AIR ENTHALPY” is greater
than or equal to the “OUTSIDE AIR ENTHALPY
SETPOINT” plus 1 BTU/LB.
• The current “UNIT MODE” is not OCC COOLING or UNOCCUPIED COOLING.
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Dual Enthalpy
SUPPLY AIR TEMPERING
When the “ECONO METHOD TO USE” is set to
“DUAL ENTHALPY,” the Unit Controller will reference the “OUTSIDE AIR TEMP,” “OUTSIDE AIR ENTHALPY” (derived from “OUTSIDE AIR TEMP” and
“OUTSIDE AIR HUMIDITY”), and “RETURN AIR
ENTHALPY” (derived from “RETURN AIR TEMP”
and “RETURN AIR HUMIDITY”) to determine the
“ECONO SYS STATUS.”
In some installations the ventilation requirements combined with low outdoor temperature can result in the
Supply Air Temperature dropping below the “SUPPLY
AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP,” resulting in an over cooling
of the space. Supply Air Tempering uses the units heating source to raise the Supply Air Temperature to an
acceptable level.
• The “OUTSIDE AIR TEMP” is less than or equal
to the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” plus
8.0 °F.
In order for Supply Air Tempering to be active, the following items must be programmed into the Unit Controller. Under the PROGRAM key, HEATING subsection, “HEATING SYSTEM” must be set to USER
ENABLE. Under the PROGRAM key, COOLING
subsection, “SUP AIR TEMPERING” must be set to
USER ENABLE.
• The “OUTSIDE AIR ENTHALPY” is less than
or equal to the “RETURN AIR ENTHALPY” – 1
BTU/LB.
The Supply Air Tempering logic will vary depending
on the type of heat installed in the unit. A description
of each of the operating logics follows.
• The current “UNIT MODE” is OCCUPIED
COOLING or UNOCCUPIED COOLING.
Modulating Gas Heat, Hot Water and Steam
The “ECONO SYS STATUS” will be NORMAL - ACTIVE if all of the following conditions are met:
Once the “ECONO SYS STATUS” is NORMAL - ACTIVE, the “ECONO SYS STATUS” is set to NORMAL
INACTIVE if any of the following are met:
• The “OUTSIDE AIR TEMP” is greater than or
equal to the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP”
plus 10.0 °F.
• The “OUTSIDE AIR ENTHALPY” is greater than
or equal to the “RETURN AIR ENTHALPY.”
• The current “UNIT MODE” is not OCCUPIED
COOLING or UNOCCUPIED COOLING.
Best Method
When the “ECONO METHOD TO USE” is set to
“BEST AVAILABLE,” the Unit Controller will determine the “ECONO METHOD TO USE” based on the
sensor that is installed and reliable. The “DRY BULB”
method will be used if only the “OAT SENSOR RELIABLE” is true. The Single Enthalpy method will be
used if both the “OAT SENSOR RELIABLE” and the
“OA HUMIDITY SENSOR RELIABLE” are true. The
Dual Enthalpy method shall be used if the “OAT SENSOR RELIABLE,” “RET SENSOR RELIABLE,” “OA
HUMIDITY SENSOR RELIABLE,” and the “RA HUMIDITY SENSOR RELIABLE” are all true.
With this setting, all of the above logic for Dry Bulb,
Single enthalpy, and Dual Enthalpy apply.
TEMPMASTER
In order for the Supply Air Tempering to be enabled,
the following conditions must be met:
• Operating Conditions
• For VAV units, the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP”
must be less than or equal to the “SUPPLY
AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” minus 2.5 °F for 5
minutes.
• Economizer output less than or equal to 5%.
• No compressor operation for 10 minutes.
On modulating hot water and steam, the following criteria must be met to terminate the Supply Air Tempering:
• Operating Conditions
• For VAV units the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP”
must be more than or equal to the “SUPPLY
AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” for 5 minutes.
• The “HEATING VALVE” must be less than or
equal to 2%.
On modulating gas heat, the following criteria must be
met to terminate the Supply Air Tempering:
• Operating Conditions
• For VAV units the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP”
must be more than or equal to the “SUPPLY
AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” plus 4.0 °F for 5
minutes.
75
5
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
• The “HEATING VALVE” must be at minimum, inducer fan on low, and no other furnace stages ON.
Staged Gas or Electric Heat
In order for the Supply Air Tempering to be enabled,
the following conditions must be met:
• Operating Conditions
• For VAV units the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP”
must be less than or equal to the “SUPPLY
AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” minus 2.5 °F for 5
minutes.
• Economizer Output less than or equal to 5%.
• No compressor operation for 10 minutes.
• The “HEAT ENTERING TEMP” must be less
than or equal to the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” minus 5.0 °F for 5 minutes.
The stage heat will stage up and down based on the
following criteria:
• The heat section will stage up if the “SUPPLY
AIR TEMP” is less than or equal to the “SUPPLY
AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” minus 5.0 °F.
• The heat section will stage down if the “SUPPLY
AIR TEMP” is more than or equal to the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” plus 2 x the “HEATING CONTROL OFFSET” minus 5.0 °F.
• “HEATING SYSTEM TYPE” must be set to
ELECTRIC through the OPTIONS key, HEATING subsection of the User Interface.
• “ELEC HEAT CAPACITY” must be set to the
nameplate capacity through the OPTIONS key,
HEATING subsection of the User Interface.
• “1ST STAGE HEATING SETPOINT” must
be programmed for SZVAV units through the
SETPOINTS key, HEATING subsection of the
User Interface.
• “2ND STAGE HEATING SETPOINT” must
be programmed for SZVAV units through the
SETPOINTS key, HEATING subsection of the
User Interface.
• “HEATING SAT” must be programmed for
VARIABLE AIR VOLUME units through the
SETPOINTS key, HEATING subsection of the
User Interface.
Heating Control Offset
The Unit Controller calculates a “HEAT CONTROL
OFFSET” (HCO) using the following formula:
Where:
• HCO = “HEATING CONTROL OFFSET”
• KW = “ELEC HEAT CAPACITY”
• If 2 x the “HEATING CONTROL OFFSET”
• CFM = (See Table 21 on page 77)
• 5.0 °F is less than 5.0 °F the value will be set to
5.0 °F.
• STAGES = Derived value based on the “ELEC
HEAT CAPACITY” (See Table 22 on page 77
for number of stages)
The following criteria must be met to terminate the
Supply Air Tempering:
• The “HEAT ENTERING TEMP” must be more
than or equal to the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” for 5 minutes.
HEATING OPERATION
Electric Heat
Programmed Data
The following parameters must be programmed into
the Unit Controller:
HCO =
KW * 3414
2.16 * CFM * STAGES
The “HEATING CONTROL OFFSET” will be rounded up to the nearest half degree. If the “HEATING
CONTROL OFFSET” is calculated to be less than
2.0 °F, it will be set at 2.0 °F.
When the UNIT MODE is “COMFORT VENT HEATING,” or “SUP AIR TEMPERING” is active, the
“HEATING CONTROL OFFSET” will be fixed at
5.0 °F and the heat will be staged up or down as required.
• “HEATING SYSTEM” must be set to USER ENABLE through the PROGRAM key, HEATING
subsection of the User Interface.
76
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Where:
Active SP
See Table 15 on page 63 to determine what the
“SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” value is for SZVAV units.
• N = Number of Heat Stages Required (Rounded
Down to the Nearest Integer)
On VARIABLE AIR VOLUME units, the “SUPPLY
AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” is the “HEATING SAT.”
• SATSP = “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP”
• HCO = “HEATING CONTROL OFFSET”
Heating Control
The Unit Controller uses the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP”
as described below to determine when to cycle stages
ON and OFF:
• If the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP” is less than the
“SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” minus the
“HEATING CONTROL OFFSET,” additional
stages will be brought ON after an Interstage Delay timer has expired.
• If the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP” is greater than the
“SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” plus the
HEATING CONTROL OFFSET,” additional stages will be turned OFF after an Interstage Delay
Timer has expired.
UNIT
SIZE
SZVAV UNITS
CFM
VAV UNITS
CFM
70 – 75 Ton
80 Ton
90 Ton
105 Ton
21000
24000
27000
31000
11500
12000
13500
15500
Table 19 - HEAT STAGES
“ELEC HEAT CAPACITY”
KW
VOLTAGE
240
240
240
480
480
480
480
480
480
MAXIMUM
STAGES
3
5
6
2
3
3
4
6
7
During the initial call, the Unit Controller uses the following formula to determine how many stages of electric heat to bring ON, after which the Unit Controller
uses the procedure above for staging additional capacity ON or OFF.
N=
TEMPMASTER
If the Number of Heat Stages required calculates to
less than 1, the Number of Stages is set to 1.
If the Number of Heat Stages required calculates to
be greater than the derived “HEAT STAGES” value,
the Number of Heat Stages required will be set to the
“HEAT STAGES” derived value.
When the UNIT MODE is “COMFORT VENT HEATING” or “SUP AIR TEMPERING” is active, the initial
number of heating stages will not be estimated. Instead,
one stage of heat will be brought ON at a time.
When UNIT MODE is“STANDBY” and“UNDER FLR
TEMP OVRD” is active, one stage of heat is turned ON.
Staged Gas Heat
Table 18 - CFM
40
80
108
40
80
108
150
200
250
• SAT = “SUPPLY AIR TEMP”
SAT - SATSP
2*HCO
Programmed Data
The following parameters are programmed into the
Unit Controller:
• “HEATING SYSTEM” must be set to USER ENABLE through the PROGRAM key, HEATING
subsection of the User Interface.
• “HEATING SYSTEM TYPE” must be set to
STAGED GAS through the OPTIONS key,
HEATING subsection of the User Interface.
• “GAS HEAT CAPACITY” must be set to the rating
plate value through the OPTIONS key, HEATING
subsection of the User Interface.
• “HEAT LIMIT TEMPERATURE” must be programmed using the SETPOINTS key, HEATING
subsection of the User Interface.
• “1ST STG HEATING SETPOINT” must be
programmed for SZVAV units through the
SETPOINTS key, HEATING subsection of the
User Interface.
• “2ND STAGE HEATING SETPOINT” must
be programmed for SZVAV units through the
SETPOINTS key, HEATING subsection of the
User Interface.
77
5
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
• “HEATING SAT” must be programmed for
VARIABLE AIR VOLUME units through the
SETPOINTS key, HEATING subsection of the
User Interface.
Heating Control Offset
The Unit Controller calculates a “HEAT CONTROL
OFFSET” (HCO) using the following formula:
HCO =
180000
2.16 * CFM
Table 20 - CFM
SZVAV UNITS
CFM
UNIT
SIZE
VAV UNITS
CFM
21000
70 – 75 Ton
11500
24000
80 Ton
12000
27000
90 Ton
13500
31000
105 Ton
15500
Table 21 - HEAT STAGES
“GAS HEAT CAPACITY”
(MBH)
MAXIMUM
STAGES
375
2
750
4
1125
6
Where:
• HCO = “HEAT CONTROL OFFSET”
• CFM = (See Table 23 on page 78)
The “HEAT CONTROL OFFSET” will be rounded up
to the nearest half degree. If the “HEAT CONTROL
OFFSET” is calculated to be less than 2.0 °F, it will be
set at 2.0 °F.
When the UNIT MODE is “COMFORT VENT HEATING” and active, the “HEATING CONTROL OFFSET” will be fixed at 5.0 °F and the heat will be staged
up or down as required.
Active SP
See Table 15 on page 63 to determine what the
“SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” value is for SZVAV units.
On VARIABLE AIR VOLUME units, the “SUPPLY
AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” is the “HEATING SAT.”
Heating Control
The Unit Controller uses the “SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE” as described below to determine when to
cycle stages ON and OFF.
• If the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP” is less than the
“SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” minus the
“HEATING CONTROL OFFSET,” additional
stages will be brought ON after an Interstage Delay Timer has expired.
• If the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP” is greater than the
“SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” plus the
“HEATING CONTROL OFFSET,” additional
stages will be turned OFF after an Interstage Delay Timer has expired.
• If the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP” plus 2 x the “HEATING CONTROL OFFSET” is more than or equal
to the “HEAT LIMIT TEMPERATURE,” the Unit
Controller will prevent any heat stages from being
energized.
SAT - SATSP
N=
2*HCO
During the initial call, the Unit Controller uses the following formula to determine how many stages of gas
heat to bring ON, after which the Unit Controller uses
the procedure above for staging ON or OFF additional
capacity:
Where:
• N = Number of Heat Stages Required (Rounded
Down to the Nearest Integer)
• SAT = “SUPPLY AIR TEMP”
• SATSP = “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP”
• HCO = “HEATING CONTROL OFFSET”
If the Number of Heat Stages required calculates to
less than 1, the Number of Stages is set to 1.
If the Number of Heat Stages required calculates to
be greater than the derived “HEAT STAGES” value
the Number of Heat Stages required will be set to the
“HEAT STAGES” derived value.
When the UNIT MODE is “COMFORT VENT HEATING” or “SUP AIR TEMPERING” is active, the initial
number of heating stages will not be estimated. Instead,
one stage of heat will be brought ON at a time.
When UNIT MODE is“STANDBY” and“UNDER FLR
TEMP OVRD” is active, one stage of heat is turned
“ON.”
78
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
Staged Gas Heat Mode of Operation Status
The Unit Controller monitors the time it takes to go
between stages of operation (prepurge, ignition, on,
purge, etc.) and the specified operating state (off, low
fire, high fire) to monitor and display the current mode
of operation for each gas heat sections.
The following information can be viewed for each of
the gas heat sections (“FURNACE 1MODE,” “FURNACE 2 MODE,” “FURNACE 3 MODE”) by pressing
the HEATING key of the User Interface:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
OFF
PURGE
IGNITION
ON-LOW
ON-HIGH
SAFETY TRIP
SAFETY FAULT
SAFETY LOCKOUT
FAULT - L/O
“FURNACE 1MODE,” “FURNACE 2 MODE,” or
“FURNACE 3 MODE” will be determined as follows:
• If the “GAS HEAT CAPACITY” is set to 375
MBH, the display shall show the “FURNACE 1
MODE” data.
• If the “GAS HEAT CAPACITY” is set to 750
MBH, the display shall show the “FURNACE 1
MODE” and “FURNACE 2 MODE” data.
• If the “GAS HEAT CAPACITY” is set to 1125
MBH, the display shall show the “FURNACE 1
MODE,” “FURNACE 2 MODE,” and “FURNACE 3 MODE” data.
When a heating fault is registered by the Unit Controller, the control turns off the gas heat operation for that
section and places that gas heat section in a “SYSTEM
LOCKOUT” mode. The Unit Controller then initiates
a call to the next available heating section.
The “SYSTEM LOCKOUT” will remain in effect for
1 hour or until the Unit Controller is reset. A “SYSTEM LOCKOUT” can be reset by turning the “LOCAL
STOP” switch OFF for 5 seconds and then back ON
or by switching the “HEATING SYSTEM” parameter
from “USER ENABLED” to “USER DISABLED” for
5 seconds and then back to “USER ENABLED.” This
can be done through the PROGRAM key, HEATING
subsection of the User Interface. The faulted heat section will then initiate an ignition sequence, provided
the heating demand is still present.
TEMPMASTER
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Staged Gas Heat Ignition Sequence
1. The Unit Controller sends a 24-volt signal to the
furnace section ignition control from terminal
block TB3 Terminals 2, 4, or 7.
2. The furnace section ignition control sends a 230volt signal to the inducer motor.
3. When the inducer comes up to speed, the heat section pressure switch closes.
4. The ignition control waits 30 seconds and then
starts a high voltage spark for 7 seconds. This allows for a prepurge of the heat exchanger.
5. At the same time, the ignition control sends a 24volt signal to low fire solenoid of the gas valve.
6. The ignition control then checks for a flame rectification signal. If the signal is present for 15
seconds, an analog signal is sent to the Unit Controller identifying proper operation of the heat
section. The 0–5 volt signal enters the Unit Controller through pin 18 of the J5 connector.
7. If ignition control does not receive a flame rectification signal in 7 seconds, it closes the gas valve,
turns off the spark and waits 30 seconds.
8. The ignition control then energizes the gas valve
and initiates the spark for a second ignition sequence. If flame rectification is recognized for
15 seconds, an analog signal is sent to the Unit
Controller identifying proper operation of the heat
section. The 0–5 volt signal enters the Unit Controller through pin 18 of the J5 connector.
9. If the ignition control does not receive a flame
rectification signal in 7 seconds, it closes the gas
valve, turns off the spark and waits 30 seconds.
10. The ignition control then energizes the gas valve
and initiates the spark for a third ignition sequence. If flame rectification is recognized for
15 seconds, an analog signal is sent to the Unit
Controller identifying proper operation of the heat
section. The 0–5 volt signal enters the Unit Controller through pin 18 of the J5 connector.
11. If the ignition control does not receive a flame
rectification signal in 7 seconds, it closes the gas
valve, turns off the inducer, and locks out the operation of that heat section. The heat section remains locked out until the 24-volt power to the
ignition control is removed, or 1 hour, whichever
occurs first.
79
5
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
12. The Unit Controller will then try to energize the
next available heat section and will show the status of that heat section as “SAFETY LOCKOUT.”
13. If the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP” continues to be less
than the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” minus the “HEATING CONTROL OFFSET,” the
Unit Controller energizes the high fire solenoid
of the gas valve and the heat section switches to
high fire operation. This 24-volt signal originates
at terminal blockTB-3, Terminals 3, 5, or 8 of the
Unit Controller.
14. If the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP” continues to be less
than the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” minus
the “HEATING CONTROL OFFSET,” additional
gas heat sections, if available, are energized. The
sequence of operation for the additional heat sections is the same as discussed above.
Modulating Gas Heat
Overview
Modulating gas heat can be ordered with a minimum of
two gas heat stages (one heat exchanger section) and a
maximum of six stages (three heat exchanger sections).
Figure 32 on page 80 shows the staging sequence
for the modulating heat stages. As can be seen from
the chart, Heat section 1A (modulating) is always the
first section ON and the last section OFF. Heat section
1B is always the last section ON and the first section
OFF. The number of stages between 1A and 1B operation is depended on the number of heating sections
installed in the unit. The modulating heat section, 1A,
must always modulate to full fire before any additional
stages can be brought ON. When additional stages are
required, the modulating heat section will go to minimum fire and the next stage of heating will be brought
ON. If there continues to be a demand for additional
heat, the modulating heat section remodulates to high
fire before any additional stages can come ON. During
a decrease in heating demand, the modulating heat section must be at a minimum fire condition before any
stages are turned OFF.
MAX
Furnace 1A
(Modulating)
MIN
When staging up furnace 1B,
Furnace 1A can only be turned down
to Min. Volts HIGH and the Inducer
Fan must remain on HIGH speed.
ON
Furnace 1B
OFF
ON- - HIGH
Furnace 2 ON- - LOW
OFF
ON- - HIGH
Furnace 3 ON- - LOW
OFF
Less Heat
More Heat
LD010151
Figure 31 - MODULATING GAS HEAT STAGING SEQUENCE
80
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
Programmed Data
The following parameters are programmed into the
Unit Controller:
• “HEATING SYSTEM” must be set to USER ENABLE through the PROGRAM key, HEATING
subsection of the User Interface.
• “HEATING SYSTEM TYPE” must be set to
“MODULATING GAS” through the OPTIONS
key, HEATING subsection of the User Interface.
• “GAS HEAT CAPACITY” must be set to the rating
plate value through the OPTIONS key, HEATING
subsection of the User Interface.
• “HEAT LIMIT TEMPERATURE” must be programmed using the SETPOINTS key, HEATING
subsection of the User Interface.
• “1ST STAGE HEATING SETPOINT” must
be programmed for SZVAV units through the
SETPOINTS key, HEATING subsection of the
User Interface.
• “2ND STAGE HEATING SETPOINT” must
be programmed for SZVAV units through the
SETPOINTS key, HEATING subsection of the
User Interface.
• “HEATING SAT” must be programmed for
VARIABLE AIR VOLUME units through the
SETPOINTS key, HEATING subsection of the
User Interface.
Active SP
See Table 15 on page 63 to determine what the
“SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” value is for SZVAV units.
On VARIABLE AIR VOLUME units, the “SUPPLY
AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” is the “HEATING SAT.”
The modulating heat becomes active as soon as the unit
transitions into an OCCUPIED HEATING or UNOCCUPIED HEATING mode.
Heating Control Offset
The Unit Controller uses the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP”
as described below, to determine when to increase or
decrease the heating capacity:
• If the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP” is less than the
“SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” minus the
“HEATING CONTROL OFFSET,” the Unit Controller will be set to the Increase Mode.
TEMPMASTER
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
• If the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP” is greater than the
“SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” ± the “HEATING CONTROL OFFSET,” the Unit Controller
will be set to the Decrease Mode.
• If the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP” is within the range
of the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” ± the
“HEATING CONTROL OFFSET,” the Unit Controller will be set to the Hold Mode.
• The “HEATING CONTROL OFFSET” is programmed at 1.5 °F.
• If the “UNDER FLR TEMP OVRD” is active, the
unit will be modulated to the “UNDERFLOOR
TEMP CONTROL SP” ± the “HEATING CONTROL OFFSET.”
Modulating Step Size
During the modulating sequence of furnace Section 1A
the Heating Valve is stepped UP or DOWN as required.
The amount or magnitude of each step increment is determined using the following equation:
STEP =
VHIGH - VLOW
INCREMENTS
(1)
And
INCREMENTS =
RAMPTIME
CYCLETIME
(2)
Where:
• STEP = Step Voltage of the HEATING VALVE
(VDC)
• VHIGH = Programmed Variable Maximum Voltage High (VDC) - 8.5 volts high fire, 6.0 volts low
fire
• VLOW = Programmed Variable Minimum Voltage Low (VDC) - 4.0 volts high fire, 1.0 volt low
fire
• RAMPTIME = Time required to modulate HEATING VALVE from Minimum to Maximum
• CYCLE TIME = Algorithm Cycle Time
RAMPTIME will vary based on the difference between the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP” and the “SUPPLY
AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP.” If the difference is large, the
RAMPTIME shall be relatively fast. If the difference
is small, the RAMPTIME shall be relatively slow.
The following chart shows the relationship between
RAMPTIME and SAT error (difference between the
“SUPPLY AIR TEMP” and the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP
ACTIVE SP").
81
5
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
120
“FURNACE 1A, 1B, 2, OR 3 MODE” will be determined as follows:
RAMPTIME
(Seconds)
• If the “GAS HEAT CAPACITY” is set to 375
MBH, the display shall show the “FURNACE 1A
MODE” and “FURNACE 1B MODE” data.
420
MGCO
SAT Error
15°F
LD010152
Figure 32 - SAT ERROR
Modulating Gas Heat Mode of Operation
Status
The Unit Controller monitors the time it takes to go
between stages of operation (purge, ignition, on, etc.)
and the specified operating state (off, low fire, high
fire) to monitor and display the current mode of operation for each gas heat sections.
The following information can be viewed for each of
the gas heat sections (“FURNACE 2 MODE,” “FURNACE 3 MODE”) by pressing the HISTORY key of
the User Interface:
• OFF
• PURGE
• IGNITION
• ON-LOW
• ON-HIGH
• SAFETY TRIP
• SAFETY FAULT
• SAFETY LOCKOUT
• FAULT - L/O
The following information is displayed for gas heat
sections “FURNACE 1A MODE” and “FURNACE
1B MODE”:
• OFF
• PURGE
• IGNITION
• ON
• SAFETY TRIP
• SAFETY FAULT
• SAFETY LOCKOUT
• FAULT - L/O
82
• If the “GAS HEAT CAPACITY” is set to 750
MBH, the display shall show the “FURNACE 1A
MODE,” “FURNACE 1B MODE,” and “FURNACE 2 MODE” data.
• If the “GAS HEAT CAPACITY” is set to 1125
MBH, the display shall show the “FURNACE 1A
MODE,” “FURNACE 1B MODE,” “FURNACE
2 MODE,” and “FURNACE 3 MODE” data.
When a heating fault is registered by the Unit Controller, the control turns off the gas heat operation for that
section and places that gas heat section in a “SYSTEM
LOCKOUT” mode. The Unit Controller then initiates
a call to the next available heating section. The “SYSTEM LOCKOUT” will remain in effect for one hour or
until the Unit Controller is reset. A “SYSTEM LOCKOUT” can be reset by turning the “LOCAL STOP”
switch OFF for 5 seconds and then back ON or by
switching the “HEATING SYSTEM” parameter from
“USER ENABLED” to “USER DISABLED” for 5 seconds and then back to “USER ENABLED.” This can be
done through the PROGRAM key, HEATING subsection of the User Interface. The faulted heat section will
then initiate an ignition sequence, provided the heating
demand is still present. If furnace section 1A is in a
“SYSTEM LOCKOUT” mode, furnace section 1B will
also be locked out.
Furnace Ignition Sequence
1. The Unit Controller sends a 24-volt signal to start
heat section 1A heat section through terminal
block TB3 - Terminal 2.
2. The Unit Controller sends a 24-volt signal to place
the inducer and gas valve on high fire through terminal block TB3 – Terminal 3.
3. When the inducer comes up to speed, the low fire
and high fire pressure switches closes.
4. The ignition control waits 30 seconds and then
starts a high voltage spark for 7 seconds. The
30-second delay allows for a prepurge of the heat
exchanger.
5. At the same time, the ignition control sends a 24volt signal to the low and high fire solenoids of the
gas valve and ramps the modulating gas valve to
minimum high fire.
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
6. The ignition control then checks for a flame rectification signal. If the signal is present for 15
seconds, an analog signal is sent to the Unit Controller identifying proper operation of the heat
section. The 0.0- to 5.0-volt signal enters the Unit
Controller through pin 18 of the J5 connector.
7. If the ignition control does not receive a flame
rectification signal in 7 seconds, it closes the gas
valve, turns off the spark, and waits 30 seconds.
8. The ignition control then energizes the gas valve
and initiates the spark for a second ignition sequence. If flame rectification is recognized for
15 seconds, an analog signal is sent to the Unit
Controller identifying proper operation of the heat
section. The 0.0- to 5.0-volt signal enters the Unit
Controller through pin 18 of the J5 connector.
9. If the ignition control does not receive a flame
rectification signal in 7 seconds, it closes the gas
valve, turns off the spark, and waits 30 seconds.
10. The ignition control then energizes the gas valve
and initiates the spark for a third ignition sequence. If flame rectification is recognized for
15 seconds, an analog signal is sent to the Unit
Controller identifying proper operation of the heat
section. The 0.0- to 5.0-volt signal enters the Unit
Controller through pin 18 of the J5 connector.
11. If the ignition control does not receive a flame
rectification signal in 7 seconds it closes the gas
valve, turns off the inducer, and places the 1A and
1B heat sections in a “SYSTEM LOCKOUT.”
12. The Unit Controller will then try to energize the
next available heat section.
13. If the ignition module receives a rectification signal for 15 seconds the Unit Controller switches
the inducer to low speed, turns off the high fire
solenoid, and ramps the modulating gas valve to
minimum low fire.
14. The 1A heat section is now in the modulating
mode of operation.
15. If the Unit Controller is in the increase mode, it
will ramp up the modulating gas valve to high
low fire. The Unit Controller then energizes the
inducer on high speed and energizes the high fire
solenoid of the gas valve. The 1A heat section is
now in the high fire mode of operation.
16. If the Unit Controller continues in the increase
mode it will ramp the gas valve up to maximum
high fire mode of operation.
TEMPMASTER
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
17. If the Unit Controller continues in the increase
mode and the modulating gas valve has been at
maximum high fire for 30 seconds, it will then
bring ON the staged heat sections 2 and/or 3 if
available. As soon as the Unit Controller receives
conformation of heat section 2 or 3 operation, it
will modulate the 1A heat section back down to
minimum low fire.
18. The modulating heat section must modulate from
the minimum low fire to the maximum high fire
and maintain maximum high fire operation for 30
seconds between each step of the staged operation.
19. After all the available staged heating capacity is
energized and the 1A heat section is at maximum
high fire and there is a call for additional capacity, the Unit Controller ramps the modulating gas
valve to minimum high fire and starts the ignition
sequence of the 1B heat section. This ignition sequence is the same as staged gas heat.
20. If additional capacity is required, the modulating
1A heat section will ramp up to maximum high fire.
21. At this point, the unit is operating at its maximum
heat capacity.
22. The de-staging sequence is the reserves of the
above sequence with the requirement that the
modulating heat section (1A) must always be at
minimum low fire before another heat section is
turned OFF.
Hot Water/Steam Heat
Programmed Data
The following parameters are programmed into the
Unit Controller:
• “HEATING SYSTEM” must be set to USER ENABLE through the PROGRAM key, HEATING
subsection of the User Interface.
• “HEATING SYSTEM TYPE” must be set to HOT
WATER HEAT / STEAM through the OPTIONS
key, HEATING subsection of the User Interface.
• “HW VALVE ACTION” must be set to “DIRECT” OR REVERSE” through the PROGRAM
key, HEATING subsection of the User Interface.
• “1ST STAGE HEATING SETPOINT” must
be programmed for SZVAV units through the
SETPOINTS key, HEATING subsection of the
User Interface.
83
5
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
• “2ND STAGE HEATING SETPOINT” must
be programmed for SZVAV units through the
SETPOINTS key, HEATING subsection of the
User Interface.
• “HEATING SAT” must be programmed for
VARIABLE AIR VOLUME units through the
SETPOINTS key, HEATING subsection of the
User Interface.
Active SP
See Table 15 on page 63 to determine what the
“SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” value is for SZVAV units.
On VARIABLE AIR VOLUME units, the “SUPPLY
AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP” is the “HEATING SAT.”
The STEAM or HOT WATER heat becomes active as
soon as the unit transitions into an OCCUPIED HEATING or UNOCCUPIED HEATING mode.
Sequence of Operation
The Unit Controller uses the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP”
as described below to determine when to increase or
decrease the heating capacity:
• If the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP” is less than the
“SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP,” the Unit Controller will increase the amount of heat.
• If the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP” is greater than the
“SUPPLY AIR TEMP ACTIVE SP,” the Unit Controller will decrease the amount of heat.
• When “UNDER FLR TEMP OVRD” is active,
the valve is controlled to “UNDERFLOOR TEMP
CONTROL SP.”
The Unit Controller sends a 0- to 10-VDC signal to the
hot water or steam valve as described below:
• If the unit is configured for “DIRECT,” an increase in heating demand results in an increase in
output voltage to the valve.
• If the unit is configured for “REVERSE,” an increase in heating demand results in a decrease in
output voltage to the valve.
Freeze Protection
If the control is not in an active heating mode but the
Supply Fan Air Proving Switch is closed, the Unit Controller will control the modulating valve to prevent the
supply air temperature from dropping below 38.0 °F.
84
If the Supply Fan Air Proving Switch is open (unit
OFF) and the Outdoor Air Temperature is less than
40.0 °F, a voltage signal will be sent to the modulating valve to open to 100% or 0% if the valve Action is
programmed for “REVERSE.”
Freeze Fault
The Unit Controller monitors the status of the “HW
/ STEAM FRZ STATUS” through terminal block TB7
Terminal 14. If 24 volts is present, closed contact for
10 seconds, a voltage signal will be sent to the modulating valve to open to 100% or 0 % if the valve Action
is programmed for “REVERSE.” The Primary Control
will start a 5 minute Freeze Trip Timer. The freeze stat
closes at 35.0 °F. The STATUS screen of the User Interface will display “SENSOR / MISC STATUS SAFETY TRIP” and the HISTORY screen will show “WRN
TRIP FREEZESTAT.”
If the “HW / STEAM FRZ STATUS” goes low, open
contact during this period, the Unit Controller will resume normal operation.
If the “HW / STEAM FRZ STATUS” remains high,
closed contact at the end of this period, the Unit Controller will shut the unit down and generate a “LOCKOUT
HOT WATER FREEZE” fault. The STATUS screen of
the User Interface will display “SENSOR / MISC STATUS SAFETY LOCKOUT” and “UNIT OVERALL –
UNIT LOCKOUT.” The HISTORY screen will show
“LOCKOUT HOT WATER FREEZE.”
Morning Warm Up
Morning Warm Up can be initiated in three ways:
1. Hardwired digital signal to the W1 input.
2. A Morning Warm Up command from a BAS.
3. Self initiated through the internal “ADAPTIVE
MORN WARM UP ACTIVE” mode.
The Morning Warm Up operation will be the same for
all unit configurations.
Morning Warm Up function will be active if the following conditions are met:
• “MORNING WARM UP” is set to USER ENABLED. “MORNING WARM UP” can be found
under the PROGRAM key, HEATING subsection
of the User Interface.
• The Occupancy mode is UNOCCUPIED STANDBY.
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Morning Warm Up function will be inactive if any of
the following conditions are met:
calculates the “MORNING WARM UP OPT TIME”
by averaging the time it takes to bring the “RETURN
AIR TEMP” to within 0.5 °F of the “RAT HEATING
SETPOINT” for three consecutive days. The three
warm up times are averaged and added to a 10-minute
offset. The new time is used as the “MORNING WARM
UP OPT TIME” for the next day.
• “MORNING WARM UP” is set to USER DISABLED.
In order to use Adaptive Morning Warm Up, the Primary Control must be configured as follows:
• And one of the following is true:
1. There is a W1 input.
2. A Morning Warm Up command is received
from a BAS.
• The occupancy mode is OCCUPIED.
• The W1 low heat input is lost or the Morning
Warm Up command from a BAS is lost.
Sequence of Operation
1. The return fan starts.
2. After 5 minutes, the Unit Controller compares the
Return Air Temperature to the “RAT HEATING
SETPOINT.”
3. If the Return Air Temperature is greater than the
“RAT HEATING SETPOINT” minus 1.0 °F, the
Unit Controller will not energize the heating sequence.
4. If the Return Air Temperature is less than or
equal to the “RAT HEATING SETPOINT” minus
1.0 °F, the Unit Controller will energize the heating sequence.
5. The Unit Controller sets the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP
ACTIVE SP” as follows:
• VARIABLE AIR VOLUME units: “HEATING SAT.”
• SZVAV units: “2ND STAGE HEATING
SETPOINT.”
6. The heat source remains energized until the Return Air Temperature is greater than or equal to
the “RAT HEATING SETPOINT” plus 0.5 °F or
the morning warm up command is removed or the
unit switches to occupied mode.
Adaptive Morning Warm Up
Adaptive Morning Warm Up can only be used when
the internal Schedule function is employed to switch
the unit from Unoccupied to Occupied mode. The Unit
Controller calculates the start time for the heat to ensure the Return Air Temperature is within 0.5 °F of the
“RAT HEATING SETPOINT” when the unit switches
to the occupied mode. To do this, the Unit Controller
TEMPMASTER
• The “OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE” must be programmed for the Occupied, Unoccupied start and
stop times. This is done through the SCHEDULE
key of the User Interface.
• The “OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE” must be USER
ENABLED. This is done through the SCHEDULE key of the User Interface.
• “MORNING WARM UP” must be set to USER
ENABLED. This can be done through the PROGRAM key, HEATING subsection of the User
Interface.
• “ADAPT MORN WARM UP” must be set to
USER ENABLED. This can be done through the
PROGRAM key, HEATING subsection of the
User Interface.
• “RAT HEATING SETPOINT” must be set. This
can be done through the SETPOINTS key, HEATING subsection of the User Interface.
• “MORNING WARM UP MAX TIME” must be set.
This can be done through the SETPOINTS key,
HEATING subsection of the User Interface.
The following limitations apply:
• If the “MORNING WARM UP OPT TIME” exceeds the “MORNING WARM UP MAX TIME,”
the “MORNING WARM UP OPT TIME” shall be
“MORNING WARM UP MAX TIME.”
• If the “MORNING WARM UP OPT TIME” is determined to be less than 15 minutes, the “MORNING WARM UP OPT TIME” shall be set to 15
minutes.
• The default values for “DAILY WARM UP TIME
DAY 1,” “DAILY WARM UP TIME DAY 2,” and
“DAILY WARM UP TIME DAY 3” shall initially
be set at 60 minutes. These values can be reset to
the default values by turning the “MORN WARM
UP” to USER DISABLED and then back USER
ENABLED.
85
5
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Sequence of Operation
1. The return fan starts.
2. After 5 minutes, the Unit Controller compares the
Return Air Temperature to the “RAT HEATING
SETPOINT.”
3. If the Return Air Temperature is greater than the
“RAT HEATING SETPOINT” minus 1.0 °F, the
Unit Controller will not energize the heating sequence and it sets the daily warm up time to 5
minutes.
Where:
• Warm Up time = time to be recorded as the Daily
Warm Up Time
• Time = Elapsed time when Warm Up Stopped
• TEMP2 = “
RETURN AIR TEMP” when the Warm
Up stopped
• TEMP1 = “
RETURN AIR TEMP” when the
Warm Up started
• Setpoint = “RAT HEATING SETPOINT”
4. If the Return Air Temperature is less than or
equal to the “RAT HEATING SETPOINT” minus
1.0 °F, the Unit Controller will energize the heating sequence based on the “MORNING WARM
UP OPTIME.”
• If the time from when heat is started and
Morning Warm Up is stopped is less than
10 minutes, the Unit Controller will use the
daily warm up time for the previous day and
will not approximate a warm up time.
5. The Unit Controller sets the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP
ACTIVE SP” as follows:
• If the approximate daily warm up time exceeds the “MORNING WARM UP MAX
TIME,” the daily warm up time will be set
equal to the “MORNING WARM UP MAX
TIME.”
• VARIABLE AIR VOLUME: “HEATING
SAT.”
• SZVAV units: “2ND STAGE HEATING
SETPOINT.”
6. The heat source remains energized until the Return Air Temperature is more than or equal to the
“RAT HEATING SETPOINT” plus 0.5° F or the
unit goes into the occupied mode.
7. The Unit Controller records the time the heat
source is energized as described below:
EXHAUST FAN OPERATION
On/Off Control Based On Building Pressure
Required Programmed Values
“POWER EXHAUST TYPE” must be set to “ON-OFF
PRESS CONTROL” through the OPTIONS key, EXHAUST subsection of the User Interface.
If the heat source was terminated because it was
within 0.5 °F of the “RAT HEATING SETPOINT,”
the Unit Controller replaces the Day 3 time with
the Day 2 time, the Day 2 times with the Day 1
time, and replaces the Day 1 time with the current
value. It then averages the three values and adds
10 minutes, and this becomes the new “MORNING WARM UP OPT TIME” for the next day.
“BUILDING PRESSURE ACTIVE SETPOINT” must
be set using the SETPOINTS key, EXHAUST subsection of the User Interface.
If the heat source does not bring the “RETURN AIR
TEMP” up to the “RAT HEATING SETPOINT” before
the Morning Warm Up is stopped, the Unit Controller
calculates a approximate daily warm up time using the
following formula:
This option is available on all units. The fixed speed exhaust motor is turned ON and OFF based on the building pressure. When the Building Static Pressure input
is equal to or greater than the “BUILDING PRESSURE
SETPOINT” plus the “BLDG PRESSURE CNTL OFFSET,” the exhaust fan will turn ON. When the Building
Static Pressure input is equal to or less than the “BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT” minus the “BLDG PRESSURE CNTL OFFSET,” the exhaust fan will turn OFF.
{ }
=
TIME
TEMP 2 –
TEMP 1
86
* (Setpoint – Temp1)
“BLDG PRESSURE CNTRL OFFSET” must be set using the SETPOINTS key, EXHAUST subsection of the
User Interface.
Operation
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Modulating Damper with Fixed Speed
Exhaust
Modulating Exhaust with VFD
Required Programmed Values
“POWER EXHAUST TYPE” must be set to “MODULATE DAMPER - VFD” through the OPTIONS key,
EXHAUST subsection of the User Interface.
“POWER EXHAUST TYPE” must be set to “MODULATE DAMPER - VFD” through the OPTIONS key,
EXHAUST subsection of the User Interface.
“BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT” must be set using the SETPOINTS key, EXHAUST subsection of the
User Interface.
“EXHAUST OUTPUT FOR FAN START” must be set
using the SETPOINTS key, EXHAUST subsection of
the User Interface.
“EXHAUST OUTPUT FOR FAN STOP” must be set
using the SETPOINTS key, EXHASUT subsection of
the User Interface.
Operation
This option is available on all units. A variable voltage analog output from the Unit Controller controls
the position of the exhaust damper. The output is based
on the difference between the actual building pressure
and “BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT.” If the actual building pressure is greater than the “BUILDING
PRESSURE SETPOINT,” the Unit Controller will initiate a voltage ramp to the exhaust damper. The rate at
which the (voltage) increases will vary based on the
difference between the actual building pressure and the
“BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT.” The User Interface will show this output as a %. 0 volts is 0% and
10 volts is 100%. This output can be found at terminals
3 and 4 of terminal block TB9 of the Unit Controller.
When the percentage output to the exhaust damper is
more than or equal to the “EXHAUST OUTPUT FOR
FAN START,” the Unit Controller will send a binary
signal to the exhaust motor and the motor will start.
This binary output originates at terminal 4 of terminal
block TB1 of the Unit Controller.
The exhaust damper will then modulate to maintain the
“BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT.”
When the percentage output to the exhaust damper is
less than or equal to the “EXHAUST OUTPUT FOR
FAN STOP,” the Unit Controller will remove the binary signal to the exhaust motor and the motor will stop.
TEMPMASTER
Required Programmed Values
“BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT” must be set using the SETPOINTS key, EXHAUST subsection of the
User Interface.
“EXHAUST OUTPUT FOR FAN START” must be set
using the SETPOINTS key, EXHAUST subsection of
the User Interface.
“EXHAUST OUTPUT FOR FAN STOP” must be set
using the SETPOINTS key, EXHASUT subsection of
the User Interface.
Operation
This option is available on all units. A variable voltage analog output from the Unit Controller varies the
speed of the VFD exhaust motor. The output is based
on the difference between the actual building pressure
and “BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT.” If the actual building pressure is greater than the “BUILDING
PRESSURE SETPOINT,” the Unit Controller will initiate a voltage ramp to the VFD. The rate at which the
(voltage) increases will vary based on the difference
between the actual building pressure and the “BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT.” The User Interface will
show this output as a %. 0 volts is 0% and 10 volts is
100%. This output can be found at terminals 3 and 4 of
terminal block TB9 of the Unit Controller.
When the percentage output to the VFD is more than or
equal to the “EXHAUST OUTPUT FOR FAN START,”
the Unit Controller will send a binary signal to the exhaust fan VFD and the motor will start. This binary
output originates at terminal 4 of terminal block TB1
of the Unit Controller.
The speed of the VFD will then modulate to maintain
the “BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT.”
When the percentage output to the VFD is less than or
equal to the “EXHAUST OUTPUT FOR FAN STOP,”
the Unit Controller will remove the binary signal to the
exhaust fan VFD and the motor will stop.
87
5
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
VFD Exhaust Fan Control BAS
Overview
A communicated value has been provided to allow
for control of the Exhaust Fan via a communicated
signal from the Building Automation System (BAS).
This will allow direct Exhaust Fan Control to be provided by the BAS. This additional control will allow
for building pressure control to be maintained by an
external source and not controlled directly by the unit.
The option of standard building pressure control is still
available, as seen in the previous section Modulating
Exhaust with VFD.
Required Programmed Values
"EXHAUST CONTROL BAS" must be set to "USER
ENABLED" in the SERVICE key or enabled through
BAS Point EXH_CTRL_BAS(BV24).
BAS Point to control Exhaust Fan Speed is EXH_
DAMPER/VFD(AV52).
"POWER EXHAUST TYPE" must be set to "MODULATE DAMPER-VFD" through the OPTIONS key,
EXHAUST subsection of the User Interface.
"EXHAUST OUTPUT FOR FAN START" must be set
using the SETPOINTS key, EXHAUST subsection of
the User Interface.
When the Analog Value is less than or equal to the
"EXHAUST OUTPUT FOR FAN STOP," the Unit Controller will remove the binary signal to the exhaust fan
VFD and the motor will stop.
RETURN FAN OPERATION
VFD Return Fan without Exhaust
Required Programmed Values
“POWER EXHAUST TYPE” must be set to “RETURN
FAN W/O EXH” through the OPTIONS key, EXHAUST subsection of the User Interface.
Operation
The Return Fan is started and stopped with the Supply
Fan; if the Supply Fan is ON, the Return Fan will also
be energized. The speed of the Return Fan will be controlled by the Return Fan Plenum Pressure Control Loop
to maintain the Active Return Plenum Pressure setpoint.
The Active Return Plenum pressure setpoint will be set
to the Minimum Plenum Pressure of 0.05” W.C.
VFD Return Fan with Exhaust
Required Programmed Values
“POWER EXHAUST TYPE” must be set to “RETURN
FAN W / EXHAUST” through the OPTIONS key, EXHAUST subsection of the User Interface.
"EXHAUST OUTPUT FOR FAN STOP" must be set
using the SETPOINTS key, EXHAUST subsection of
the User Interface.
“BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT” must be set using the SETPOINTS key, EXHAUST subsection of the
User Interface.
Operation
“RETURN PRESSURE HIGH SETP” must be set using the SETPOINTS key, SUPPLY SYSTEM subsection of the User Interface.
When the "EXHAUST CONTROL BAS" is set to USER
ENABLED and the "POWER EXHAUST TYPE" is set
to MODULATE DAMPER-VFD, the controller shall
read a BACnet BAS Analog Value. This Analog Value
shall be set up for 0-100%.
The controller shall read the BACnet Analog Value
and drive the "EXHAUST/RETURN FAN VFD" to this
value. For example, if the Analog Value is 27%, the
"EXHAUST/RETURN FAN VFD" shall be 27%. The
outputs shall follow this Analog Value.
When the Analog Value is more than or equal to the
"EXHAUST OUTPUT FOR FAN START," the Unit Controller will send a binary signal to the exhaust fan VFD,
and the motor will start. This binary output originates at
terminal 4 of terminal block TB1 of the Unit Controller.
88
Operation
The Return Fan is started and stopped with the Supply Fan; if the Supply Fan is ON, the Return Fan will
also be energized. The speed of the Return Fan will be
controlled by the Return Fan Plenum Pressure Control
Loop to maintain the Active Return Plenum Pressure
setpoint. The Active Return Plenum Pressure setpoint
will vary based on the value of the Exhaust Output.
The Exhaust Output value is generated by a proportional control algorithm using the “BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT” (see Figure 34 on page 89).
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
100%
Exhaust
Output
0%
RETURN PRESSURE
HIGH SETP
Min. Return
Plenum Pressure
(0.05”)
Active Return Plenum
Pressure Set Point
LD10153A
Figure 33 - ACTIVE RETURN PLENUM
PRESSURE SETPOINT VS. EXHAUST OUTPUT
VFD Return Fan with Exhaust BAS Control
Overview
A communicated value has been added to allow for
the control of the Modulating Exhaust Damper when
using a Return Fan with Exhaust on the TempMaster
OmniElite equipment. This will allow direct Modulated Exhaust Damper control to be provided by the
BAS. This additional control will allow for building
pressure controlto be maintained by an external source
and not controlled directly by the unit.
Required Program Values
"EXHAUST CONTROL BAS" must be set to "USER
ENABLED" in the SERVICE Key or enabled through
BAS Point EXH_CTRL_BAS(BV24).
BAS Point to control Exhaust Damper Position is
EXH_DAMPER/VFD(AV52)
"POWER EXHAUST TYPE" must be set to "RETURN
FAN W/EXHAUST" through the OPTIONS key, EXHAUST subsection of the User Interface.
"BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT" must be set using the SETPOINTS key, EXHAUST subsection of
the User Interface.
"RETURN PRESSURE HIGH SETP" must be set using the SETPOINTS key, SUPPLY SYSTEM subsection of the User Interface.
Operation
When the "EXHAUST CONTROL BAS" is set to "USER
ENABLED" and the "POWER EXHAUST TYPE" is set
to "RETURN FAN W/EXHAUST," the controller shall
read a BACnet BAS Analog Value. This Analog Value
shall be set up for 0–100%.
TEMPMASTER
The controller shall read the BACnet Analog Value
and drive the "EXHAUST DAMPER" to this value. For
example, if the Analog Value is 27%, the "EXHAUST
DAMPER" shall be 27%. The outputs shall follow this
Analog Value. The Return Fan operations remains unchanged. The speed of the Return Fan is still controlled
by the Return Fan Plenum Pressure versus the Return
Fan Plenum Pressure Setpoint. For specific Return Fan
operation, see Return Fan Operation on page 88 and
its subsections.
5
VENTILATION SYSTEM
Overview
The Unit Controller can be configured for several different damper and ventilation options. The damper options are:
• None
• 2-Position Damper
• Standard Dampers
• TEK Air Full IAQ
Everything except the NONE and 2-POSTION DAMPER can be configured for:
• Demand Ventilation
• Fixed Minimum
In order for the Ventilation System to be active, the following must occur:
• The unit is in any OCC Mode.
• There must be a 24-volt output from the Unit
Controller to the Supply Fan control circuit. This
output is contained at Terminal Block TB1 - Terminal 2.
• There must be a 24-volt input to the Unit Controller from the Supply Fan Air Proving Switch
to verify Supply Fan operation 30 seconds after
the Supply Fan circuit is energized. This input is
contained at Terminal Block TB7 – Terminal 10.
• When the economizer becomes active, the position of the dampers are controlled by the Economizer PI logic and can move the dampers beyond
the Active Ventilation Minimum Position; however, the Economizer PI logic can never close the
dampers less than the Active Ventilation Minimum Position.
89
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
2-Position Damper
Required Program Values
“DAMPER HARDWARE” must be set to “2-POSITION DAMPER.” This is set through the OPTIONS
key, VENTILATION subsection of the User Interface.
“VENTILATION SYSTEM” must be set to ENABLED.
This is set through the PROGRAM key, VENTILATION subsection of the User Interface.
Sequence Of Operation
The analog output to the Outdoor damper is 10.0 volts
when the Ventilation System Status is active. The analog output to the Outdoor damper is 0.0 volts when the
Ventilation System Status is inactive. The amount of
outdoor air is set by adjusting the damper linkage
CO2 level plus the “INSIDE-OUTSIDE CO2 OFFSET,”
the Unit Controller will use a PI algorithm to open
the outside air damper from the “OA DAMPER MIN
POSITION 1” or “MIN FLOW DEMAND VENTILATION” towards the “OA DAMPER MIN POSITION 2”
or “MAX FLOW DEMAND VENTILATION” setting.
The Unit Controller will then modulate the damper to
lower the indoor CO2 level between the minimum and
maximum settings.
Standard Damper w/ Fixed Minimum
Required Program Values
“VENTILATION CONTROL” must be set to “FIXED
MINIMUM.” This is set through the OPTIONS key,
VENTILATION subsection of the User Interface.
Required Program Values
“DAMPER HARDWARE” must be set to “STANDARD DAMPERS” or “TEK AIR FULL IAQ.” This is
set through the OPTIONS key, VENTILATION subsection of the User Interface.
“VENTILATION CONTROL” must be set to “DEMAND.” This is set through the OPTIONS key, VENTILATION subsection of the User Interface.
“VENTILATION SYSTEM” must be set to ENABLED.
This is set through the PROGRAM key, VENTILATION subsection of the User Interface.
“DAMPER HARDWARE” must be set to “STANDARD DAMPERS” or “TEK AIR FULL IAQ.” This is
set through the OPTIONS key, VENTILATION subsection of the User Interface.
On units configured as “TEK AIR FULL IAQ,” the
“MINIMUM OA FLOW SETPOINT” must be set
through the SETPOINTS key, VENTILATION subsection of the User Interface.
“VENTILATION SYSTEM” must be set to ENABLED.
This is set through the PROGRAM key, VENTILATION subsection of the User Interface.
On units configured as “STANDARD DAMPERS,”
the “OA DAMPER MIN POSITION 1” and “OA
DAMPER MIN POSITION 2” must be set through the
SETPOINTS key, VENTILATION subsection of the
User Interface.
Standard Damper w/ Demand Ventilation
“INSIDE-OUTSIDE CO2 OFFSET” must be set
through the SETPOINTS key, VENTILATION subsection of the User Interface.
On units configured as “STANDARD DAMPERS,”
the “OA DAMPER MIN POSITION 1” and “OA
DAMPER MIN POSITION 2” must be set through the
SETPOINTS key, VENTILATION subsection of the
User Interface.
On units configured as “TEK AIR FULL IAQ,” the
“MIN FLOW DEMAND VENTILATION” and “MAX
FLOW DEMAND VENTILATION” must be set
through the SETPOINTS key, VENTILATION subsection of the User Interface.
Sequence Of Operation
The position of the outdoor air damper is determined
by the difference of the CO2 level in the return air versus the CO2 level of the outdoor air. When the indoor
CO2 level becomes more than or equal to the outdoor
90
Sequence Of Operation
On unit with air measuring stations configured for
“TEK AIR FULL IAQ,” the damper minimum position is the programmed “MINIMUM OA FLOW
SETPOINT.”
On units configured for “STANDARD DAMPERS”
and the Unit Type is set to SZVAV, the damper minimum position is the programmed “OA DAMPER MIN
POSITION 1.”
On units configured for “STANDARD DAMPERS” and
the Unit Type is set to VARIABLE AIR VOLUME, the
minimum position will vary between the “OA DAMPER MIN POSITION 1” and “OA DAMPER MIN POSITION 2” based on the speed of the VFD Supply Fan.
As the fan speed decreases, the damper position will
increase. Figure 35 on page 91 indicates how the
algorithm shall function.
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
100%
4
Curve
80%
OA Damper
Position
Active SP
3
60%
OA Damper
Minimum
Position
1
10%
2
40%
25%
25%
2
20%
1
0%
OA Damper
Maximum
Position
0%
50%
3
50%
4
80%
5
100%
Supply Fan VFD Speed
Figure 34 - FIXED MINIMUM VENTILATION CONTROL - OA DAMPER VS. SUPPLY FAN VFD SPEED
Tek-Air: Air Measuring Station
General
LD21615
Figure 35 - TEK-AIR PROBE AND TRANSDUCER
The unit uses two probe assemblies located between
the outdoor air intake and the outdoor air damper.
There is one on each side. Air moving through the intake impacts the face of the probe and must then flow
around it. A high pressure region is created on the forward surface of the probe. As the air flows around it, a
low pressure area is created in the wake of the probe.
The difference between these two pressures can be
related by calculation to the volume of ventilation air
being drawn in. The system consists of two probes, a
transducer, and a monitor.
Required Program Values
“DAMPER HARDWARE” must be set to “TEKAIR
FULL IAQ.” This is set through the OPTIONS key,
VENTILATION subsection of the User Interface.
“VENTILATION SYSTEM” must be set to “ENABLE.”
This is set through the PROGRAM key, VENTILATION subsection of the User Interface.
“UNIT INSTALLED ALTITUDE” is set using the
SETPOINT key, VENTILATION subsection of the
User Interface.
Factory Setup
The air measuring station should be set up from the
factory. These values can be found under the “CUSTOM SET-UP” menu of the TEK Air monitor. In order
to view this section you will be required to enter password 1234. The following items and their factory set
up values are contained under this menu.
TEMPMASTER
LD21616
Figure 36 - TEK-AIR MONITOR
• “AREA OF FLOW DEVICE” – This is the area
of flow in square feet. The parameter should be
27.1 ft2.
• “SENSOR FLOW COEFF” – This is the Sensor Flow Coefficient for the type of differential
pressure generating device being used. We use an
IAQ-TEK probe, which uses a value of 0.762.
• “ALTITUDE” – This is the altitude in feet above
or below sea level for the location of the probe.
The Unit Controller makes an altitude correction
calculation; therefore, this parameter should always be set to 0 feet.
91
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
• “LOW FLOW ALARM STPT” – This is the
low flow alarm setpoint in CFM. This parameter
should be set to 0 CFM.
• “ANALOG OUT FLOW STPT – This is the fullscale range in CFM for the analog output scaling.
This parameter should be set to 32,000 CFM for
70-80 ton units and 36,000 CFM for 90-105 ton
units.
• “ALARM DELAY PERIOD” – Several of the
IAQ-TEK alarm conditions have their initiation
inhibited for a delay period. This period is utilized
to create a delay between the actual occurrence of
the alarm and the reporting of the alarm at the display. This parameter should be set to 20 seconds.
• “PRESS. AVERAGE INT” – This is the averaging time for the average pressure calculation. The
parameter should be set to 10 seconds.
• “USE FAN INTERLOCK” – The fan interlock is
used to interlock the action of the monitor to the
running of the fan. When this function is turned
ON, the low CFM airflow alarm is deactivated
any time the digital input function reports that the
fan is OFF. This parameter should be set to ON.
• “BALANCERS ADJ FACT” – This feature allows
the application of an airflow correction fac-tory
based on a difference between the calculated airflow and the air balancers report. Factory Default
is 100%. For example, if the monitor indicates
the flow is 1000 CFM and the Balancer indicates
the flow is 900 CFM, the BAF is 1000/900=90%.
Factory Default is 100%.
• “PASSWORD CHANGE” – This allows the password to be changed. The password is set to 1234.
• “AUTO-ZERO INTERVAL” – This parameter
should be set to 30 minutes.
• “ENCL TEMP SET PT” – The transducer has an
internal heater to maintain a constant temperature
in the transducer enclosure. This value is used in
the operation of the heater. The parameter should
be set to 120 °F.
• “OA TEMP SENSOR BIAS” – Allows the air
balancer to adjust the monitor outside air temperature readings to those observed by the air
balancer. The Unit Controller uses the outside air
input from the outdoor air sensor. This parameter
should always be set to 0.
92
• “TRANSDUCER ZERO” – This sets the monitor
zero range in “W.C.” corresponding to the transducer 4mA output. This parameter should be set
to 0.00" W.C..
• “TRANSDUCER FS” – This sets the monitor full
scale range in “W.C.” corresponding to the transducer 20mA output. This parameter should be set
to 0.25” W.C.
Diagnostic Alarms
The Diagnostic Alarms are used to provide diagnostic
information on the performance of the product, and to
alert the user to possible malfunction. Following is a
description of the Diagnostic Alarms that are available
at the IAQ-TEK monitor.
• LOW FLOW ALARM – The Low Flow Alarm
is used to alert the building operators that the intake volume has fallen below the minimum acceptable level. The control compares the derived
CFM value to the programmed “LOW FLOW
ALARM” setpoint. The unit is shipped from the
factory with a “LOW FLOW ALARM” setpoint
of 0 CFM. Should the airflow remain below this
value for longer than the programmed “ALARM
DELAY PERIOD," 20 seconds, the IAQ-TEK
monitor will show a Low Flow Alarm. To reset
to normal, the air volume must rise to a value that
is 10% higher than the “LOW FLOW ALARM”
setpoint. Once this threshold has been crossed, the
alarm is reset automatically.
• REVERSE FLOW ALARM – This is used to
identify that the airflow is blowing out of the
intake of the outdoor air. Should the airflow remain reversed for longer than the programmed
“ALARM DELAY PERIOD," 20 seconds, the
IAQ-TEK monitor will show a Reverse Flow
Alarm. In order reset, the pressure input from the
probe to the transducer must increase to zero or
have a sign change to positive. Once the value has
changed, the alarm is reset automatically.
• PRESSURE LOSS ALARM – The signal from
the pressure transducer to the monitor indicates a
negative pressure. The alarm will be initiated immediately without a delay period.
• OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
LOSS ALARM – Indicates the OA Temp Input to
the monitor went either high (input short) or low
(input open). The alarm will be initiated immediately without a delay period.
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
• ENCLOSURE TEMPERATURE LOSS – Indicates the enclosure temperature input to the monitor from the transducer went high (input short) or
low (input open). The alarm will be initiated immediately without a delay period.
• LOSS OF ENCLOSURE HEATER – Indicates
the enclosure temperature fell 11.0 °F below the
“ENCL TEMP SET PT.” Should this remain low
for longer than the programmed “ALARM DELAY PERIOD," 20 seconds, the IAQ-TEK monitor will show a Loss of Enclosure Heater Alarm. If
the temperature remains below for 1 hour, a heater
malfunction will be initiated.
• AUTO-ZERO VALVE MALFUNCTION – Indicates the pressure transducer’s auto-zero valve
malfunc-tion. The alarm will be initiated immediately without a delay period.
• MEMORY LOSS ALARM – Indicates there has
been a loss of nonvolatile memory parameters.
The alarm will be initiated immediately without
a delay period.
• CHECKSUM ERROR ALARM – Indicates
there is a memory checksum error. The alarm will
be initi-ated immediately without a delay period.
Damper
Output
#1 & #2
0 Volts
100%
0%
Economizer PI Output
LD10162A
Figure 38 - TEK AIR FULL IAQ ECONOMIZER
5
Air Measurement Station Auto Zero
The Unit Controller will conduct a Auto Zero process
every 10 hours provided the following criteria have
been met:
• The unit has a TEK Air Full IAQ station installed.
• The BI output to the Supply Fan is OFF for 10
minutes.
• 10 hours have elapsed since the last auto-zero attempt.
or
• Unit operating state is STOP format for at least
10 minutes.
Air Measurement Station Field Adjustment
TEK Air Full IAQ
Sequence Of Operation
When Ventilation Status is ACTIVE, damper output
#1 shall be controlled per the Flow Control PI Output.
Figure 38 on page 93 details the relationship of the
Damper Output voltage vs. the Flow Control PI Output.
10 Volts
Damper
Output
10 Volts
#1 & #2
Because the Unit Controller takes into account elevation and temperature in making the airflow calculation,
the calculated airflow value is very accurate; however, in some instances, the value measured by the air
balancer may not match the value shown in the User
Interface. The correction factor can be programmed
into the Unit Controller through the SETPOINTS key,
VENTILATION subsection “AMS FACTOR 1.” Divide the airflow value measured by the air balancer by
the airflow value shown in the User Interface. Enter
this value as “AMS FACTOR 1.”
TEK Air Full IAQ Air Measurement Station
0 Volts
100%
0%
Flow Control PI Output
LD10161A
Figure 37 - EK AIR FULL IAQ FLOW CONTROL
When OA conditions are suitable for economizing
Damper Output #1 shall be controlled per the Flow
Control PI Output. Figure 39 on page 93 details the
relationship of the OA Damper voltage vs. the Economizer PI Output.
TEMPMASTER
A “WRN - OA FLOW PRS 1” will be displayed in the
HISTORY buffer and a “SENSOR/MSC WARNING”
will be posted under the STATUS key of the Unit Controller if the “OA FLOWINPUT 1” is less than 700
counts for 300 seconds.
93
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
COMFORT VENTILATION
SMOKE PURGE
In order for this mode of operation to function the following parameters must be programmed into the Unit
Controller through the User Interface:
The following parameters must be programmed into
the Unit Controller:
• “UNIT TYPE” must be set to “SINGLE ZONE
VAV” using the OPTIONS key, UNIT DATA subsection of the User Interface.
• “COMFORT VENTILATION” must be USER
ENABLED using the PROGRAM key, VENTILATION subsection of the User Interface.
• “OCC ZONE COOLING SETPOINT” must be
set using the SETPOINTS key, COOLING subsection of the User Interface.
• “OCC ZONE HEATING SETPOINT” must be set
using the SETPOINTS key, HEATING subsection
of the User Interface.
When “COMFORT VENTILATION” is selected, the
Unit Controller monitors the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP”
and uses it to energize mechanical cooling or heating
even though the thermostat or zone sensor satisfies the
normal heating or cooling demand. This prevents the
space temperature from getting out of bounds before
mechanical heating or cooling is energized. This is
usually used when there is a large demand for outdoor
air for ventilation.
• “SMOKE PURGE SEQ 1” can be set to
“PURGE,” “PRESSURIZATION,” or “EVACUATION” through the OPTIONS key, UNIT DATA
subsection of the User Interface.
• “SMOKE PURGE SEQ 2” can be set to
“PURGE,” “PRESSURIZATION,” or “EVACUATION” through the OPTIONS key, UNIT DATA
subsection of the User Interface.
• “SMOKE PURGE SEQ 3” can be set to
“PURGE,” “PRESSURIZATION,” or “EVACUATION” through the OPTIONS key, UNIT DATA
subsection of the User Interface.
Whenever a Smoke Purge sequence is started, all normal heating and cooling functions are stopped, regardless of control inputs. This will occur within 2 seconds
after the Smoke Purge signal is received.
On VAV units, duct static pressure control is maintained during smoke purge operation.
If the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP” is equal to or greater than
the “OCC ZONE COOLING SETPOINT” plus 5.0 °F
the Unit Controller will enter the COMFORT VENT
COOLING mode and initiate compressor operation.
“SMOKE PURGE SEQ 1,” “SMOKE PURGE SEQ 2,”
and “SMOKE PURGE SEQ 3” are initiated through
a digital input to the Unit Controller. The input for
“SMOKE PURGE SEQ 1” is at terminal block TB8 –
Terminal 4. The input for “SMOKE PURGE SEQ 2”
is at terminal block TB8 – Terminal 5. The input for
“SMOKE PURGE SEQ 3” is at terminal block TB8 –
Terminal 7.
If the “SUPPLY AIR TEMP” is equal to or less than the
“OCC ZONE HEATING SETPOINT” minus 5.0 °F,
the Unit Controller will enter the COMFORT VENT
HEATING mode and initiate heating operation.
“SMOKE PURGE SEQ 1” will have the highest priority, “SMOKE PURGE SEQ 2” will have medium
priority, and “SMOKE PURGE SEQ 3” will have the
lowest priority.
The Unit Controller will terminate COMFORT VENT
mode if:
“PURGE” – purge shall be used to displace the air
inside the space with fresh outside air. When this sequence is started the following will occur:
• The “SUPPLY AIR TEMP” is less than the “OCC
ZONE COOLING SETPOINT” minus 5.0 °F for
5 minutes.
• The “SUPPLY AIR TEMP” is greater than the
“OCC ZONE HEATING SETPOINT” plus 5.0 °F
for 5 minutes.
The unit switches into the OCCUPIED HEATING OR
OCCUPIED COOLING mode as a result of a space
sensor demand for cooling or heating.
94
• Start the Supply Fan, if not already ON.
• Start the Return Fan, if not already ON.
• Start the Exhaust Fan, if not already ON.
• Set all Outside Air Damper Output(s) to 100%.
• Set the Return Air Damper to 0%.
• Set the Exhaust Damper Output to 100%.
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
“PRESSURIZATION” – Purge shall be used to pressurize the building or space in order to force the air
inside the space through the walls to adjacent spaces or
outside the building envelope. When this sequence is
started the following will occur:
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
“EVACUATION” – Purge shall be used to evacuate
(negatively pressurize) the building or space in order
to draw air through the walls from adjacent spaces or
outside the building envelope. When this sequence is
started the following will occur:
• Start the Supply Fan, if not already ON.
• Stop the Supply Fan if ON.
• Start the Return Fan, if not already ON.
• Start the Return Fan, if not already ON.
• Stop the Exhaust Fan if ON.
• Start the Exhaust Fan, if not already ON.
• Set all Outside Air Damper Output(s) to 100%.
• Set all Outside Air Damper Output(s) to 0%.
• Set the Return Air Damper to 0%.
• Set all Return Air Dampers to100%.
5
• Set the Exhaust Damper Output to 100%.
TEMPMASTER
95
SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
96
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
The User Interface is used to commission, monitor,
and troubleshoot the rooftop unit. It provides access to
operational data, parameter programming, and access
to past “history” information that was recorded at the
time of a unit or system fault.
The User Interface is installed in the low voltage control compartment of the rooftop unit.
The User Interface uses a flexible membrane style keypad and has an 80-character (2 lines of 40 characters)
liquid crystal display. The display has a lighted background for night viewing and can be viewed in direct
sunlight. The backlighting will energize when any button is pressed.
The keypad allows complete control of the system
from a central location. The keypad offers a multitude
of commands available to access displays, program pa-
rameters, and initiate system commands. The keypad
consists of 36 keys, that are divided into three categories: Data Entry, Navigation, and Menu Selection keys.
A description of each of the keys is contained below.
Data Entry Keys
The Data Entry keys provide a means to enter values
for items that support edits. The keys available to support numeric input are the 0 through 9 keys, the decimal key, the +/- key, the X key and the  key. The keys
available to support choice input are the ◄ key, the
► key, the X key, and the  key. Editing is started by
pressing the  key. Once editing has started, the user
must press either the  key or the X key. Any other
key press will result in the “Press  or X to Exit” message displayed for two seconds. If you try to edit an
item that is view only it will be ignored by the menu
system.
STATUS
SETPOINTS
UNIT DATA
PROGRAM
COOLING
OPTIONS
COMPRESSOR SYSTEMS
DATE/TIME
SUPPLY SYSTEM
SCHEDULE
OPERATING HOURS
START COUNTER
HEATING
ECONOMIZER
PRINT
VENTILATION
SERVICE
EXHAUST
HISTORY
UNIT
LD20070
Figure 39 - USER INTERFACE CONTROL PANEL
TEMPMASTER
97
6
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
When a numeric value that can be modified is displayed, the Default, High, and Low prompt will be
shown in the upper right portion of the display. The
cursor will be shown at the digit to be changed. The
cursor will be shown after editing has started. After
the desired numeric value has been entered, press the
 key to save the new value and exit the edit mode.
Pressing the ◄ key will fill in the default value. Edits
will only be accepted when followed by pressing the
 key. Pressing the X key while in the edit mode will
cancel the edit mode and leave the value unchanged. If
an out of range value is entered, the Default, High and
Low prompt is replaced by the “Out of Range” message for two seconds.
pressing the UNIT DATA key three times will bring
the user to the third screen of the UNIT DATA menu;
pressing the UNIT DATA key once, then pressing the
▼ key, then pressing the UNIT DATA key again will
bring the user to the first screen of the UNIT DATA
menu.
When a choice value that can be modified is displayed,
the ◄ ► prompt will be shown in the upper right portion of the display. The cursor will be shown after editing has been started. The ◄ key or the ► key will
allow the different choices to be viewed. When the desired choice is displayed, press the  key to save the
new value and exit the edit mode. Pressing the X key
while in the edit mode will cancel the edit mode and
leave the value unchanged.
When programming numeric or non-numeric values,
the ▼ key and the ▲ key are used to scroll forward
(down) and backward (up) through the items to be programmed or set.
Navigation Keys
The Navigation keys provide a means to browse items
within a menu. The keys currently available to support
navigation are the Menu Select keys, the ▲ key, the ▼
key, the ◄ key, and the ► key.
Pressing a Menu Select key brings the user to the first
screen under that menu. The screens within each menu
are arranged in a circular list. The user may browse
through the screens using the ▲ key and the ▼ key.
Pressing the ▼ key will advance through the screens
in order from top to bottom until the bottom screen has
been reached. When the bottom screen is displayed,
pressing the ▼ key will wrap the display to the top
screen of the menu. Pressing the ▲ key will move
through the screens in order from bottom to top until
the top screen has been reached. When top screen is
displayed, pressing the ▲ key will wrap the display to
the bottom screen of the menu. Once either the ▲ key
or the key ▼ is pressed, pressing any Menu Select key
will bring the user to the first screen under that menu
(even if it is the same menu being viewed).
Navigation through the circular list of items can also be
achieved by repeated presses of the same Menu Select
key, as long as no other keys are pressed. For example,
98
The ◄ key and the ► key are used to scroll “sideways” between the same displays for each system. For
example, when viewing the Sys 1 Pressures under the
COMPRESSOR SYSTEMS key, pressing the ► key
will scroll “sideways” to the Sys 2 Pressures display
and pressing the ◄ key will scroll “sideways” to the
Sys Pressures display for the last system on the unit.
Menu Select Keys
The following menu keys are available on the User
Interface: STATUS, UNIT DATA, COOLING, COMPRESSOR SYSTEMS (1, 2, or 3), SUPPLY SYSTEM, HEATING, ECONOMIZER, VENTILATION,
EXHAUST, SETPOINTS, PROGRAM, OPTIONS,
DATE/TIME, SCHEDULE, OPERATING HOURS /
START COUNTER, PRINT, SERVICE, and HISTORY.
Each of the above menu keys gives access to a list of
specific items contained in that menu. To minimize
clutter, only the items applicable to the current unit
configuration will be displayed. Pressing any of the
menu select keys at any time will send the user to the
first item of the associated menu, provided the user is
not editing an item in the current menu key item or the
menu key is being used to navigate through a list of
items.
Table 25 on page 99 through Table 33 on page 109
list the information that is contained under the STATUS, UNIT DATA, COOLING, COMPRESSOR SYSTEMS (1, 2, or 3), SUPPLY SYSTEM, HEATING,
ECONOMIZER, VENTILATION, and EXHAUST
menu selection keys of the User Interface. The tables
contain the Displayed Text, Pass Word Level (if applicable), Range of Values (if applicable), Default Value
(if applicable), what key (SETPOINTS, PROGRAM,
OPTIONS) to use to change the value (if applicable),
and under what circumstances the item is displayed.
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
Table 22 - STATUS
DISPLAY TEXT
SETTING
LOCATION
RANGE
DEFAULT
UNIT - OVERALL
STATUS
Local Stop / Run / Unit Trip / Unit Fault / Unit
Lockout / SMK Purge #-Press / SMK Purge #-Purge
/ SMK Purge #-Evac
Derived
Always
CURRENT OPER
MODE
OCC Standby / OCC Cooling Low / OCC Cooling
High / OCC Heating Low / OCC Heating High /
UNOCC Standby / UNOCC Cooling Low / UNOCC
Cooling High / UNOCC Heating Low / UNOCC
Heating High / Morning Warm-Up / Comfort Vent
Cooling / Comfort Vent Heating
Derived
Unit Type
Equals SZVAV
CURRENT OPER
MODE
Occupied Standby / Occupied Heating / Occupied
Cooling / Unoccupied Standby / Unoccupied
Heating / Unoccupied Cooling / Morning Warm-Up
Derived
Unit Type
Equals VAV
SUPPLY SYS
STATUS
Normal - Active / Normal Inactive / Safety Trip /
Safety Fault / Safety Lockout
Derived
Always
COMP SYS 1
STATUS
Normal - Comp A On / Normal - Comp B On /
Normal - Both On / Normal - Both Off / Safety Trip
/ Safety Fault / Safety Lockout / Low Amb Inhibit
/ Low Suct Temp Unl / High Dp Unload / User
Disabled
Derived
Always
COMP SYS 2
STATUS
Normal - Comp A On / Normal - Comp B On /
Normal - Both On / Normal - Both Off / Safety Trip
/ Safety Fault / Safety Lockout / Low Amb Inhibit
/ Low Suct Temp Unl / High Dp Unload / User
Disabled
Derived
Always
COMP SYS 3
STATUS
Normal - Comp A On / Normal - Comp B On /
Normal - Both On / Normal - Both Off / Safety Trip
/ Safety Fault / Safety Lockout / Low Amb Inhibit
/ Low Suct Temp Unl / High Dp Unload / User
Disabled
Derived
Always
HEATING SYS
STATUS
Normal - Active / Normal - Inactive / Safety Trip /
Safety Fault / Safety Lockout / User Disabled / None
Derived
Always
ECONO SYS
STATUS
Normal - Active / Normal - Inactive / Safety Trip /
Safety Fault / Safety Lockout / User Disabled / None
Derived
Always
VENT SYS
STATUS
Normal - Active / Normal - Inactive / Safety Trip /
Safety Fault / Safety Lockout / User Disabled / None
Derived
Always
EXHAUST SYS
STATUS
Normal - Active / Normal - Inactive / Safety Trip /
Safety Fault / Safety Lockout / User Disabled / None
Derived
Always
SENSOR / MISC
STATUS
Normal / Warning / Safety Trip / Safety Fault /
Safety Lockout
Derived
Always
FILTER STATUS
Okay / Change
Derived
Always
TEMPMASTER
SHOWN WHEN
6
99
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
Table 23 - UNIT DATA
DISPLAY TEXT
PASS
WORD
LEVEL
RANGE
Variable Air Volume /
Single Zone VAV
70 Ton, 75 Ton, 80 Ton, 85
Ton, 90 Ton, 95 Ton, 105
Ton
DEFAULT
SETTING
LOCATION
SHOW WHEN UNIT
TYPE IS:
SZVAV
Options /
Unit Data
Always
50 Ton
Options /
Unit Data
Always
UNIT TYPE
2
UNIT SIZE
2
REFRIGERANT TYPE
2
R22 / R407c / R410a
R-22
CONTROL METHOD
1
Wired Zone Temp / Comm
Zone Temp
Staged
SAT RESET METHOD
1
Hardwired, Outside Air,
Return Air, Supply Fan
Speed
Hardwired Input
-20.0 °F To 180.0 °F
50.0 °F To 150.0 °F
Look Up Table
Derived
-20.0 °F To 180.0 °F
OCC Zone Heating
Setpoint + 2.0 °F
Look Up Table
-20.0 °F To 180.0 °F
Look Up Table
UNOCC Zone Heating
Setpoint + 2.0 °F To 95.0 °F
85.0 °F
Options /
Unit Data
Options /
Unit Data
Options /
Unit Data
Always
Unit Type Equals SZVAV
Unit Type Equals Variable
Air Volume
SUPPLY AIR TEMP
CURRENT
ACTIVE SP
Unit Type Equals Variable
Air Volume
ZONE TEMP*
CURRENT
OCC ZONE COOLING
SETPOINT
1
72.0 °F
Setoints/
Unit Data
Unit Type Equals Variable
Air Volume
ZONE TEMP*
CURRENT
UNOCC ZONE
COOLING
SETPOINT
1
Setoints/
Unit Data
Unit Type Equals Variable
Air Volume
ZONE TEMP*
CURRENT
OCC ZONE HEATING
SETPOINT
1
-20.0 °F To 180.0 °F
60.0 °F To OCC Zone
Cooling Setpoint - 2.0 °F
Look Up Table
-20.0 °F To 180.0 °F
Look Up Table
50.0 °F To UNOCC Zone
Cooling Setpoint - 2.0 °F
60.0 °F
68.0 °F
Setoints/
Unit Data
Unit Type Equals Variable
Air Volume
ZONE TEMP*
CURRENT
UNOCC ZONE
HEATING
SETPOINT
SMOKE PURGE
SEQ 1
SMOKE PURGE
SEQ 2
SMOKE PURGE
SEQ 3
1
1
1
1
Purge / Pressurization /
Evacuation
Purge / Pressurization /
Evacuation
Purge / Pressurization /
Evacuation
Purge
Pressurization
Evacuation
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
1
English / Spanish
English
DISPLAY UNITS
1
Imperial / Metric
Imperial
Setoints/
Unit Data
Options /
Unit Data
Options /
Unit Data
Options /
Unit Data
Options /
Unit Data
Unit Type Equals Variable
Air Volume
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
* Only the zone temp screen for the current active mode will be shown.
100
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
Table 24 - COOLING
DISPLAY TEXT
PASS
WORD
LEVEL
SETTING
LOCATION
RANGE
DEFAULT
-20.0 °F To 180.0 °F
50.0 °F To 150.0 °F
Look Up Table
Derived
-20.0 °F To 180.0 °F
OCC Zone Heating
+ 2.0 °F To 85.0 °F
Look Up Table
-20.0 °F To 180.0 °F
UNOCC Zone
Heating + 2.0 °F To
95.0 °F
Look Up Table
-20.0 °F To 180.0 °F
RAT Heating Setp
+2.0 °F To RAT For
High SAT
Look Up Table
1
55.0 °F To 60.0 °F
60.0 °F
1
55.0 °F To 60.0 °F
55.0 °F
SAT LOW SETPOINT
1
55.0 °F To 60.0 °F
55.0 °F
SAT HIGH SETPOINT
1
55.0 °F To 60.0 °F
65.0 °F
LOW SAT
1
OAT Setpoint For
High SAT To 90.0 °F
80.0 °F
Setpoints/
Cooling
HIGH SAT
1
60.0 °F To OAT
Setpoint For Low
SAT
70.0 °F
Setpoints/
Cooling
90.0 °F
Setpoints/
Cooling
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume And SAT Reset Method
Equals Return Temp
80.0 °F
Setpoints/
Cooling
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume And SAT Reset Method
Equals Return Temp
SUPPLY AIR TEMP
CURRENT
ACTIVE SP
SHOW WHEN UNIT TYPE IS
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume
ZONE TEMP*
CURRENT
OCC ZONE COOLING
SETPOINT
1
72.0 °F
Setpoints/
Cooling
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume
ZONE TEMP*
CURRENT
UNOCC ZONE COOLING
SETPOINT
1
85.0 °F
Setpoints/
Cooling
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume
RETURN AIR TEMP
CURRENT
RAT COOLING
SETPOINT
1ST STAGE COOLING
SETPOINT
2ND STAGE COOLING
SETPOINT
1
70.0 °F
Setpoints/
Cooling
Setpoints/
Cooling
Setpoints/
Cooling
Setpoints/
Cooling
Setpoints/
Cooling
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume
Unit Type Equals SZVAV
Unit Type Equals SZVAV
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume
OAT SETPOINT FOR
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume And SAT Reset Method
Equals Outside Temp
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume And SAT Reset Method
Equals Outside Temp
RAT SETPOINT FOR
LOW SAT
1
HIGH SAT
1
RAT Setpoint For
High RAT +5.0 °F To
90.0 °F
RAT Cooling
Setpoint To RAT
Setpoint For Low
SAT -5.0 °F
FAN SPEED SETP FOR
LOW SAT
1
Fan Speed Setp For
High SAT To 100%
90%
Setpoints/
Cooling
HIGH SAT
1
50% To Fan Speed
Setp For Low SAT
70%
Setpoints/
Cooling
TEMPMASTER
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume And SAT Reset Method
Equals Supply Fan Speed
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume And SAT Reset Method
Equals Supply Fan Speed
101
6
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 27 – COOLING (CONT'D)
DISPLAY TEXT
PASS
WORD
LEVEL
SUP AIR TEMPERING
MECH CLG LOCKOUT
TEMP
MECH CLG LOCKOUT
TMP MINIMUM
RANGE
DEFAULT
2
User Enabled User
Disabled
User Disable
1
0.0 °F To 65.0 °F
50.0 °F
2
-10.0 °F To 0.0 °F
0.0 °F
SETTING
LOCATION
Program/
Cooling
Setpoints/
Cooling
Setpoints/
Cooling
SHOW WHEN UNIT TYPE IS
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume
Press Trans Pkg And Low
Ambient Pkg Other Than None
Press Trans Pkg And Low
Ambient Pkg Other Than None
* Only the zone temp screen for the current active mode will be shown.
Table 25 - COMPRESSOR SYSTEMS (1, 2, OR 3)
DISPLAY TEXT
PASS
WORD
LEVEL
RANGE
DEFAULT
SETTING
LOCATION
SHOW WHEN UNIT TYPE IS
Normal - Comp A On /
Normal - Comp B On /
Normal - Both On / Normal
- Both Off / Safety Trip
/ Safety Fault / Safety
Lockout / Low Amb Inhibit /
Low Suct Temp Unl / High
Dp Unload / User Disabled
Derived
Stop / Run / Lockout / Auto
Reset
Derived
CONDENSER FAN 1A / 1
Off / On
Derived
CONDENSER FAN 1B / 2
Off / On
Derived
CONDENSER FAN 2A / 3
Off / On
Derived
CONDENSER FAN 2B / 4
Off / On
Derived
CONDENSER FAN 3A / 5
Off / On
Derived
Always
CONDENSER FAN 3B / 6
Off / On
Derived
Always
LPCO
Okay - Faulted
Derived
CHAIN
Okay - Faulted
Derived
-20.0 °F To 180.0 °F
Look Up
Table
DISCHARGE *
- 0 To 320 PSIG
Look Up
Table
SUCTION *
0 To 800 PSIG
Look Up
Table
-20.0 °F To 180.0 °F
Look Up
Table
0.0 °F To 50.0 °F
Derived
COMP A
HH:MM:SS
Derived
COMP B
HH:MM:SS
Derived
User Enabled
User Disabled
Disabled
COMP SYS* STATUS
COMP SYS* STATE
1
Always
Options /
Comp Sys
Always
SAFETY INPUT
SUCTION TEMP
Always
Press Trans Pkg Indicates That
Transducers Are Not Installed
For The Applicable System
PRESSURE
Press Trans Pkg Indicates That
Transducers Are Installed For
The Applicable System
TEMPERATURE
SUCTION
1
SUPERHEAT
Press Trans Pkg Indicates That
Transducers Are Installed For
The Applicable System
CURRENT RUN TIME
PUMPDOWN
102
2
Always
Program/
Comp Sys.
Always
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 28 – COMPRESSOR SYSTEMS (1, 2, OR 3) (CONT'D)
DISPLAY TEXT
PASS
WORD
LEVEL
RANGE
DEFAULT
SETTING
LOCATION
SHOW WHEN UNIT TYPE IS
READY TO RUN
COMP A
Yes - No
Derived
COMP B
Yes - No
Derived
COMP A
Yes - No
Derived
COMP B
Yes - No
Derived
Always
READY TO STOP
Always
SYSTEM UNLOADING
PRESSURE
2
250 - 450 PSIG
400 PSIG
Setpoints/
Comp Sys
Press Trans Pkg Does Not
Equal None
PRESS TRANS PKG
2
None / Sys 1 / Sys 1, 2 /
Sys 1, 2, 3
None
Optional/
Comp Sys
Always
LOW AMBIENT PKG
2
None / Sys 1 / Sys 1, 2 /
Sys 1, 2, 3
None
Optional/
Comp Sys
Always
6
* May be 1, 2, or 3
Table 26 - SUPPLY SYSTEM
DISPLAY TEXT
PASS
WORD
LEVEL
RANGE
DEFAULT
SETTING
LOCATION
Normal - Active
Normal - Inactive
Safety Trip Safety
Fault Safety
Lockout
SUPPLY SYS STATUS
SHOW WHEN UNIT TYPE IS
Always
SUPPLY FAN
OUTPUT
On - Off
Derived
STATUS
Running Stopped
Derived
SUPPLY FAN VFD
SPEED
0.0 To 100%
Derived
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume
SINGLE ZONE VAV
MIN VFD SPEED
33 To 66%
50%
Unit Type equals SZVAV
CURRENT
0.00 To 5.00" W.C.
Look Up Table
ACTIVE SP
0.00 To 5.00" W.C.
Derived
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume
OUTPUT
On - Off
Derived
STATUS
Running Stopped
Derived
0.0 To 100%
Derived
Always
DUCT STATIC PRESS
RETURN FAN
EXHAUST / RETURN
FAN VFD
Power Exhaust Type Equals
Return W/Exhaust + Return W/O
Exhaust Fans
Power Exhaust Type Equals
Return W/Exhaust + Return W/O
Exhaust Fans
RETURN FAN PRESS
CURRENT
-1.00 To +1.00" W.C. Look Up Table
ACTIVE SP
0.00 To +1.00" W.C. Derived
DUCT PRESS
TRANSDUCER SPAN
TEMPMASTER
2
1.25, 2.5, 5.0
5.0
Power Exhaust Type Equals
Return W/Exhaust + Return W/O
Exhaust Fans
Setpoints /
Supply System
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume
103
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 29 – SUPPLY SYSTEM (CONT'D)
DISPLAY TEXT
PASS
WORD
LEVEL
DUCT STATIC RESET
LOW SETP
1
0 - I INWG - Span
0 INWG To Duct
Static Reset High
1.5 INWG
Setpoints /
Supply System
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume
DUCT STATIC RESET
HIGH SETP
1
Duct Static Reset
Low Limit To Span
2.5 INWG
Setpoints /
Supply System
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume
DUCT STATIC OVER
PRESSURE
2
0 - I INWG - 5
INWG
3.0 INWG
Setpoints /
Supply System
Unit Type Equals Variable Air
Volume
RETURN PRESSURE
HIGH SETP
2
0.15 To 0.45
0.15
Setpoints /
Supply System
Power Exhaust Equals Return
W/Exhaust
RANGE
DEFAULT
SETTING
LOCATION
SHOW WHEN UNIT TYPE IS
Table 27 - HEATING
DISPLAY TEXT
PASS
WORD
LEVEL
RANGE
DEFAULT
SETTING
LOCATION
SHOW WHEN UNIT TYPE IS
HEATING SYS STATUS
Normal - Active /
Normal - Inactive
/ Faulted / User
Disabled / None
Derived
HEATING SYSTEM
TYPE
2
None / Electric/
Staged Gas/
Modulating Gas/ Hot
Water/ Steam
None
Options / Heating
Always
GAS HEAT CAPACITY
2
375 Mbh / 750 Mbh /
1125 Mbh
375 Mbh
Options / Heating
Heat Type Equals Staged Gas
Or Modulating Gas
2
40 Kw - 200V
40 Kw / 80 Kw /
80 Kw - 200V/
100 Kw - 200V/
100 Kw / 120 Kw/
160 Kw / 200 Kw /
240 Kw
40 Kw
Options / Heating
Heat Type Equals Electric
CURRENT
-20.0 °F To 180.0 °F
Look Up
Table
ACTIVE SP
50.0 °F To 120.0 °F
Derived
CURRENT
-20.0 °F To 180.0 °F
Look Up
Table
OCC ZONE HEATING
SETPOINT
60.0 °F To Occ Zone
Cooling Setpoint
-2.0 °F
68.0 °F
-20.0 °F To 180.0 °F
Look Up
Table
ELEC HEAT CAPACITY
Always
SUPPLY AIR TEMP
Heat Type Does Not Equal
None
ZONE TEMP*
1
Always
Setpoints / Heating
ZONE TEMP*
CURRENT
UNOCC ZONE
HEATING
SETPOINT
104
1
50.0 °F To Unocc
Zone Cooling
Setpoint -2.0 °F
Always
60.0 °F
Setpoints / Heating
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 29 – HEATING (CONT'D)
DISPLAY TEXT
PASS
WORD
LEVEL
RANGE
DEFAULT
SETTING
LOCATION
SHOW WHEN UNIT TYPE IS
RETURN AIR TEMP
CURRENT
RAT HEATING
SETPOINT
HEAT ENTERING TEMP
1
-20.0 °F To 180.0 °F
Look Up
Table
55.0 °F - RAT
Cooling Setpoint
-2.0 °F
68.0 °F
-20.0 °F To 180.0 °F
Look Up
Table
Setpoints / Heating
Heat Type Does Not Equal
None And Unit Equals
Variable Air Volume
Heat Type Equals Staged Gas
6
STAGED HEAT STATUS
STGS ON
0 To 6
Derived
STGS AVAL
2 To 6
Derived
VALVE POS
0.0 To 100%
Derived
FRZ STAT
Ok Tripped
Derived
1.0 °F To 100.0 °F
Derived
RELATIVE
0.0 To 100%
Derived
APRX RATE
37.5 To 900.0 Mbh
Derived
Off / Purge / Ignition
/ On - Low /
On - High / Safety
Trip / Safety Fault
/ Safety Lockout /
Fault - L/O
Derived
RELATIVE
0 To 100%
Derived
APRX RATE
37.5 To 150.0 Mbh
Derived
FURNACE 1B MODE
Off / Purge / Ignition
/ On / Safety Trip /
Safety Fault / Safety
Lockout / Fault -L/O
Derived
Heat Type Equals Modulating
Gas
FURNACE 1 MODE
Off / Purge / Ignition
/ On-Low / On High / Safety Trip /
Safety Fault / Safety
Lockout / Fault -L/O
Derived
Heat Type Equals Staged Gas
FURNACE 2 MODE
Off / Purge / Ignition
/ On - Low /
On - High / Safety
Trip / Safety Fault
/ Safety Lockout /
Fault -L/O
Derived
Gas Heat Size Equals 750
MBH Or 1125 MBH
Heat Type Equals Electric Or
Staged Gas
HW / STEAM
HEATING CONTROL
OFFSET
Heat Type Equals Hot Water
Heat Steam
MOD FURNACE OUTPUT
FURNACE 1A MODE
Heat Type Equals Modulating
Gas
Heating Type Equals
Modulating Gas
FURNACE 1A MODE
TEMPMASTER
Heat Type Equals Modulating
Gas
105
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 32 – HEATING (CONT'D)
DISPLAY TEXT
PASS
WORD
LEVEL
FURNACE 3 MODE
RANGE
DEFAULT
Off / Purge / Ignition
/ On - Low /
On -High / Safety
Trip / Safety Fault
/ Safety Lockout /
Fault -L/O
Derived
SETTING
LOCATION
SHOW WHEN UNIT TYPE IS
Gas Heat Size Equals 1125
MBH
HEATING SYSTEM
1
User Enabled User
Disabled
User
Enabled
Program / Heating
Heat Type Does Not Equal
None
MORNING WARM UP
1
User Enabled User
Disabled
User
Disabled
Program / Heating
Heat Type Does Not Equal
None
ADAPT MORN WARM
UP
1
User Enabled User
Disabled
User
Disabled
Program / Heating
Heat Type Does Not Equal
None
NIGHT SET BACK
1
User Enabled User
Disabled
User
Disabled
Program / Heating
Heat Type Does Not Equal
None
HEAT LIMIT
TEMPERATURE
2
100.0 °F - 150.0 °F
130.0 °F
Setpoints / Heating
Heat Type Does Not Equal
None
HEATING SAT
1
80.0 °F - 115.0 °F
100.0 °F
Setpoints / Heating
Heat Type Does Not Equal
None, Unit Type Equals
Variable Air Volume
HW VALVE ACTION
2
Direct - Reverse
Direct
Program / Heating
Heating Type Equals Hot
Water Steam
IST STAGE HEATING
SETPOINT
1
80.0 °F - 95.0 °F
85.0 °F
Setpoints / Heating
Heat Type Does Not Equal
None And Unit Type Equals
SZVAV
2ND STAGE HEATING
SETPOINT
1
95.0 °F - 115.0 °F
100.0 °F
Setpoints / Heating
Heat Type Does Not Equal
None And Unit Type Equals
SZVAV
DAILY WARM UP TIME
DAY 1
0 Min. To Morning
Warm Up Max Time
Derived
Heat Type Does Not Equal
None And Morn Warm Up
Equals Enabled
DAILY WARM UP TIME
DAY 2
0 Min. To Morning
Warm Up Max Time
Derived
Heat Type Does Not Equal
None And Morn Warm Up
Equals Enabled
DAILY WARM UP TIME
DAY 3
0 Min. To Morning
Warm Up Max Time
Derived
Heat Type Does Not Equal
None And Morn Warm Up
Equals Enabled
DAILY WARM UP
TIMER
0 Min. To Morning
Warm Up Max Time
Derived
Heat Type Does Not Equal
None And Morn Warm Up
Equals Enabled
MORNING WARM UP
OPT TIME
0 Min. To Morning
Warm Up Max Time
Derived
Heat Type Does Not Equal
None And Morn Warm Up
Equals Enabled
15 - 240 Min.
120 Min.
MORNING WARM UP
MAX TIME
1
Setpoints / Heating
Heat Type Does Not Equal
None And Morn Warm Up
Equals Enabled
* Only the zone temp screen for the current active mode will be shown.
106
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
Table 28 - ECONOMIZER
DISPLAY TEXT
PASS
WORD
LEVEL
RANGE
DEFAULT
SETTING
LOCATION
SHOW WHEN UNIT TYPE IS
Normal - Active /
Normal - Inactive
/ Faulted / User
Disabled / None
Derived
2
None / Drybulb /
Single Enthalpy /
Dual Enthalpy
None
Options / Economizer
Always
1
Dry Bulb / Single
Enthalpy / Dual
Enthalpy / Best
Available
Best Available
Options / Economizer
Economizer Installed Does
Not Equal None
ECONO
METHOD
ACTIVE
Dry Bulb / Single
Enthalpy / Dual
Enthalpy
Derived
Economizer Installed Does
Not Equal None
ECONOMIZER
CONTROL
OUTPUT
0 To 100%
Derived
Economizer Installed Does
Not Equal None
OUTSIDE AIR
TEMP
-20.0 °F To 180.0 °F
Look Up Table
Economizer Installed Does
Not Equal None
HUMIDITY
0 To 100%
Look Up Table
Economizer Installed Equals
Single Enthalpy or Dual
Enthalpy
ENTHALPY
7.2 To 204.9 BTU/LB Look Up Table
Economizer Installed Equals
Single Enthalpy or Dual
Enthalpy
RETURN AIR
TEMP
-20.0 °F To 180.0 °F
Look Up Table
Economizer Installed Equals
Dual Enthalpy
HUMIDITY
0 To 100%
Look Up Table
Economizer Installed Equals
Dual Enthalpy
ENTHALPHY
7.2 To 204.9 BTU/LB Look Up Table
Economizer Installed Equals
Dual Enthalpy
ECONO SYS
STATUS
ECONO
INSTALLED
ECONO
METHOD TO
USE
Always
OUTSIDE AIR
RETURN AIR
OUTSIDE AIR
ENTHALPY
SETPOINT
1
22.0 To 40.0 BTU/LB 28.0 BTU/LB
Setpoints / Economizer
Economizer Installed Does
Not Equal None
ECONOMIZER
SYSTEM
1
User Enabled User
Disabled
Program / Economizer
Economizer Installed Does
Not Equal None
TEMPMASTER
Disabled
107
6
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
Table 29 - VENTILATION
DISPLAY TEXT
PASS
WORD
LEVEL
VENT SYS
STATUS
DAMPER
HARDWARE
2
VENTILATION
CONTROL
1
RANGE
Normal - Active/
Normal - Inactive
/ Faulted / User
Disabled / None
None / 2 Position/
Standard/ Tek Air
Full IAQ
Fixed Minimum /
Demand
DEFAULT
SETTING
LOCATION
Derived
SHOW WHEN UNIT TYPE IS
Always
Standard
Dampers
Options /
Ventilation
Always
Fixed
Minimum
Options /
Ventilation
Damper Hardware Does Not Equal
None or 2 Position
OA DAMPER POSITION
CURRENT
ACTIVE SP
VENTILATION
DEMAND
0.0 To 100%
0.0 To 100%
Derived
Derived
Damper Hardware Does Not Equal
None
0-100%
Derived
Ventilation Control Equals Demand
OUTSIDE
0 To 2000 PPM
Look Up Table
INSIDE
0 To 2000 PPM
Look Up Table
± 0 To 2000 PPM
Derived
1
100-1000 PPM
500 PPM
Setpoints /
Ventilation
Ventilation Control Equals Demand
1
0 - OA Damper
Maximum Position
15%
Setpoints /
Ventilation
Damper Hardware Does Not Equal
None or 2 Position Damper
30%
Setpoints /
Ventilation
Damper Hardware Does Not Equal
None or 2 Position Damper
CO2 LEVEL
Ventilation Control Equals Demand
CO2 OFFSET
CURRENT
SETPOINT
OA DAMPER
MINIMUM
POSITION
OA DAMPER
MAXIMUM
POSITION
CONTINUOUS
VENT
COMFORT
VENTILATION
1
1
1
OUTSIDE AIR
MINIMUM FLOW
1
OUTSIDE AIR
MAXIMUM FLOW
1
MINIMUM OA
FLOW SETPOINT
1
VENTILATION
SYSTEM
1
108
OA Damper
Minimum Position
To 100%
User Enabled User
Disabled
User Enabled User
Disabled
Minimum - Derived
Span X 5%
Maximum - The
Lower Of Derived
Span X 50%
And Outside Air
Maximum Flow
Minimum - Outside
Air Minimum Flow
Maximum - Derived
Flow
User Enabled
User Disabled
Program /
Ventilation
Program /
Ventilation
Unit Type Equals SZVAV
Unit Type Equals SZVAV
Derived Span
X 15%
Setpoints /
Ventilation
Damper Hardware Tek-Air Control Set
To Demand
Derived Span
X 30%
Setpoints /
Ventilation
Damper Hardware Tek-Air Control Set
To Demand
0-100%
Derived Span
X 15%
Setpoints /
Ventilation
User Enabled User
Disabled
User Enabled
Program /
Ventilation
Damper Hardware Tek-Air And
Ventilation Control Set To Fixed
Minimum
Damper Hardware Does Not Equal
None
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
Table 30 - EXHAUST
DISPLAY TEXT
PASS
WORD
LEVEL
RANGE
DEFAULT
SETTING
LOCATION
SHOW WHEN UNIT TYPE IS
EXHAUST SYS
STATUS
Normal - Active / Normal
- Inactive / Faulted / User
Disabled / None
Derived
POWER EXHAUST
TYPE
None / On-Off Damper
Ctrl / On-Off Press Cntrl /
Modulate Damper - VFD
/ Return Fan W/ Exh /
Return Fan W/O Exh
Setting
-0.50 To 0.50" W.C.
Look Up Table
-0.15 - +0.15" W.C.
0.00" W.C.
OUTPUT
On - Off
Derived
STATUS
Stopped / Running
Derived
EXHAUST DAMPER
POSITION
0.0 To 100%
Derived
Power Exhaust Equals
Modulate Damper - VFD or
Return Fan W/ Exh
EXHAUST / RETURN
FAN VFD
0.0 To 100%
Derived
Power Exhaust Equals
Modulate Damper - VFD
2
Always
Options /
Exhaust
Always
6
BUILDING PRESSURE
CURRENT
ACTIVE SETPOINT
1
Setpoints /
Exhaust
Power Exhaust Does Not
Equal None or On-Off Damper
Ctrl
EXHAUST FAN
Power Exhaust Equals On
- Off Dampers Ctrl, On - Off
Press Cntrl, Modulate Damper
- VFD Fan
BLDG PRESSURE
CNTRL OFFSET
1
- 0.15" W.C. To +0.15
0.00" W.C.
Setpoints /
Exhaust
Power Exhaust Equals On Off Press Ctrl
ECONO OUTPUT
FOR FAN START
1
Econo Output For Fan
Stop To 100%
10 %
Setpoints /
Exhaust
Power Exhaust Equals On Off Dmpr Ctrl
ECONO OUTPUT
FOR FAN STOP
1
0 To Econo Output For
Fan Start
5%
Setpoints /
Exhaust
Power Exhaust Equals On Off Dmpr Ctrl
EXHAUST OUTPUT
FOR FAN START
1
Exhaust Output For Fan
Stop To 100%
10%
Setpoints /
Exhaust
Power Exhaust Equals
Modulate Damper - VFD
EXHAUST OUTPUT
FOR FAN STOP
1
0 - To Exhaust Output For
Fan Start
5%
Setpoints /
Exhaust
Power Exhaust Equals
Modulate Damper - VFD
TEMPMASTER
109
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
SETPOINTS
OPTIONS
All “Setpoints” values are numeric. Setpoints parameters can be viewed under their respective menu key
on the left side of the keypad; however, they can only
be changed under the SETPOINTS key using the following procedure. Press the SETPOINTS key to enter
the “Setpoints” menu. The Enter Password screen will
appear. All "Setpoints" parameters require the use of a
password before they can be changed. See Password
on page 124 for information on how to enter a Password into the User Interface. If a Level 1 password is
entered, only Level 1 setpoints will be available for
change. Entering a Level 2 password will make all setpoints available. After the password has been accepted,
use the ◄ key or the ► key to select the menu subsection: Unit, Cooling, Compressor Systems, Supply
System, Heating, Economizer, Ventilation, or Exhaust,
that contains the parameter you would like to change.
The "Setpoints" contained under each of these menu
subsections and their password level is contained in the
Table 25 on page 99 through Table 33 on page 109.
Then use the ▼ key and the ▲ key to navigate to the
parameter you want to change. Follow the instructions
given in Data Entry Keys on page 97 to change the
value.
All “Options” information is selected from the listed
parameter data. Options parameters can be viewed under their respective menu key on the left side of the
keypad; however, they can only be changed under the
OPTIONS key using the following procedure. Press
the OPTIONS key to enter the “Options” menu. The
Enter Password screen will appear. All Option parameters require the use of a password before they can be
changed. See Password on page 124 for information
on how to enter a Password into the User Interface. If
a Level 1 password is entered, only Level 1 “options”
information will be available for change. Entering a
Level 2 password will make all “options” information available. After the password has been accepted,
use the ◄ key or the ► key to select the menu subsection: Unit, Cooling, Compressor Systems, Supply
System, Heating, Economizer, Ventilation, or Exhaust
that contains the parameter you would like to change.
The parameters contained under each of these menu
subsections and their password level are contained in
Table 25 on page 99 through Table 33 on page 109.
Then use the ▼ key and the ▲ key to navigate to the
parameter you want to change. Follow the instructions
given in the section Data Entry Keys on page 97 to
change the parameter to the desired value.
PROGRAM
All “Program” information is USER ENABLED/USER
DISABLED values. Program parameters can be viewed
under their respective menu key on the left side of the
keypad; however, they can only be changed under the
PROGRAM key using the following procedure. Press
the PROGRAM key to enter the “Program” menu. The
Enter Password screen will appear. All Program parameters require the use of a password before they can be
changed. See Password on page 124 for information
on how to enter a Password into the User Interface. If a
Level 1 password is, entered only Level 1 “program” information will be available for change. Entering a Level
2 password will make all “program” information available. After the password has been accepted, use the ◄
key or the ► key to select the menu subsection: Unit,
Cooling, Compressor Systems, Supply System, Heating, Economizer, Ventilation, Exhaust, which contains
the parameter you would like to change. The parameters contained under each of these menu subsections
and their password level are contained in Table 25 on
page 99 through Table 33 on page 109. Then use
the ▼ key and the ▲ key to navigate to the parameter
you want to change. Follow the instructions given in the
section Data Entry Keys on page 97 to change the
parameter to the desired value.
110
DATE / TIME
To change the day, time, and date press the DATE/
TIME key. The ▼ key is used to scroll to the next item
to be programmed and the ▲ key scrolls to the previous item. The following messages will be displayed.
The first line will be an active display and the second
line will be the entry line.
CLOCK FRI 18 JUN 2017 10:15:33 AM
DAY OF MONTH
=XX
CLOCK FRI 18 JUN 2017 10:15:33 AM
MONTH
=XX
CLOCK FRI 18 JUN 2017 10:15:33 AM
YEAR
=XXXX
CLOCK FRI 18 JUN 2017 10:15:33 AM
HOUR
=XX
CLOCK FRI 18 JUN 2017 10:15:33 AM
MINUTE
=XX
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
CLOCK FRI 18 JUN 2017 10:15:33 AM
DAY OF WEEK
=XXX
CLOCK FRI 18 JUN 2017 10:15:33 AM
12 HOUR PERIOD
=XX
CLOCK FRI 18 JUN 2017 10:15:33 AM
TIME FORMAT
=XXXXXXX
CLOCK FRI 18 JUN 2017 10:15:33 AM
POWER OFF TIME
=XXXXX
Follow the instructions given in the section Data Entry
Keys on page 97 to change the above values.
SCHEDULE
The “clock schedule” function can be USER ENABLED / USER DISABLED by using the schedule
screen below.
To set the schedule, press the SCHEDULE key. The
display will show the following message:
SCHEDULE
 TO EDIT
OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE USER ENABLED
SCHEDULE
MON  TO EDIT
+START =06:00 AM STOP =10:00 PM
SCHEDULE
TUE  TO EDIT
START =06:00 AM STOP =10:00 PM
SCHEDULE
WED  TO EDIT
START =06:00 AM STOP =10:00 PM
SCHEDULE
THU  TO EDIT
START =06:00 AM STOP =10:00 PM
SCHEDULE
FRI  TO EDIT
START =06:00 AM STOP =10:00 PM
SCHEDULE
SAT  TO EDIT
START =06:00 AM STOP =10:00 PM
SCHEDULE
SUN  TO EDIT
START =06:00 AM STOP =10:00 PM
TEMPMASTER
To change the start or stop time, press the  key. The
line under the 0 is the cursor. If the start time is wrong,
it may be changed from the numeric keypad. Once the
correct value (hour and minute) is entered, press the
 key. The cursor will then move to the AM/PM selection. This value may be chosen by the +/- key and
entered by pressing the  key. This process may be
followed until the hour, minutes, and meridian of both
the START and STOP points are set. Press the ▼ key
to get the schedule for the next day to appear. The start
and stop time of each day may be programmed differently. If you want to view the schedule without making
a change, simply press the ▼ key until the day you
wish to view appears. The ▲ key will scroll backwards
to the previous screen.
After the SUN (Sunday) schedule appears on the display, a subsequent press of the ▼ key will display the
SCHEDULE
HOL
START =06:00 AM STOP =10:00 PM
Holiday schedule - This is a two-part display. The first
reads:
The times may be set using the same procedure as described above for the days of the week.
SCHEDULE
HOLIDAY 01
MMDD
= 1225
Continue pressing the ▼ key to set the 15 holiday
dates. The display will read:
The month and the day of each holiday are entered in
this format. Enter 0000 to not specify a holiday. The
MMDD is displayed when the value is being edited to
remind the operator what the format of this number is
(e.g., 1225 represents December 25).
The line below the empty space is the cursor and will
move to the next or previous empty space when the ◄
key or the ► key is pressed. To set the Holiday, the
cursor is moved to the space following the day of the
week of the holiday and the +/- key is pressed. An *
will appear in the space signifying that day as a holiday. The Holiday schedule must be programmed weekly. If there is no holiday, the +/- key is used to delete
the *. The  key is used to accept the holiday schedule
for the next seven days.
111
6
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
OPERATING HOURS / START COUNTER
Compressor Operating hours and Compressor Starts;
Supply Fan Operating hours and Supply Fan starts; Exhaust Fan operating hours and Exhaust Fan starts; and
Return Fan operating hours and Return Fan starts are
displayed via one key press. The maximum value for
both hours and starts is 99,999, at which point they will
roll over to 0. Following are the displays.
Table 31 - OPERATING HOURS / START COUNTER
DISPLAY TEXT
PASS
WORD
LEVEL
COMPRESSOR 1A OPER HRS
COMPRESSOR 1A STARTS
1
Derived
COMPRESSOR 1B OPER HRS
COMPRESSOR 1B STARTS
1
Derived
COMPRESSOR 2A OPER HRS
COMPRESSOR 2A STARTS
1
Derived
COMPRESSOR 2B OPER HRS
COMPRESSOR 2B STARTS
1
Derived
COMPRESSOR 3A OPER HRS
COMPRESSOR 3A STARTS
1
Derived
COMPRESSOR 3B OPER HRS
COMPRESSOR 3B STARTS
1
Derived
RANGE
DEFAULT
SETTING
LOCATION
SHOW WHEN
Number Of Comps 6. Unit Capacity
Equals 70 Ton, 75 Ton, 80 Ton, 85 Ton, 90
Ton, 95 Ton, 105 Ton, 106 Ton, 110 Ton,
115 Ton, 130 Ton, 150 Ton.
CONDENSER FAN 1A
CONDENSER FAN 1B
CONDENSER FAN 2A
CONDENSER FAN 2B
Number Of Comps 6. Unit Capacity
Equals 70 Ton, 75 Ton, 80 Ton, 85 Ton, 90
Ton, 95 Ton, 105 Ton, 106 Ton, 110 Ton,
115 Ton, 130 Ton, 150 Ton.
CONDENSER FAN 3A
CONDENSER FAN 3B
EXHAUST FAN OPER HRS
EXHAUST FAN STARTS
1
Derived
SUPPLY FAN OPER HRS
SUPPLY FAN STARTS
1
Derived
RETURN FAN OPER HRS
RETURN FAN STARTS
1
Derived
Power Exhaust On/Off Dmpr / On/Off
Press / Modulate Damper - VFD.
Supply System Type Equals Return Fan
W/Exh Return W/O Exhaust.
Below shows a typical screen example:
HOURS / STARTS OPER HRS. XXXXX
COMPRESSOR 1A STARTS XXXXX
112
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
PRINTER
Report Section
The Unit Controller has the capability of being connected though the RS-232 serial port, Port 2, to a computer using Hyper Terminal. A NUL MODEM cable
must be used to connect the computer to the Unit Controller.
Press the PRINT key and enter the password. Press the
CHECK key. Use the left or right arrow key to navigate
through the menu. The following reports are available
to be printed:
Set Up
The computer must be connected to Port 2 of the Unit
Controller. Use the SERVICE key to verify that Port 2
is configured to “TERMINAL.”
Press the PRINT key on the key pad. Use the down arrow key to set the following:
•
•
•
•
PRINTER BAUD RATE
PRINTER PARITY
PRINTER STOP BITS
PRINTER ROWS PER PAGE
These parameters must be set identical to the settings
in Hyper Terminal. In addition the data bits must be set
to 8 and Flow Control to None.
To use Hyper Terminal to save a report to a file:
• Select “Transfer – Transfer Text” and enter a file
name to save the report in.
• From the Unit Controller panel, select the report
you want to print. See the following section, Report Section, to select the report.
• As the report is uploading, from the Unit Control
lerto the PC; it is displayed in the Hyper Terminal
window.
STATUS
UNIT DATA
COOLING
COMP SYSTEM
SUPPLY SYSTEM
ECONOMIZER
VENTILATION
EXHAUST
SETPOINTS
PROGRAM
OPTIONS
DATE / TIME
SCHEDULE
HOURS / STARTS
SERVICE
HISTORY BUFFER 1
HISTORY BUFFER 2
HISTORY BUFFER 3
• When the reports finish transferring to the file, select “Transfer – Capture Text – Stop.”
HISTORY BUFFER 4
• The file can then be printed from an application
like Notepad or Word.
HISTORY BUFFER 6
To use Hyper Terminal to print a report without saving
it to a file:
HISTORY BUFFER 8
• Select “Transfer – Capture to Printer.”
• From the Unit Controller panel, select the report
you want to print. See the following section, Report Section, to select the report.
• As the report is uploading, from the Unit Control
lerto the PC; it is displayed in the Hyper Terminal
window.
6
HEATING
HISTORY BUFFER 5
HISTORY BUFFER 7
HISTORY BUFFER 9
HISTORY BUFFER 10
RUN TEST
PRINT ALL REPORTS
After you have selected the report you want to print,
press the  key to output the report to the computer.
• After the reports finish transferring to the PC, select “Transfer – Capture to Printer” to send the
last page to the printer.
TEMPMASTER
113
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
SERVICE
To enter Service Mode, press the SERVICE key. The
following message is the initial screen and is displayed
when the SERVICE key is pressed, unless a Level 2
password is active.
SERVICE
ENTER PASSWORD
All the DIGITAL outputs (DO) except for the compressors can be forced ON. In order to force the outputs the
LOCAL STOP switch must be in the OFF position. To
force an output ON use the ◄ or ► key to navigate to
the SERVICE DO section. Then use the ▲ or ▼ key
to select the output you want to force ON. Press the
 key and then use the ► key to switch it from OFF
to ON. Press the  key again to energize the output.
Repeat the above process in reverse to turn the forced
output back to OFF.
The ► key can be used to jump to the beginning of the
next section of displays and the ◄ key can be used to
jump to the beginning of the previous section of displays. The sections of displays are as follows:
• Parameters
• Analog Inputs
• Digital Inputs
• Digital Outputs
• Analog Outputs
The Table 35 on page 115 lists the Displayed Text,
Input or Output Type, Unit Controller terminal location
(ID), Value Range, and when item is displayed.
All the ANALOG outputs (AO) can be forced ON. In
order to force the outputs the LOCAL STOP switch
must be in the OFF position. To force an output ON
use the ◄ or ► key to navigate to the SERVICE AO
section. Then use the ▲ or ▼ key to select the output
you want to force ON. Press the  key and then use
the numeric key pad to enter the output value. Press the
 key again to energize the output. Repeat the above
process in reverse to turn the forced output back to 0.0.
Failure to do so will leave the forced output value in
place until a different value is initiated by the operation of the unit.
114
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
Table 32 - SERVICE
DISPLAY TEXT
TYPE
ID
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
Off
Used To Activate The Data Log Feature
Of The Control
Error
Detail
See Table 52 on
page 164
Data Log Error Detail
(Only Displayed When Error Is Present)
Error
State
See Table 51 on
page 164
Data Log Error State
(Only Displayed When Error Is Present)
DATA LOG FORMAT
DATA LOG ERROR
VALUE RANGE
UPDATE FLASH
On / Off
Used To Update Control Software
UPDATE FLASH
ERROR
Description Of The Error
(Only Displayed When Error Is Present)
FACTORY RUN TESTER
User Disable /
User Enable
Only Used For Factory Run Test
6
COMPRESSOR 1A
Digital
Output
TB4-2
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of The Digital Output To
Compressor 1A
COMPRESSOR 1B
Digital
Output
TB4-3
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of The Digital Output To
Compressor 1B
COMPRESSOR 2A
Digital
Output
TB4-4
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of The Digital Output To
Compressor 2A
COMPRESSOR 2B
Digital
Output
TB4-5
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of The Digital Output To
Compressor 2B
COMPRESSOR 3A
Digital
Output
TB4-7
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of The Digital Output To
Compressor 3A
COMPRESSOR 3B
Digital
Output
TB4-8
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of The Digital Output To
Compressor 3B
CONDENSER FAN 1A/1
Digital
Output
TB4-9
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Digital Output To Condenser
Fan 1A
CONDENSER FAN 1B/2
Digital
Output
TB4-9
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Digital Output To Condenser
Fan 1B
CONDENSER FAN 2A/3
Digital
Output
TB6-2
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Digital Output To Condenser
Fan 2A
CONDENSER FAN 2B/4
Digital
Output
TB6-2
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Digital Output To Condenser
Fan 2B
CONDENSER FAN 3A/5
Digital
Output
TB6-4
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Digital Output To Condenser
Fan 3A
CONDENSER FAN 3B/6
Digital
Output
TB6-4
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Digital Output To Condenser
Fan 3B
ELECTRIC HEAT STG 1
Digital
Output
TB3-2
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Electric Heat Digital Output To
Stage 1
ELECTRIC HEAT STG 2
Digital
Output
TB3-3
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Electric Heat Digital Output To
Stage 2
ELECTRIC HEAT STG 3
Digital
Output
TB3-4
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Electric Heat Digital Output To
Stage 3
ELECTRIC HEAT STG 4
Digital
Output
TB3-5
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Electric Heat Digital Output To
Stage 4
ELECTRIC HEAT STG 5
Digital
Output
TB3-7
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Electric Heat Digital Output To
Stage 5
ELECTRIC HEAT STG 6
Digital
Output
TB3-8
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Electric Heat Digital Output To
Stage 6
TEMPMASTER
115
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 35 – SERVICE (CONT'D)
DISPLAY TEXT
TYPE
ELECTRIC HEAT STG 7
Digital
Output
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Electric Heat Digital Output To
Stage 7
TB3-9
STG GAS
FURN 1 LOW
Digital
Output
TB3-2
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Staged Gas Heat Digital
Output To Stage 1 Low
STG GAS
FURN 1 HIGH
Digital
Output
TB3-3
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Staged Gas Heat Digital
Output To Stage 1 High
STG GAS
FURN 2 LOW
Digital
Output
TB3-4
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Staged Gas Heat Digital
Output To Stage 2 Low
STG GAS
FURN 2 HIGH
Digital
Output
TB3-5
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Staged Gas Heat Digital
Output To Stage 2 High
STG GAS
FURN 3 LOW
Digital
Output
TB3-7
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Staged Gas Heat Digital
Output To Stage 3 Low
STG GAS
FURN 3 HIGH
Digital
Output
TB3-8
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Staged Gas Heat Digital
Output To Stage 3 High
MOD GAS
FURN 1A LOW
Digital
Output
TB3-2
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Mod Gas Heat Digital Output
To Stage 1A Low
MOD GAS
FURN 1A HI
Digital
Output
TB3-3
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Mod Gas Heat Digital Output
To Stage 1A High
MOD GAS
FURN 2 LOW
Digital
Output
TB3-4
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Mod Gas Heat Digital Output
To Stage 2 Low
MOD GAS
FURN 2 HIGH
Digital
Output
TB3-5
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Mod Gas Heat Digital Output
To Stage 2 High
MOD GAS
FURN 3 LOW
Digital
Output
TB3-7
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Mod Gas Heat Digital Output
To Stage 3 Low
MOD GAS
FURN 3 HIGH
Digital
Output
TB3-8
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Mod Gas Heat Digital Output
To Stage 3 High
MOD GAS
FURN 1B
Digital
Output
TB3-9
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Mod Gas Heat Digital Output
To Stage 1B
PUMP DOWN LLSV 1
Digital
Output
TB5-2
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Pump Down Solenoid Llsv 1
Digital Output
PUMP DOWN LLSV 2
Digital
Output
TB5-4
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Pump Down Solenoid Llsv 2
Digital Output
PUMP DOWN LLSV 3
Digital
Output
TB5-6
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Pump Down Solenoid Llsv 3
Digital Output
SUPPLY FAN
OUTPUT
Digital
Output
TB1-2
On / Off
Always
Status Of Supply Fan Digital Output
RETURN FAN OUTPUT
Digital
Output
TB1-4
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Return Fan Digital Output
EXHAUST FAN OUTPUT
Digital
Output
TB1-4
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of Exhaust Fan Or Return Fan
Digital Output
VAV HEAT RELAY
Digital
Output
TB1-12
On / Off
I/O Board
Status Of The Digital Output For The
Vav Heat Relay
FAN FAULT
Digital
Output
TB1-6
Okay / Faulted
I/O Board
Digital Output That Is Generated When
There Is A Supply Fan Fault
COOL/HEATING FAULT
Digital
Output
TB1-8
On / Off
I/O Board
Digital Output That Is Generated When
There Is A Cooling/Heating Fault
SENSOR/MISC FAULT
Digital
Output
TB1-10
On / Off
I/O Board
Digital Output That Is Generated When
There Is A Sensor/Misc Fault
116
ID
VALUE RANGE
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 35 – SERVICE (CONT'D)
DISPLAY TEXT
TYPE
ID
VALUE RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
I/O Board
Analog Output To The Supply Fan VFD
SUPPLY FAN VFD
SPEED
Analog
Output
TB9-1
0-10
Volt Dc
EXHAUST DAMPER
POSITION
Analog
Output
TB9-7
0-10
Volts Dc
I/O Board
Analog Output To The Exhaust Damper
EXHAUST / RETURN
FAN VFD
Analog
Output
TB9-3
0-10
Volts Dc
I/O Board
Analog Output To The Exhaust Or
Return Fan VFD
OA DAMPER POSITION
Analog
Output
TB9-5
0-10
Volts Dc
I/O Board
Analog Output To The Economizer
Dampers
HEATING VALVE
Analog
Output
TB9-9
0-10
Volts Dc
I/O Board
Analog Output To The Heating Valve
SUPPLY AIR TEMP
CURRENT
Analog
Input
J1-1
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The Supply Or
Mixed Air Sensor
MX SUPPLY AIR TEMP
CURRENT
Analog
Input
J1-1
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The Supply Or
Mixed Air Sensor
HEAT EXCHANGER
TEMP
Analog
Input
J1-2
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The Temperature
Sensor Positioned Before The Heat
Section
OUTSIDE AIR TEMP
Analog
Input
J2-1
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The Outdoor Air
Temperature Sensor
RETURN AIR TEMP
CURRENT
Analog
Input
J2-2
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The Return Air
Temperature Sensor
OUTSIDE AIR HUMIDITY
Analog
Input
J2-3
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The Outdoor Air
Humidity Sensor
RETURN AIR HUMIDITY
Analog
Input
J2-4
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The Return Air
Humidity Sensor
TEMPERATURE
SUCTION 1
Analog
Input
J3-1
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The System 1
Suction Line Temperature Sensor
TEMPERATURE
SUCTION 2
Analog
Input
J3-2
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The System 2
Suction Line Temperature Sensor
TEMPERATURE
SUCTION 3
Analog
Input
J3-3
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The System 3
Suction Line Temperature Sensor
PRESSURE SUCTION 1
Analog
Input
J3-4
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The System 1
Suction Pressure Transducer
PRESSURE SUCTION 2
Analog
Input
J4-1
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The System 2
Suction Pressure Transducer
PRESSURE SUCTION 3
Analog
Input
J4-2
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The System 3
Suction Pressure Transducer
PRESSURE
DISCHARGE 1
Analog
Input
J4-3
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The System 1
Discharge Pressure Transducer
PRESSURE
DISCHARGE 2
Analog
Input
J4-4
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The System 2
Discharge Pressure Transducer
PRESSURE
DISCHARGE 3
Analog
Input
J4-5
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The System 3
Discharge Pressure Transducer
CO2 LEVEL OUTSIDE
Analog
Input
J5-2
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input Of The Outdoor CO2
Sensor
CO2 LEVEL
INSIDE
Analog
Input
J5-3
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The Indoor CO2
Sensor
RETURN FAN PRESS
CURRENT
Analog
Input
J6-1
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The Return Fan
Pressure Transducer
TEMPMASTER
6
117
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 35 – SERVICE (CONT'D)
DISPLAY TEXT
TYPE
ID
VALUE RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
DUCT STATIC PRESS
CURRENT
Analog
Input
J6-2
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The Supply Air
Pressure Transducer
BUILDING PRESSURE
CURRENT
Analog
Input
J6-3
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The Building
Pressure Transducer
OA FLOW INPUT 1
Analog
Input
J6-4
0 To 4095 A/D
Counts (1-5
Volts)
I/O Board
This Is The Air Flow Input From The Tek
Air Measuring Station
OA FLOW INPUT 2
Analog
Input
J6-5
0 To 4095 A/D
Counts (1-5
Volts)
I/O Board
This Is The Air Flow Input From The Tek
Air Measuring Station
OA FLOW PRESSURE 1
Analog
Input
J6-4
0 To 0.25" W.C.
(0-5 Volts)
I/O Board
Analog Input From The Air Measuring
Station Pressure Transducer
OA FLOW PRESSURE 2
Analog
Input
J6-5
0 To 0.25" W.C.
(0-5 Volts)
I/O Board
Analog Input From The Air Measuring
Station Pressure Transducer
OA FLOW VELOCITY 1
Analog
Input
J6-4
0 To 2002 Fpm
(0-5 Volts)
I/O Board
Analog Input From The Air Measuring
Station Pressure Transducer
OA FLOW VELOCITY 2
Analog
Input
J6-5
0 To 2002 Fpm
(0-5 Volts)
I/O Board
Analog Input From The Air Measuring
Station Pressure Transducer
ZONE TEMP CURRENT
Analog
Input
J7-1
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input From The Zone
Temperature Sensor
SUPPLY AIR
TEMP RST
Analog
Input
J7-4
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Hardwired Analog Input To Reset The
Supply Air Temperature Setpoint
DUCT STATIC
PRES RESET
Analog
Input
J7-5
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Hardwired Analog Input To Reset The
Duct Static Pressure Setpoint
FURNACE STATUS
Analog
Input
J5-1
0-5 Volts
I/O Board
Analog Input Of The Furnace
Multiplexer
FURNACE 1A
STAT HI
Digital
Input
TB01-3
On / Off
Furnace
Multiplexer
Furnace 1A Hz Status Input To Furnace
Multiplexer Board
FURNACE STATUS
COUNTS
Analog
Input
J5-1
0 - 4095
I/O Board
Status Of The Input From The Furnace
Multiplexer Board In Count
FURNACE 1 STATUS
Digital
Input
TB01-2
On / Off
Furnace
Multiplexer
Furnace 1 Status Input To Furnace
Multiplexer Board
FURNACE 1A STATUS
Digital
Input
TB01-2
On / Off
Furnace
Multiplexer
Furnace 1A Status Input To Furnace
Multiplexer Board
FURNACE 1B STATUS
Digital
Input
TB01-6
On / Off
Furnace
Multiplexer
Furnace 1B Status Input To Furnace
Multiplexer Board
FURNACE 2 STATUS
Digital
Input
TB01-3
On / Off
Furnace
Multiplexer
Furnace 2 Status Input To Furnace
Multiplexer Board
FURNACE 3 STATUS
Digital
Input
TB01-4
On / Off
Furnace
Multiplexer
Furnace 3 Status Input To Furnace
Multiplexer Board
OCCUPANCY STATE
Digital
Input
TB8-2
Occupied /
Unoccupied
I/O Board
Hardwired Digital Input To Put The Unit
Into The Occupied Mode
LOCAL STOP
Digital
Input
TB8-1
Run / Stop
I/O Board
Digital Input That Turns The Unit On
And Off
FAN (G)
Digital
Input
TB8-8
On / Off
I/O Board
Hardwired Digital Input To Turn The
Supply Fan On And Off
Y1 LOW COOL
Digital
Input
TB8-10
On / Off
I/O Board
Hardwired Digital Input To Place The
Unit In First Stage Cooling Mode
118
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 35 – SERVICE (CONT'D)
DISPLAY TEXT
TYPE
ID
VALUE RANGE
LOCATION
Y2 HIGH COOL
Digital
Input
TB8-11
On / Off
I/O Board
Hardwired Digital Input To Place The
Unit In Second Stage Cooling Mode
W1 LOW HEAT
Digital
Input
TB8-13
On / Off
I/O Board
Hardwired Digital Input To Place The
Unit In First Stage Heating Mode
W2 HIGH HEAT
Digital
Input
TB8-14
On / Off
I/O Board
Hardwired Digital Input To Place The
Unit In Second Stage Heating Mode
SAFETY INPUT CHAIN
1
Digital
Input
TB7-1
Okay / Faulted
I/O Board
Digital Input From The Compressor
System 1 Safety Circuit
SAFETY INPUT CHAIN
2
Digital
Input
TB7-2
Okay / Faulted
I/O Board
Digital Input From The Compressor
System 2 Safety Circuit
SAFETY INPUT CHAIN
3
Digital
Input
TB7-4
Okay / Faulted
I/O Board
Digital Input From The Compressor
System 3 Safety Circuit
SAFETY INPUTS LPCO
1
Digital
Input
TB7-5
Okay / Faulted
I/O Board
Digital Input From The Compressor
System 1 Low Pressure Safety Circuit
SAFETY INPUTS LPCO
2
Digital
Input
TB7-7
Okay / Faulted
I/O Board
Digital Input From The Compressor
System 2 Low Pressure Safety Circuit
SAFETY INPUTS LPCO
3
Digital
Input
TB7-8
Okay / Faulted
I/O Board
Digital Input From The Compressor
System 3 Low Pressure Safety Circuit
SUPPLY FAN OUTPUT
Digital
Input
TB7-10
Running /
Stopped
I/O Board
Digital Input For The Supply Fan Run
Verification Circuit
EXHAUST FAN STATUS
Digital
Input
TB7-11
Running /
Stopped
I/O Board
Digital Input From The Exhaust Fan
Run Verification Circuit
RETURN FAN STATUS
Digital
Input
TB7-11
Running /
Stopped
I/O Board
Digital Input From The Return Fan Run
Verification Circuit
FILTER STATUS
Digital
Input
TB7-13
Okay / Change
I/O Board
Digital Input From The Dirty Filter
Pressure Switch
HW/STEAM
FRZ STAT
Digital
Input
TB7-14
Okay / Faulted
I/O Board
Digital Input From The Hot Water
Freezestat
SMOKE PURGE 1
Digital
Input
TB8-4
On / Off
I/O Board
Hardwired Digital Input To Place The
Unit Is Smoke Purge 1 Mode
SMOKE PURGE 2
Digital
Input
TB8-5
On / Off
I/O Board
Hardwired Digital Input To Place The
Unit Is Smoke Purge 2 Mode
SMOKE PURGE 3
Digital
Input
TB8-7
On / Off
I/O Board
Hardwired Digital Input To Place The
Unit Is Smoke Purge 3 Mode
CO2 LVL INSIDE BAS
Commun
Port P1
User Disable /
User Enable
IPU Board
This Item Must Be Enabled In Order To
Communicate A CO2 Value To The Unit
CO2 LVL INSIDE VALUE
BAS
Commun
Port P1
101 To 1899
Ppm
IPU Board
The Inside CO2 Value Being
Communicated To The Unit Through
The BAS
DUCT PRES RESET
BAS
Commun
Port P1
User Disable /
User Enable
IPU Board
This Item Must Be Enabled In Order To
Communicate A Duct Static Pressure
Reset Value To The Unit
DUCT STATIC PRES
RESET BAS
Commun
Port P1
0 To 100%
IPU Board
The Duct Static Reset Value Being
Communicated To The Unit Through
The BAS
EXHAUST CONTROL
BAS
Commun
Port P1
Enable/Disable
IPU Board
Enables or disables control of the
Modulating Exhaust Damper (Return
Fan)
TEMPMASTER
DESCRIPTION
6
119
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 35 – SERVICE (CONT'D)
DISPLAY TEXT
TYPE
ID
VALUE RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
EXHAUST DAMPER/
VFD
Commun
Port P1
0 To 100%
IPU Board
Communicates signal to set the position
of the Modulating Damper (Return Fan)
or speed of the Exhaust Fan.
FAN (G) BAS
Commun
Port P1
On / Off
IPU Board
Gives The Status Of The
Communicated Fan G Input
MORNING WARM UP
CMD
Commun
Port P1
On / Off
IPU Board
Gives The Status Of The
Communicated Morning Warm Up
Command
OCCUPANCY
COMMAND
Commun
Port P1
Occupied /
Unoccupied
IPU Board
Gives The Status Of The
Communicated Occupancy Command
SMOKE PURGE 1 BAS
Commun
Port P1
On Off
IPU Board
Gives The Status Of The
Communicated Smoke Purge 1
Command
SMOKE PURGE 2 BAS
Commun
Port P1
On Off
IPU Board
Gives The Status Of The
Communicated Smoke Purge 2
Command
SMOKE PURGE 3 BAS
Commun
Port P1
On Off
IPU Board
Gives The Status Of The
Communicated Smoke Purge 3
Command
SAT RESET BAS
Commun
Port P1
User Disable /
User Enable
IPU Board
This Item Must Be Enabled In Order To
Communicate A Supply Air Temperature
Reset Value To The Unit
SUPPLY AIR TEMP
RESET BAS
Commun
Port P1
0 To 5 Volts
IPU Board
The Supply Air Temperature Reset
Value Being Communicated To The Unit
Through The BAS
IPU Board
Gives The Status Of The
Communicated System Stop Command
SYSTEM STOP
Commun
Port P1
0 - Allows All
Compressors
To Operate;
1 - Turns Off
Compressor
System 1;
2 - Turns Off
Compressor
System 2;
3 - Turns Off
Compressor
System 3
UNIT STOP
Commun
Port P1
On / Off
IPU Board
Gives The Status Of The
Communicated Unit Stop Command
W1 LOW HEAT BAS
Commun
Port P1
On / Off
IPU Board
Gives The Status Of The
Communicated W1 Low Heat
Command
W2 HIGH HEAT BAS
Commun
Port P1
On / Off
IPU Board
Gives The Status Of The
Communicated W2 High Heat
Command
Y1 LOW COOL BAS
Commun
Port P1
On / Off
IPU Board
Gives The Status Of The
Communicated Y1 Low Cool Command
Y2 HIGH COOL BAS
Commun
Port P1
On / Off
IPU Board
Gives The Status Of The
Communicated Y2 High Cool Command
ZONE TEMP BAS
Commun
Port P1
-20.0 °F To
180.0 °F
IPU Board
Gives The Actual Value Of The
Communicated Zone Temperature
120
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 35 – SERVICE (CONT'D)
DISPLAY TEXT
TYPE
ID
VALUE RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
This Is The Size Of The Code In The
Software And Is Not For Field Use
FIRMWARE CRC
Derived
REAL TIME UI - PEAK 5
SEC AND AVERAGE
Derived
The Average And Peak Over The Last
5 Seconds Time Used By The User
Interface. This Is Not For Field Use
REAL TIME UI - LOST
AND PEAK
Derived
The Lost And Peak Time Used By The
User Interface. This Is Not For Field
Use
REAL TIME CONTROL
- PEAK 5 SEC AND
AVERAGE
Derived
The Average And Peak Over The Last
5 Seconds Time Used By The Control.
This Is Not For Field Use
REAL TIME CONTROL LOST AND PEAK
Derived
The Lost And Peak Time Used By The
Control. This Is Not For Field Use
DE MODIFIER
ADDRESS
DE MODIFIER OFFSET
P1 BAUD RATE
P1 MANUAL MAC
ADDRESS
0 To 99999
Always
-1 To 41943
Used To Enter A Specific De Instance.
See Connecting BAS to a TempMaster
OmniElite Unit with the IPU Controller
on page 125.
-1 To 99
Used In Combination With The De
Modifier Address To Enter A Specific
De Instance. See Connecting BAS to
a TempMaster OmniElite Unit with the
IPU Controller on page 125.
1200, 4800,
9600, 19200,
38400, 76800
Establishes The Communication Baud
Rate For Port 1
-1 To 127
Allows The Manual Entrance Of
The Mac Address For Port 1. See
Connecting BAS to a TempMaster
OmniElite Unit with the IPU Controller
on page 125.
P1 PARITY
None, Even,
Odd, Ignore
Do Not Change From Default Value For
Bacnet
P1 PROTOCOL
Bacnet, Api
Keep Setting On Bacnet
P1 STOP BITS
1-2
Do Not Change From Default Value For
Bacnet
P2 BAUD RATE
1200, 4800,
9600, 19200,
38400, 57600
Establishes The Communication Baud
Rate For Port 2
-1 To 127
Allows The Manual Entrance Of
The Mac Address For Port 2. See
Connecting BAS to a TempMaster
OmniElite Unit with the IPU Controller
on page 125.
P2 MANUAL MAC
ADDRESS
P2 PARITY
P2 PROTOCOL
TEMPMASTER
None, Even,
Odd, Ignore
Terminal,
Modbus I/O,
Modbus Server,
Api, Modbus
Client
Establishes The Parity For
Communication Port 2
Establishes The Protocol For
Communication Port 2
121
6
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 35 – SERVICE (CONT'D)
DISPLAY TEXT
TYPE
ID
VALUE RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
Establishes The Stop Bit Setting For
Communication Port 2
P2 STOP BITS
1-2
P3 BAUD RATE
1200, 4800,
9600, 19200,
38400, 57600
Establishes The Communication Baud
Rate For Port 3
-1 To 127
Allows The Manual Entrance Of
The Mac Address For Port 3. See
Connecting BAS to a TempMaster
OmniElite Unit with the IPU Controller
on page 125.
P3 MANUAL MAC
ADDRESS
None, Even,
Odd, Ignore
P3 PARITY
Establishes The Parity For
Communication Port 3
P3 PROTOCOL
Terminal,
Modbus I/O,
Modbus Server,
Api, Modbus
Client
P3 STOP BITS
1-2
P4 BAUD RATE
1200, 4800,
9600, 19200,
38400, 57600
Establishes The Communication Baud
Rate For Port 4
-1 To 127
Allows The Manual Entrance Of
The Mac Address For Port 4. See
Connecting BAS to a TempMaster
OmniElite Unit with the IPU Controller
on page 125.
P4 MANUAL MAC
ADDRESS
None, Even,
Odd, Ignore
P4 PARITY
P4 PROTOCOL
Terminal,
Modbus I/O,
Modbus Server,
Api, Modbus
Client
P4 STOP BITS
1-2
Establishes The Protocol For
Communication Port 3
Establishes The Stop Bit Setting For
Communication Port 3
Establishes The Parity For
Communication Port 4
Establishes The Protocol For
Communication Port 4
Establishes The Stop Bit Setting For
Communication Port 4
CONNEXSYS ERROR
FEATURE AND
DETECTION
Derived
Not For Field Use
CONNEXSYS ERROR
PAGE AND FIELD
Derived
Not For Field Use
CONNEXSYS ERROR
REASON AND VALVE
Derived
Not For Field Use
REAL TIME PROBLEM
STRING
Derived
Not For Field Use
REAL TIME PROBLEM
NUMBER
Derived
Not For Field Use
REAL TIME PROBLEM
Derived
Not For Field Use
122
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
The following is an example of an ANALOG Input display that can be viewed from Service Mode. See Table
35 on page 115 for a listing of the ANALOG Inputs.
SERVICE AI PIO J07-01 XX.X VDC
+ BUILDING STATIC PRES =XX.XXINWC
Following is an example of a DIGITAL Input display
that can be viewed from Service Mode. See Table 35
on page 115 for a listing of the DIGITAL Inputs.
SERVICE DI PIO TB08-01
LOCAL STOP
RUN
Following is an example of a DIGITAL Output display
that can be viewed from Service Mode. The XXX is
replaced with OFF or ON in this section. See Table 35
on page 115 for a listing of the DIGITAL Outputs.
SERVICE DO PIO TB03-05
COMPRESSOR 2A
OFF
• Unit Data
• Cooling
• Comp Sys 1
• Comp Sys 2
• Comp Sys 3
• Economizer
HISTORY
The HISTORY key gives the user access to WARNING and FAULT information. Many operating parameters and states are saved at the time of a fault. The
History information can be viewed after entering the
Level 2 password.
HISTORY key pressed
FAULT 2
FAULT 3
Fault 2
Data
Fault 3
Data
When the HISTORY key is pressed, the first active
warning will be displayed. If there are not any active
warnings, HISTORY 1 is displayed. If there are not
any faults, “NO FAULT” will be displayed. Data is not
saved for warnings. Data is saved for faults.
When a warning is displayed, the ► key advances to
the next warning or HISTORY 1 after the last warning.
The ◄ key returns to the previous warning or the highest HISTORY number before the first warning.
TEMPMASTER
• Status
• Heating
SERVICE AO PIO TB08-01 XX.X VDC
+ SYS 1 FEED VALVE OUTPUT =XXX.X %
Fault 1
Data
The data following the initial History Fault display, is
displayed in the same order and with the same message
used under the respective menu function:
• Supply System
Following is an example of an ANALOG Output display that can be viewed from Service Mode. See Table
35 on page 115 for a listing of the ANALOG Outputs
WARNING 1 WARNING 2 FAULT 1
When a HISTORY # is displayed, the ► key advances
to the next HISTORY # or warning 1 after the last fault.
The ◄ key returns to the previous HISTORY # or the
highest warning number before the first fault. Buffer
number 1 is the most recent and buffer number 10 is
the oldest HISTORY # saved. A maximum of 10 HISTORY #s are saved. The ▲ and ▼ key can be used
to scroll forwards and backwards through the history
buffer data.
• Ventilation
• Exhaust
• Hours/Starts
Pressing the ▼ key from a History Fault display
changes the display to the History Section display format. The ► and ◄ keys are used to select a section.
Pressing the HISTORY or X key returns to the History
Fault display. Pressing the ▼ key displays the next parameter in the selected list. From a parameter display,
pressing the HISTORY or X key returns to the History
Fault display. See Navigation Keys on page 98 for
instructions for navigating the parameter display.
For the following example, assume that there were
three faults and one warning logged.
First, the HISTORY key is pressed to get the password
prompt. If a level 2 password is active, this prompt is
skipped.
HISTORY
ENTER PASSWORD
123
6
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
After entering the Level 2 password, the most recent
WARNING is displayed.
HISTORY WARNING
+ WRN-BUILDING PRS
◄►
The ► key is pressed to move to the first fault.
HISTORY 01 31 OCT 2004 12:45:59 AM ◄►
+ LOCKOUT-DUCT PRS XDCR
The ► key is pressed to move to the next older fault
(fault # 2).
HISTORY 02 31 OCT 2004 10:42:39 AM ◄►
AUTO RESET-MSAT SENSOR
The ► key is pressed to move to the next older fault
(fault # 3).
HISTORY 03 30 OCT 2004 02:11:23 PM ◄►
WRN-BUILDING PRS
The ▼ key is pressed to view data saved when fault #3
was detected.
HISTORY 03 – STATUS
UNIT-OVERALL STATUS
◄►
RUN
The ▼ key is pressed to view the second STATUS
value.
HISTORY 03 – STATUS
◄►
CURRENT OPER MODE RUN
The ► key is pressed to change to the next data section
(UNIT DATA).
HISTORY 03 – UNIT DATA
◄►
UNIT TYPE
VARIABLE AIR VOLUME
The X or HISTORY key is pressed to go back to the
fault display.
HISTORY 03 30 OCT 2004 02:11:23 PM ◄►
WRN-BUILDING PRS
From fault display, the X key can be pressed to return
to the Power Up Banner display.
124
PASSWORD
Passwords are used to allow restricted access to the
modification and viewing of certain parameters using the SETPOINTS, PROGRAM, OPTIONS, DATE/
TIME, SCHEDULE, OPERATING HOURS / START
COUNTER, PRINT, SERVICE, and HISTORY menu
keys. The menus activated by each of these buttons
can only be viewed after an acceptable password is entered. Each parameter is associated with a level of access. Each level of access is associated with a specific
password. The access levels available are: Level 1 or
Level 2.
• If a parameter is tagged as Level 1, password of
9675 must be entered in order to change the value.
• If a parameter is tagged as Level 2, a password of
9725 must be entered in order to change the value.
Entering the Level 2 password will also allow the
changing of a Level 1 parameter.
Pressing SETPOINTS, PROGRAM, OPTIONS,
DATE/TIME, SCHEDULE, OPERATING HOURS /
START COUNTER, PRINT, SERVICE, or HISTORY
key will take the user to the login prompt. When the
user is first presented with the login prompt, the password field will be blank. If the user wishes to change
Level 1 or Level 2 parameters, the user must know the
appropriate password. At that point, only the parameters changeable under the specific password level will
be displayed. For example, if the user presses the Options menu key, and then enters a Level 1 password, the
user will be presented with a list of option parameters
that have been tagged as Level 1. If the user enters a
level 2 password, all parameters are displayed.
The password is entered by pressing the correct sequence of numerical keys (the 0 key through the 9 key),
then pressing the  key. As digits are entered, asterisks
will be placed in the password field. Once entered, the
menu system will compare the password to a list of
stored passwords. If the entered password matches one
of the stored passwords, the user is allowed access at
the specified level, and the display will show the first
applicable parameter of the menu list, with the appropriate edit prompts. If the password is not correct, the
screen will display “Password Incorrect” for two seconds and then revert back to the Login Prompt. Pressing the X key during password entry will cancel the
password entry process and take the user back to the
Login Prompt.
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
Once a password has been accepted, reentry of that
password will not be required until either the user
presses a menu key other than SETPOINTS, PROGRAM, OPTIONS, DATE/TIME, SCHEDULE, OPERATING HOURS / START COUNTER, PRINT,
SERVICE, HISTORY or key activity is idle for fifteen
minutes. This ensures that the menu system reverts to
password protection within an acceptable timeout.
POWER UP BANNER
When power is first applied to the control panel, the
following message will be displayed for two seconds:
The top line displays the copyright message. The bottom line displays the software version, and the present
date and time.
The software version number will be in the following
formats:
• C.ECO.ZZ.YY (control board released version)
• Where C is the Product Classification and stands
for Commercial unit
• ECO is the Family Code and stands for TempMaster OmniElite Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioner
Control Panel
• ZZ = the Product Code
• YY = the Version Number
CONNECTING BAS TO A TEMPMASTER
OMNIELITE UNIT WITH THE IPU CONTROLLER
A TempMaster OmniElite Rooftop Unit with the IPU
controller ships from the factory ready to connect and
communicate with a Building Automation System utilizing BACnet MS/TP protocol.
The unit can also communicate via BACnet IP, LON
or N2 with the addition of a field provided/installed
component.
BACNET MS/TP
• Communication wires MUST be connected to Port
1 using only terminals 3 and 4. Connecting wires to
any of the other terminals could result in erratic or
no communication. (See Figure 41 on page 126)
d. Terminal 3: Receive (+)
e. Terminal 4: Transmit (-)
TEMPMASTER
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
• MAC address can be set using dip switch SW2 or
in the SERVICE Key. Preferred method is through
the SERVICE Key. This prevents someone accidentally hitting a dipswitch key and changing the
MAC address
• Using the SERVICE Key to set the MAC address:
a. Press the SERVICE Key on the keyboard.
b. Enter the level 2 password, 9725, and press
the .
c. The screen should display “Data Log Format.” If not, press the SERVICE key again,
and “Data Log Format” should appear.
d. Use the UP arrow to scroll up through the
menu until the screen displays “P1 Stop Bits
=1.”
e. This is the part of the menu for Port 1.
f. Press the UP arrow again to “P1 Protocol.”
Should be set to BACnet.
g. Use the UP arrow again until the screen displays “P1 Manual Mac Address.” If the value
is set to -1, the unit address is set by the dipswitches. Press the  and enter the MAC address for the unit using the numbered section
of the keypad, then press the  to accept this
value
h. Use the UP arrow again to find the “P1 Baud
Rate.” Set this value to the required Baud
Rate.
i. Press the X key on the keypad to exit the programming menu.
j. Cycle main power OFF then ON for new values to be locked in.
• The unit is now ready to communicate to the BAS
BACNET IP
• Since the IPU controller does not have a functional IP port, a gateway must be used.
• We recommend using a JCI NCE (MSNCE2560-0)
• The gateway will be connected to Port 1 on the
IPU controller like below (See Figure 41 on page
126).
125
6
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
IPU Board
SD Card Slot
SW2: MAC Address Switch
Port 3 (J2)
SW1: Not
Used
Battery
5 VDC Power
Port 2 (J5)
Port 4 (J3)
Port 1 (J4) BACnet MS/TP
MUST connect here
LD20051
Figure 40 - IPU CONTROLLER PORT LOCATIONS
126
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
LON
• To communicate to a BAS utilizing LON protocol, an E-Link must be used:
a. YK-ELNK101-0
b. YK-ELNKE01-1 (with enclosure)
• The wires from the E-Link to the IPU controller will be connected to Port 1 (See Figure 41 on
page 126).
• P1 Protocol set to BACnet. See above under
BACnet MS/TP to locate P1 Protocol in the Service Menu.
See Figure 42 on page 127 for addressing the E-Link
to the IPU Controller.
6
LD20050
TempMaster OmniElite Setup for MS/TP Bus:
DE Modifier Address set to 50.
DE Modifier Offset set to -1.
P1 Protocol set to BACnet.
P1 Manual MAC Address set to -1.
P1 Baud Rate st to 38400.
P1 Parity set to None.
P1 Stop Bits set to 1.
MAC Address Switch (SW2) set 1 ON, all others OFF.
Note: Do not set the chiller address and the E-Link address to the same value. This causes a conflict on the MS/TP Bus resulting in no communication between the chiller IPU I board and the E-Link Gateway.
Figure 41 - E-LINK CONNECTIONS AND ADDRESSING INSTRUCTIONS
TEMPMASTER
127
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
N2
END OF LINE TERMINATION
• To communicate to a BAS utilizing N2, an E-Link
must be used
a. YK-ELNK100-0
b. YK-ELNKE00-0 (with enclosure)
• The wires from the E-Link to the IPU controller will be connected to Port 1 (See Figure 41 on
page 126).
• P1 Protocol set to BACnet. See above under
BACnet MS/TP to locate P1 Protocol in the Service Menu.
See Figure 42 on page 127 for addressing the E-Link
to the IPU Controller.
OTHER PROTOCOLS
• The IPU controller is also capable of communicating with other BAS protocols:
a. MODBUS Server
b. MODBUS Client
c. MODBUS I/O
d. Terminal
• While it is not always required to have End-ofLine Termination, it is strongly recommended.
• For BACnet MS/TP and N2 protocols, TempMaster factory recommends using our End-Of-Line
Terminator, p/n: MS-BACEOL-0.
• Other communication protocols may need to provide/install their own end-of-line terminators if
applicable.
MISCELLANEOUS
• Whenever a change is made to a communication
setting, please cycle power on/off to the unit to
“lock in” the new setting.
• Points list are available in Table 36 on page 129
for BACnet MS/TP, BACnet IP, and MODBUS.
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
• For technical support on connecting to and communicating with the IPU controller in the TempMaster OmniElite rooftop unit, please contact
Product Technical Support
• 844-608-3387, prompts 2-3-2
e. API
128
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
Table 33 - BACNET MS/TP, MODBUS, BACNET IP
READ/
WRITE
BACNET
OBJECT
TYPE AND
INSTANCE
MODBUS
REGISTER
ADDRESS
Duct Static Press
Active Sp
R
AI01
514
Displays The Active Duct Static Press Sp
("W.C.)
ACT_MIN_
FLOW
Active Minimum
Airflow
R
AI02
515
Displays The Min Ventilation Air (CFM) Sp
When The Unit Has An Air Flow Monitoring
Station
ACT_MIN_POS
Active Minimum
Position
R
AI03
516
Displays The Min OA Damper Position (%)
When The Unit Is Fixed Min Vent Control
ACT_SAT_SP
Active Supply Air
Temp Sp
R
AI04
517
Displays The Active Supply Air Temp Sp
AMORN_WA_
ACT
Adaptive Morning
Warmup Status
(Only Used With
Internal Time Clock)
R
BI01
Building Pressure
Current
R
AI05
518
Displays The Current Building Press
("W.C.)
R/W
AV01
1026
Displays The Active Building Pressure Sp
("W.C.)
BACNET
NAME
ACT_DSP_SP
BLD_STAT_
PRS
BULD_PRES_
SP
USER INTERFACE
NAME
Bldg Press Sp
POINTS LIST DESCRIPTION
Displays The Status Of The Adaptive
Morning Warm-Up
CO2_1_OUT
CO2 Level Of The
Outside Air
R
AI07
520
Displays The Actual OA Air CO2 (PPM)
CO2_2_IN
CO2 Level Of The
Inside Air
R
AI08
521
Displays The Actual RA Air CO2 (PPM)
CO2_INSIDE
CO2 LVL Inside
Value BAS
R/W
AV43
1168
A BAS Entered Value For The Inside CO2
Level. "CO2 LVL Inside BAS" Must Be
Enabled Using The Service Key In Order
To Use This Point (CO2)
CO2_OFFSET
CO2 Offset Sp
R/W
AV02
1027
Displays The Value (PPM) That The Indoor
CO2 Must Rise Above The Outside CO2 To
Activate Demand Ventilation
R
BI02
1283
Displays The Status Of The Cooling Or
Heating System. 0=No Fault 1=Fault
R/W
AV78 BV02
1103
Displays The Status Of The Comfort Vent
Option And Allow It To Be Turned On/Off:
0=Off 1=On
COL/HEAT_FLT
COMFORT_
VENT
Cooling/Heating
Fault Status
Comfort Ventilation
(SZVAV)
COMP_1A
Compressor 1A
Status
R
BI03
1284
Displays The Status Of Comp 1A: 0=Off
1=On
COMP_1A_
OPER
Comp 1A Operating
Hrs
R
AI09
522
Displays The Operating Hrs Of Comp 1A
COMP_1B
Compressor 1B
Status
R
BI04
1285
Displays The Status Of Comp 1B: 0=Off
1-On
COMP_1B_
OPER
Comp 1B Operating
Hrs
R
AI10
523
Displays The Operating Hrs Of Comp 1B
COMP_2A
Compressor 2A
Status
R
BI05
1286
Displays The Status Of Comp 2A: 0=Off
1=On
COMP_2A_
OPER
Comp 2A Operating
Hrs
R
AI11
524
Displays The Operating Hrs Of Comp 2A
COMP_2B
Compressor 2B
Status
R
BI06
1287
Displays The Status Of Comp 2B: 0=Off
1=On
TEMPMASTER
129
6
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 36 – BACNET MS/TP, MODBUS, BACNET IP (SEE NOTES AT END OF TABLE) (CONT'D)
BACNET
NAME
USER INTERFACE
NAME
READ/
WRITE
BACNET
OBJECT
TYPE AND
INSTANCE
MODBUS
REGISTER
ADDRESS
COMP_2B_
OPER
Comp 2B Operating
Hrs
R
AI12
525
Displays The Operating Hrs Of Comp 2B
COMP_3A
Compressor 3A
Status (70-150 Ton
Only)
R
BI07
1288
Displays The Status Of Comp 3A: 0=Off
1=On
COMP_3A_
OPER
Comp 3A Operating
Hrs (70-150 Ton
Only)
R
AI13
526
Displays The Operating Hrs Of Comp 3A
COMP_3B
Compressor 3B
Status (70-150 Ton
Only)
R
BI08
1289
Displays The Status Of Comp 3B: 0=Off
1=On
COMP_3B_
OPER
Comp 3B Operating
Hrs (70-150 Ton
Only)
R
AI14
527
Displays The Operating Hrs Of Comp 3B
COMP_
LPCO_1
Safety Input LPCO
Ckt 1 Status
R
BI09
1290
Displays The Status Of The Low Press
Switch On Ckt 1: 0=Fault 1=No Fault
COMP_
LPCO_2
Safety Input LPCO
Ckt 2 Status
R
BI10
1291
Displays The Status Of The Low Press
Switch On Ckt 2: 0=Fault 1=No Fault
COMP_
LPCO_3
Safety Input LPCO
Ckt 3 Status (70150 Ton Only)
R
BI11
1292
Displays The Status Of The Low Press
Switch On Ckt 3: 0=Fault 1=No Fault
COMP_STAT_1
Safety Chain Ckt 1
Status
R
BI12
1293
Displays The Status Of Ckt 1 Safety
Chain: 0=Fault 1=No Fault
COMP_STAT_2
Safety Chain Ckt 2
Status
R
BI13
1294
Displays The Status Of Ckt 2 Safety
Chain: 0=Fault 1=No Fault
Safety Chain Ckt 3
COMP_STAT_3 Status (70-150 Ton
Only)
R
BI14
1295
Displays The Status Of Ckt 3 Safety
Chain: 0=Fault 1=No Fault
POINTS LIST DESCRIPTION
COND_FAN_1A
Cond Fan 1A/1
Status
R
BI15
1296
Displays The Status Of Cond Fan 1A/1:
0=Off 1=On
COND_FAN_1B
Cond Fan 1B/2
Status
R
BI16
1297
Displays The Status Of Cond Fan 1B/2:
0=Off 1=On
COND_FAN_2A
Cond Fan 2A/3
Status
R
BI17
1298
Displays The Status Of Cond Fan 2A/3:
0=Off 1=On
COND_FAN_2B
Cond Fan 2B/4
Status
R
BI18
1299
Displays The Status Of Cond Fan 2B/4:
0=Off 1=On
Cond Fan 3A/5
COND_FAN_3A Status (70-150 Ton
Only
R
BI19
1300
Displays The Status Of Cond Fan 3A/5:
0=Off 1=On
Cond Fan 3B/6
COND_FAN_3B Status (70-150 Ton
Only)
R
BI20
1301
Displays The Status Of Cond Fan 3B/6:
0=Off 1=On
R
AI15
528
Not Used At This Time. For Future Use
COND_FAN_
SPD
130
Cond Fan Speed
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 36 – BACNET MS/TP, MODBUS, BACNET IP (SEE NOTES AT END OF TABLE) (CONT'D)
BACNET
NAME
USER INTERFACE
NAME
READ/
WRITE
BACNET
OBJECT
TYPE AND
INSTANCE
MODBUS
REGISTER
ADDRESS
CONTINU_
VENT
Continuous
Ventilation (SZVAV)
R/W
AV79 BV03
1104
Displays The Status Of The Continuous
Ventilation Option And Allows For It To Be
Turned On/Off: 0=Off 1=On
POINTS LIST DESCRIPTION
DCT_ST_PR_
RT
Duct Static Press
Reset
R
AI16
529
Displays The Status Of The Hardwired
Duct Static Reset Value To Ctb1 (%)
DCT_STAT_
PRS
Duct Static Press
Current (VAV)
R
AI17
530
Displays The Actual Duct Static Press.
("W.C.)
DSP_HI_LIMIT
Duct Static Reset
High Sp (VAV)
R/W
AV03
1028
Displays The Duct Static High Sp ("W.C.)
DSP_LO_LIMIT
Duct Static Reset
Low Sp (VAV)
R/W
AV04
1029
Displays The Duct Static Low Sp ("W.C.)
1030
A BAS Value That Causes The Reset Of
The Duct Static Press Sp Between To High
And Low Values. "Duct Pres RST BAS"
Must Be Enabled Through The Service
Key To Use This Point (%)
DSP_RST_BAS
Duct Static Press
Reset BAS (VAV)
R/W
AV05
Econ Method Active
R
AI18
531
Displays The Status Of The Active
Economizer Mode: 1=Dry Bulb 2=Single
Enthalpy 3=Dual Enthalpy 4=Best Method
Avail
ECON_STATUS Econ System Status
R
AI19
532
Displays The Status Of The Economizer:
1=Installed And Active 2=Not Installed
3=Disabled
R/W
AV81 BV05
1106
Allows The Economizer Feature To Be
Turned On/Off: 0=Off 1=On
ECON_ME_
USED
ECONO_
INSTAL
Economizer System
ECONO_
METHOD
Econ Method To
Use
R/W
AV06
1031
Allows For The Selection Of The
Economizer Method To Use: 1=Dry Bulb
2=Single Enthalpy 3=Dual Enthalpy
4=Best Method Avail
EXH_DAMPER/ Exhaust Damper
VFD
BAS Control
R/W
AV52
NA*
Allows for the control of the Exhaust Fan
Speed or Modulating Damper (Return
Fan). 0 To 100% for both applications.
EXH_FAN_
STAT
Exhaust Fan Status
R
BI21
1302
Displays The Status Of The Exhaust Fan
Proving Circuit: 0=Open 1=Closed
EXHAUST_FAN
Exhaust Fan Output
Status
R
BI22
1303
Displays The Status Of The Exhaust Fan
Output: 0=Off 1=On
EXHAUST_
OUT
Exhaust Damper
Position
R
AI21
534
Displays The Control Output To The Exh
Damper (%)
FAN_FAULT
Fan Fault Status
R
BI23
1304
Displays The Status Of The Supply,
Exhaust Or Return Fan Fault: 0=No Fault
1=Fault
Fan (G) Status
R
BI24
1305
Displays The Status Of The Fan (G) Input;
Either Hardwired (Ctb1) Or Communicated
(BAS): 0=Off 1=On
R/W
AV82 BV06
1107
A BAS Command That Allows The Fan (G)
Input To Be Turned On/Off: 0=Off 1=On
FAN_G
FAN_G_BAS
TEMPMASTER
Fan (G) BAS
131
6
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 36 – BACNET MS/TP, MODBUS, BACNET IP (SEE NOTES AT END OF TABLE) (CONT'D)
READ/
WRITE
BACNET
OBJECT
TYPE AND
INSTANCE
MODBUS
REGISTER
ADDRESS
R
BI25
1306
Displays The Status Of The Dirty Filter
Input: 0=No Fault 1=Fault
FURN_OUT_1
Elect Heat Stage 1
Status Staged Gas
Furn 1 Lo Status
Mod Gas Furn 1A
Low Status
R
BI26
1307
Displays The Status Of The Control Output
To The Indicated Heat Section: 0=Off
1=On
FURN_OUT_2
Elect Heat Stage 2
Status Staged Gas
Furn 1 High Status
Mod Gas Furn 1A
High Status
R
BI27
1308
Displays The Status Of The Control Output
To The Indicated Heat Section: 0=Off
1=On
FURN_OUT_3
Elect Heat Stage 3
Status Staged Gas
Furn 2 Low Status
Mod Gas Furn 2
Low Status
R
BI28
1309
Displays The Status Of The Control Output
To The Indicated Heat Section: 0=Off
1=On
FURN_OUT_4
Elect Heat Stage 4
Status Staged Gas
Furn 2 High Status
Mod Gas Furn 2
High Status
R
BI29
1310
Displays The Status Of The Control Output
To The Indicated Heat Section: 0=Off
1=On
FURN_OUT_5
Elect Heat Stage 5
Status Staged Gas
Furn 3 Low Status
Mod Gas Furn 3
Low Status
R
BI30
1311
Displays The Status Of The Control Output
To The Indicated Heat Section: 0=Off
1=On
FURN_OUT_6
Elect Heat Stage 6
Status Staged Gas
Furn 3 High Status
Mod Gas Furn 3
High Status
R
BI31
1312
Displays The Status Of The Control Output
To The Indicated Heat Section: 0=Off
1=On
FURN_OUT_7
Elect Heat Stage
7 Status Mod Gas
Furn 1B Status
R
BI32
1313
Displays The Status Of The Control Output
To The Indicated Heat Section: 0=Off
1=On
R/W
AV83 BV07
1108
A BAS Command That Allows The Heating
Function To Be Turned On/Off: 0=Enabled
1=Disabled
BACNET
NAME
USER INTERFACE
NAME
FILTER_STATS Filter Status
HEAT_ENABLE Heating System
POINTS LIST DESCRIPTION
HEAT_ENT_
TEMP
Heat Entering Temp
R
AI22
535
Displays The Actual Temp Of The Air
Entering The Elect, Staged Gas, Or Mod
Gas Heat Sections
HEAT_STAGES
Electric Heat Stages
Or Gas Heat Stages
R
AI23
536
Displays The Number Of Elect Or Staged
Gas Heat Stages Available
R/W
AV84 BV08
1109
A BAS Command That Allows The Hot
Water/Steam Valve Action To Be Changed:
0=Direct 1=Reverse
HEAT_
VACTION
Hw Valve Action
*Not Available
132
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 36 – BACNET MS/TP, MODBUS, BACNET IP (SEE NOTES AT END OF TABLE) (CONT'D)
BACNET
NAME
USER INTERFACE
NAME
READ/
WRITE
BACNET
OBJECT
TYPE AND
INSTANCE
MODBUS
REGISTER
ADDRESS
R/W
AV09
1034
Displays The Active Supply Air Temp Sp
For Heating
POINTS LIST DESCRIPTION
HEATING_SAT
Heating Suppy Sir
Temp Sp (VAV)
HEATING_VLV
Heating Valve
R
AI24
537
Displays The Ouput From The Control To
A Hw/Steam Valve Or Mod Gas Heat Valve
(%)
HW_FRZ_STAT
Hw/Steam Coil
Freezestat Status
R
BI33
1314
Displays The Status Of The Freezestat On
Units With Hw/Steam Heat: 0=No Fault
1-Faulted
R
BI34
1315
Displays The Status Of The 24Vac Input
To The Control Board Through The SD
Terminal And/Or The Unit On/Off Switch
Outside Air Max
Flow Sp
R/W
AV11
1036
Displays The Max Airflow For Demand
Ventilationwith An Airflow Station (CFM)
Mech Cooling
Lockout Sp
R/W
AV12
1037
Displays The Min OA Temp At Which Mech
Cooling Is Allowed To Operate
Outside Air Min
Flow Sp
R/W
AV13
1038
Displays The Min Airflow For Demand
Ventilation With An Airflow Station (CFM)
LOCAL_STOP
Local Stop Status
MAX_FLOW_
DV
MECH_LCK_
TMP
MIN_FLOW_DV
Minimum OA Flow
Setpoint
R/W
AV51
1076
Displays The Min Outside Airflow Active
Setpoint For Tekair Measuring Station
(Tekair Full IAQ). Ventilation Needs To Be
User Enabled (CFM)
MORN_WARM_
Morning Warm Up
UP
R/W
AV85 BV09
1110
A BAS Command That Allows Morning
Warm-Up To Be Enabled/Disabled:
0=Enabled 1-Disabled
MIN_OA_FLO
MORN_WUP_
CMD
Morn Warmup
Command
R/W
AV86 BV10
1111
A BAS Command That Starts/Stops
Morning Warm-Up: 0=Off 1=On
MORN_WUP_
RAT
Heating Ret Air
Temp Sp (VAV)
R/W
AV15
1040
Displays The Active R/A Temp Sp For
Heating
NIGHT_
SETBAC
Night Setback For
Heating
R/W
AV87 BV11
1112
A BAS Command That Allows Night Set
Back To Be Turned On/Off: 0=Off 1=On
OA_DAMP_
POS1
OA Damper
Minimum Position
1041
Displays The Active Sp For The Min OA
Damper When Using Fixed Minimum
Ventilation And The Supply Fan VFD Is At
100%
OA_DAMP_
POS2
OA Damper
Maximum Position
OA_DAMPER
OA Damper Position
Current
R/W
AV16
R/W
AV17
1042
Displays The Max Position For The OA
Damper When Using Fixed Minimum
Ventilation And The Supply Fan VFD Is At
50%
R
AI25
538
Displays The Position Of The OA Damper
(%)
R/W
AV18
1043
Displays The Max Enthalpy Sp For Using
OA For Cooling (Btu/Lb) Single Or Dual
Enthalpy
OA_ENTH_
LIMIT
OA Enthalpy Sp
OA_
ENTHALPY
OA Enthalpy
R
AI26
539
Displays The Current OA Enthalpy (Btu/Lb)
OA Flow Press 1
R
AI27
540
Not Used
OA_FLO_
PRS_1
TEMPMASTER
133
6
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 36 – BACNET MS/TP, MODBUS, BACNET IP (SEE NOTES AT END OF TABLE) (CONT'D)
READ/
WRITE
BACNET
OBJECT
TYPE AND
INSTANCE
MODBUS
REGISTER
ADDRESS
OA Flow Press 2
R
AI28
541
Not Used
OA_FLOW_1
Iaq Damper Air
Flows OA Flow 1
R
AI61
574
Displays The Air Flow Through A Tek-Air
Full Iaq Air Measuring Station (CFM)
OA_FLOW_2
Iaq Damper Air
Flows OA Flow 2
R
AI62
575
Not Used
OA_FLOW_
TOTL
OA Flow Total
R
AI63
576
Displays The Total Air Flow Through A TekAir Full Iaq Air Measuring Station (CFM)
OA_REL_
HUMID
OA Humidity
R
AI29
542
Displays The Current OA Relative
Humidity (%)
OA_TEMP
OA Temperature
R
AI30
543
Displays The Current OA Temp
OAT_HIGH_
SAT
OA Temp Sp For
Hi Supply Air Temp
(VAV, And Only If
SAT Reset Method
Is Outside Air)
R/W
AV19
1044
Displays The OA Temp Sp Used For
Switching To The High Supply Air Temp Sp
OAT_LOW_
SAT
OA Temp Sp For
Lo Supply Air Temp
(VAV, And Only If
SAT Rest Method Is
Outside Air)
R/W
AV20
1045
Displays The OA Temp Sp Used For
Switching To The Low Supply Air Temp Sp
OCC_MODE
Occupancy Mode
Status
R
BI35
1316
Displays The OCC/UNOCC Status With
Hardwired, Communicated, Or Internal
Clock Schedule Input: (Ena=Enabled/OCC
Dis=Disabled/UNOCC)
OCC_STATE
Occupancy State
Status
R
BI36
1317
Displays The Status Of The Hardwired
Input: (Ena=Enabled/OCC Dis=Disabled/
UNOCC)
BACNET
NAME
USER INTERFACE
NAME
OA_FLO_
PRS_2
POINTS LIST DESCRIPTION
OCC_ZN_
COOL
OCC Zone Cooling
Sp
R/W
AV21
1046
Displays The Active Occupied Zone
Cooling Sp
OCC_ZN_HEAT
OCC Zone Heating
Sp
R/W
AV22
1047
Displays The Active Occupied Zone
Heating Sp
OCCUPNCY_
CMD
Occupancy
Command
R/W
AV88 BV12
1113
A BAS Command That Allows The Unit
To Be Placed In The OCC/UNOCC Mode:
(0=UNOCC 1=OCC)
PRS_1_DISCH
Disch Press Ckt 1
R
AI31
544
Displays The Current Disch Press Of Ckt
1 (Psig)
PRS_1_SUCT
Suct Press Ckt 1
R
AI32
545
Displays The Current Suct Press Of Ckt 1
(Psig)
PRS_2_DISCH
Disch Press Ckt 2
R
AI33
546
Displays The Current Disch Press Of Ckt
2 (Psig)
PRS_2_
SUCTION
Suct Press Ckt 2
R
AI34
547
Displays The Current Suct Press Of Ckt 2
(Psig)
PRS_3_DISCH
Disch Press Ckt 3
(70-150 Ton Only)
R
AI35
548
Displays The Current Disch Press Of Ckt
3 (Psig)
PRS_3_SUCT
Suct Press Ckt 3
(70-150 Ton Only)
R
AI36
549
Displays The Current Suct Press Of Ckt 3
(Psig)
134
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 36 – BACNET MS/TP, MODBUS, BACNET IP (SEE NOTES AT END OF TABLE) (CONT'D)
BACNET
NAME
PUMP_DOWN
USER INTERFACE
NAME
Pump Down
READ/
WRITE
BACNET
OBJECT
TYPE AND
INSTANCE
MODBUS
REGISTER
ADDRESS
POINTS LIST DESCRIPTION
R/W
AV89 BV13
1114
A BAS Command That Allows The Pump
Down Feature To Be Turned On/Off: (0=On
1=Off
PUMP_
DOWN_1
Pump Down Llsv 1
Status
R
BI37
1318
Displays The Status Of The Output To The
Ckt 1 Liq Line Solenoid Vlv: (0=On 1=Off)
PUMP_
DOWN_2
Pump Down Llsv 2
Status
R
BI38
1319
Displays The Status Of The Output To The
Ckt 2 Liq Line Solenoid Vlv: (0=On 1=Off)
PUMP_
DOWN_3
Pump Down Llsv 3
Status (70-150 Ton
Only)
R
BI39
1320
Displays The Status Of The Output To The
Ckt 3 Liq Line Solenoid Vlv: (0=On 1=Off)
RAT_COOL_SP
Cooling Return Air
Temp Sp (VAV)
R/W
AV23
1048
Displays The Active Return Air Temp Sp
For Cooling
RAT_HIGH_
SAT
Ra Temp Sp For
Hi Supply Air Temp
(VAV, And Only If
SAT Reset Method
Is Return Air)
R/W
AV24
1049
Displays The Ra Temp Sp Used For
Switching To The High Supply Air Temp Sp
Ra Temp Sp For
Lo Supply Air Temp
RAT_LOW_SAT (VAV, And Only If
SAT Reset Method
Is Return Air)
R/W
AV25
1050
Displays The Ra Temp Sp Used For
Switching To The Low Supply Air Temp Sp
RDY_RUN_C1A
Ready To Run
Comp 1A Status
R
BI40
1321
Displays The Status Of Comp 1A Ready
To Run If Comp Is Off: (Yes/No)
RDY_RUN_
C1B
Ready To Run
Comp 1B Status
R
BI41
1322
Displays The Status Of Comp 1B Ready
To Run If The Comp Is Off: (Yes/No)
RDY_RUN_C2A
Ready To Run
Comp 2A Status
R
BI42
1323
Displays The Status Of Comp 2A Ready
To Run If The Comp Is Off: (Yes/No)
RDY_RUN_
C2B
Ready To Run
Comp 2B Status
R
BI43
1324
Displays The Status Of Comp 2B Ready
To Run If The Comp Is Off: (Yes/No)
Ready To Run
RDY_RUN_C3A Comp 3A Status
(70-150 Ton Only)
R
BI44
1325
Displays The Status Of Comp 3A Ready
To Run If The Comp Is Off: (Yes/No)
RDY_RUN_
C3B
Ready To Run
Comp 3B Status
(70-150 Ton Only)
R
BI45
1326
Displays The Status Of Comp 3B Ready
To Run If The Comp Is Off: (Yes/No)
RDY_STOP_
C1A
Ready To Stop
Comp 1A Status
R
BI46
1327
Displays The Status Of Comp 1A Ready
To Stop If Operating: (Yes/No)
RDY_STOP_
C1B
Ready To Stop
Comp 1B Status
R
BI47
1328
Displays The Status Of Comp 1B Ready
To Stop If Operating: (Yes/No)
RDY_STOP_
C2A
Ready To Stop
Comp 2A Status
R
BI48
1329
Displays The Status Of Comp 2A Ready
To Stop If Operating: (Yes/No)
RDY_STOP_
C2B
Ready To Stop
Comp 2B Status
R
BI49
1330
Displays The Status Of Comp 2B Ready
To Stop If Operating: (Yes/No)
RDY_STOP_
C3A
Ready To Stop
Comp 3A Status
(70-150 Ton Only)
R
BI50
1331
Displays The Status Of Comp 3A Ready
To Stop If Operating: (Yes/No)
TEMPMASTER
135
6
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 36 – BACNET MS/TP, MODBUS, BACNET IP (SEE NOTES AT END OF TABLE) (CONT'D)
READ/
WRITE
BACNET
OBJECT
TYPE AND
INSTANCE
MODBUS
REGISTER
ADDRESS
Ready To Stop
Comp 3B Status
(70-150 Ton Only)
R
BI51
1332
Displays The Status Of Comp 3B Ready
To Stop If Operating: (Yes/No)
RET_AIR_
ENTH
Return Air Enthalpy
R
AI38
551
Displays The Actual Ra Enthalpy (Btu/Lb)
RET_AIR_
HUMD
Return Air Humidity
R
AI39
552
Displays The Actual Ra Relative Humidity
(%)
RET_AIR_
TEMP
Return Air Temp
Current
R
AI40
553
Displays The Actual Ra Temp (°F)
Exhaust/Return Fan
VFD
R
AI41
554
Displays The Output From The Control To
The Exh Or Ret Fan VFD (%)
RET_FAN_
PRES
Return Fan
Pressure Current
R
AI42
555
Displays The Actual Pressure That Is Used
To Control The Return Fan Speed ("W.C.)
RET_FAN_
STAT
Return Fan Status
R
BI52
1333
Displays The Status Of The Return Fan
Run Verification Circuit (0=Stop/Verification
Ckt Open, 1=Run/Verification Ckt Closed)
BACNET
NAME
RDY_STOP_
C3B
RET_FAN_OUT
USER INTERFACE
NAME
POINTS LIST DESCRIPTION
Reset Enthalpy Sp
RST_ENT_BAS
BAS
R/W
AV41
1066
Displays The Ra Enthalpy Sp Which
Causes The Unit To Switch From The
Evap Leaving High Sp To The Evap
Leaving Low Sp
SAT_HIGH_LIM
Suppy Air Temp Hi
Sp
R/W
AV26
1051
Displays The Upper Limit For The Supply
Air Temp Sp On A VAV Unit (°F)
SAT_LOW_LIM
Supply Air Temp
Lo Sp
R/W
AV27
1052
Displays The Lower Limit For The Supply
Air Temp Sp On A VAV Unit (°F)
SAT_RST_BAS
Supply Air Temp
Reset BAS
R/W
AV28
1053
Displays the Analog Input from the BAS
that Allows the Reset of the Active Supply
Air Temp SP. 0 Uses SAT High SP and 5
Uses SAT Low SP. "SAT RST BAS" Must
Be Enabled In the Service Menu for This
Point to Function
SAT_SUC_
TMP1
Saturated Suct
Temp Ckt 1
R
AI43
556
Displays The Saturation Temp Of System
1 Suction Gas Based On System 1 Suction
Press (°F)
SAT_SUC_
TMP2
Saturated Suct
Temp Ckt 2
R
AI44
557
Displays The Saturation Temp Of System
2 Suction Gas Based On System 2 Suction
Press (°F)
SAT_SUC_
TMP3
Saturated Suct
Temp Ckt 3 (70-150
Ton Only)
R
AI45
558
Displays The Saturation Temp Of System
3 Suction Gas Based On System 3 Suction
Press (°F)
SAT_TEMPER
Supply Air
Tempering Status
R
BI53
1334
Displays The Status Of Supply Air
Tempering (On/Off)
SEN/MSC_FLT
Sensor/Misc Fault
Status
R
BI54
1335
Displays The Status Of A Sensor Or Misc
Fault (0=No Fault 1=Faulted)
SF_PROV_SW
Supply Fan Status
R
BI55
1336
Displays The Status Of The Supply Fan
Air Proving Circuit (0=Stop Verification/Ckt
Open 1=Run Verification/Ckt Closed)
136
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 36 – BACNET MS/TP, MODBUS, BACNET IP (SEE NOTES AT END OF TABLE) (CONT'D)
BACNET
NAME
USER INTERFACE
NAME
READ/
WRITE
BACNET
OBJECT
TYPE AND
INSTANCE
MODBUS
REGISTER
ADDRESS
POINTS LIST DESCRIPTION
SF_SPD_H_
SAT
Fan Speed Sp For
Hi Supply Air Temp
R/W
AV29
1054
Displays The Supply Fan Speed Sp Used
For Switching To The High Supply Air
Temp Sp
SF_SPD_L_
SAT
Fan Speed Sp For
Lo Supply Air Temp
R/W
AV30
1055
Displays The Supply Fan Speed Sp Used
For Switching To The Low Supply Air Temp
Sp
SMOKE_
PUR_1
Smoke Purge 1
Status
R
BI56
1337
Displays The Status Of The Smoke
Purge 1 Input Either Hardwired Or
Communicated (On/Off)
SMOKE_
PUR_2
Smoke Purge 2
Status
R
BI57
1338
Displays The Status Of The Smoke
Purge 2 Input Either Hardwired Or
Communicated (On/Off)
SMOKE_
PUR_3
Smoke Purge 3
Status
R
BI58
1339
Displays The Status Of The Smoke
Purge 3 Input Either Hardwired Or
Communicated (On/Off)
SMOKE_
PUR1_B
Smoke Purge 1
BAS
R/W
AV90 BV14
1115
A BAS Command That Allows Smoke
Purge 1 To Be Activated (0=Off 1=On)
SMOKE_
PUR2_B
Smoke Purge 2
BAS
R/W
AV91 BV15
1116
A BAS Command That Allows Smoke
Purge 2 To Be Activated (0=Off 1=On)
SMOKE_
PUR3_B
Smoke Purge 3
BAS
R/W
AV92 BV16
1117
A BAS Command That Allows Smoke
Purge 3 To Be Activated (0=Off 1=On)
STG_1_COOL
1st Stage Cooling
SP (SZVAV)
R/W
AV31
1056
Displays The Active Supply Air Temp Sp
For A 1St Stage Cooling Input (Y1)
STG_1_HEAT
1st Stage Heating
SP (SZVAV)
R/W
AV32
1057
Displays The Active Supply Air Temp Sp
For A 1St Stage Heating Input (W1)
STG_2_COOL
2nd Stage Cooling
SP (SZVAV)
R/W
AV33
1058
Displays The Active Supply Air Temp Sp
For A 2Nd Stage Cooling Input (Y2)
STG_2_HEAT
2nd Stage Heating
SP (SZVAV)
R/W
AV34
1059
Displays The Active Supply Air Temp Sp
For A 2Nd Stage Heating Input (W2)
R
AI46
559
Displays The Actual Supply Air Temp. (°F)
6
SUP_AIR_
TEMP
Supply Air Temp
Current
SUP_AIR_
TRST
Supply Air Temp
Reset
R
AI47
560
Displays The Value, 0-5 VDC, Of A
Hardwired Or Communicated Input That
Will Be Used To Reset The Supply Air
Temp Sp (VDC)
SUP_FAN_VFD
Supply Fan VFD
Speed
R
AI48
561
Displays The Output From The Control To
The Supply Fan VFD (%)
Supply Fan Output
Status
R
BI59
1340
Displays The Status Of The Output From
The Controller To The Supply Fan Circuit
(0=Off 1=On)
SUPPLY_FAN
SYSTEM_STOP System Stop
SZ_MIN_VFD
Single Zone
Minimum VFD
R/W
AV35
1060
Allows A BAS Command That Manually
Shuts Down Compressor Circuits (0=All
Ckts Can Operate 1=Shuts Down Ckt 1
2=Shuts Down Ckt 2 3=Shuts Down Ckt 3
R/W
AV53
NA*
Allows the minimum supply fan speed to
be reset between 33% and 66% when
using SZVAV.
*Not Available
TEMPMASTER
137
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 36 – BACNET MS/TP, MODBUS, BACNET IP (SEE NOTES AT END OF TABLE) (CONT'D)
BACNET
NAME
READ/
WRITE
BACNET
OBJECT
TYPE AND
INSTANCE
MODBUS
REGISTER
ADDRESS
R
AI49
562
Displays The Actual System 1 Suct Line
Temp (°F)
R
AI50
563
Displays The System 1 Superheat (°F)
R
AI51
564
Displays The Actual System 2 Suct Line
Temp (°F)
Suct Superheat
Ckt 2
R
AI52
565
Displays The System 2 Superheat (°F)
Suct Temp Ckt 3
(70-150 Ton Only)
R
AI53
566
Displays The Actual System 3 Suct Line
Temp (°F)
Suct Superheat Ckt
3 (70-150 Ton Only)
R
AI54
567
Displays The System 3 Superheat (°F)
USER INTERFACE
NAME
TEMP_1_SUCT Suct Temp Ckt 1
TEMP_1_
SUPER
Suct Superheat
Ckt 1
TEMP_2_SUCT Suct Temp Ckt 2
TEMP_2_
SUPER
TEMP_3_SUCT
TEMP_3_
SUPER
POINTS LIST DESCRIPTION
R
AI58
571
Displays The Current Operating Mode:
0=OCC Cool
1=OCC Cool Low
2=OCC Cool High
5= OCC Heat
6=OCC Heat Low
7=OCC Heat High
8=OCC Standby
9=UNOCC Cool
10=UNOCC Cool Low
11=UNOCC Cool High
12=UNOCC Heat
13=UNOCC Heat Low
14=UNOCC Heat High
15=UNOCC Standby
16=Comfort Vent Cool
17=Comfort Vent Heat
18=Night Set-Back
19=Morning Warm-Up
20=Power Up Standby
R/W
AV93 V17
1118
A BAS Command That Allows The Unit
To Be Shut Down (0=Normal Operation
1=Unit Stopped)
R
BI60
UNOCC Zone
Cooling Sp
R/W
AV38
1063
UNOCC Zone Cooling Sp
UNOCC Zone
Heating Sp
R/W
AV39
1064
UNOCC Zone Heating Sp
R
BI61
1342
Displays The Status Of The Output That
Energizes A VAV Heat Relay (Off/On)
UNIT_MODE
Current Oper Mode
UNIT_STOP
Unit Stop
UNSTABLE_
SYS
Unstable System
Status (Not Used)
UNOCC_ZN_
COOL
UNOCC_ZN_
HEAT
VAV_HEAT
VAV Heat Relay
Status
VENT_
CONTROL
Ventilation Control
R/W
AV94 BV18
1119
A BAS Command That Allows The
Selection Of The Ventilation Function
(0=Fixed Minimum 1=Demand)
VENT_DEM_
OUT
Ventilation Demand
R
AI59
572
Displays The Status Of The Ventilation
Output For Demand Ventilation (%)
138
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
TABLE 36 – BACNET MS/TP, MODBUS, BACNET IP (SEE NOTES AT END OF TABLE) (CONT'D)
BACNET
NAME
USER INTERFACE
NAME
VENT_ENABLE Ventilation System
ZONE_TEMP
ZONE_TEMP_
BAS
Zone Temp Current
Zone Temp BAS
READ/
WRITE
BACNET
OBJECT
TYPE AND
INSTANCE
MODBUS
REGISTER
ADDRESS
R/W
AV95 BV19
1120
A BAS Command That Allows The
Ventilation Function To Be Turned On Or
Off (0=Off 1=On)
R
AI60
573
Displays The Actual Zone Temperature
(°F)
1065
Allows The BAS To Input An Zone
Temperature Reading (°F) The Control
Method Must Be Set To "Comm Zone
Temp" For This Point To Function
R/W
AV40
POINTS LIST DESCRIPTION
6
NOTES
1. The most up-to-date listing of the Standard Points Mapping can be found on the TempMaster website
2. For a Building Automation System using Bacnet IP, a gateway must be used, since the unit controller does not have a Bacnet IP port. We
recommend using a JCI NCE (MS-NCE2560-0)
TEMPMASTER
139
SECTION 6 – USER INTERFACE CONTROL CENTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
140
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 7 – PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS AND OPTIONS
Table 34 - DEFINITIONS
MENU ITEM
DEFINITION
ADAPT MORN WARM UP
This parameter is programmed through the PROGRAM key. Adaptive Morning Warm Up
uses the past three days of warm up times and temperatures to calculate the start time for
the current day. This parameter allows the user to USER ENABLED or USER DISABLED this
feature.
BLDG PRESSURE
CNTRL OFFSET
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. The Unit Controller To determine
when to turn on the exhaust fan. When the exhaust option is configured for “ON-OFF PRESS
CNTRL.”
BUILDING PRESSURE
ACTIVE SETPOINT
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. It identifies the control point for
the building pressure.
BUILDING PRESSURE
CURRENT
This is the actual pressure in the conditioned space.
CO2 LEVEL INSIDE
This is the CO2 level of the air in the conditioned space.
CO2 LEVEL OUTSIDE
This is the CO2 level of the outdoor air.
CO2 OFFSET SETPOINT
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. The Outside CO2 level must be
lower than the Indoor CO2 level plus the CO2 OFFSET SETPOINT before the outdoor door
damper will start to open for additional ventilation.
CO2 OFFSET CURRENT
This represents the current difference between the “CO2 LEVEL INSIDE” versus the “CO2
LEVEL OUTSIDE.”
COMFORT VENTILATION
This parameter is programmed through the PROGRAM key. This function is only used on a
SZVAV unit. The Unit Controller monitors the Return Air Temperature and energizes stages of
cooling or heating prior to a demand from the space. This function is only active when the unit
is in the Occupied mode. The choices are USER ENABLED or USER DISABLED.
COMP SYS 1 STATUS
This is the current operating mode of the system 1 compressors. The display will show
Normal - Comp A On, Normal - Comp B On, Normal - Both ON, Normal - Both Off, Safety Trip,
Safety Fault, Safety Lockout, Low Amb Inhibit, Low Suct Temp Unl, High DP Unload, or User
Disabled.
COMP SYS 2 STATUS
This is the current operating mode of the system 2 compressors. The display will show
Normal - Comp A On, Normal - Comp B On, Normal - Both ON, Normal - Both Off, Safety Trip,
Safety Fault, Safety Lockout, Low Amb Inhibit, Low Suct Temp Unl, High DP Unload, or User
Disabled.
COMP SYS 3 STATUS
This is the current operating mode of the system 3 compressors. The display will show
Normal - Comp A On, Normal - Comp B On, Normal - Both ON, Normal - Both Off, Safety Trip,
Safety Fault, Safety Lockout, Low Amb Inhibit, Low Suct Temp Unl, High DP Unload, or User
Disabled.
CONDENSER FAN 1A/1
This identifies if the Unit Controller has sent a Binary output to Condenser Fan 1A /1.
CONDENSER FAN 1B/2
This identifies if the Unit Controller has sent a Binary output to Condenser Fan 1B /2.
CONDENSER FAN 2A/3
This identifies if the Unit Controller has sent a Binary output to Condenser Fan 2A /3.
CONDENSER FAN 2B/4
This identifies if the Unit Controller has sent a Binary output to Condenser Fan 2B/4.
CONDENSER FAN 3A/5
This identifies if the Unit Controller has sent a Binary output to Condenser Fan 3A /5.
CONDENSER FAN 3B/6
This identifies if the Unit Controller has sent a Binary output to Condenser Fan 3B/6.
CONTINUOUS VENT
This parameter is programmed through the PROGRAM key. This is only used on a SZVAV
unit. When this parameter is enabled the supply blower will operate whenever the unit is in the
Occupied mode. The choices are USER ENABLED or USER DISABLED.
CONTROL METHOD
This parameter is programmed through the OPTIONS key and identifies the control method
being used on a SZVAV unit. The choices are Wired Zone Temp or Comm Zone Temp.
COOLING CONTROL
OFFSET
This is the control band the unit is trying to maintain. The control band is the Active Setpoint +/the Cooling Control Offset. If the temperature is above this band additional cooling is required,
if the temperature is below this band cooling is decreased.
TEMPMASTER
7
141
SECTION 7 – PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS AND OPTIONS
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
TABLE 39 – DEFINITIONS (CONT'D)
CURRENT OPER MODE
This is the current operating mode of the unit. The display will show OCC Standby, OCC
Cooling Low, OCC Cooling High, OCC Heating Low, OCC Heating High, UNOCC Standby,
Unnocc Cooling Low, UNOCC Cooling High, UNOCC Heating Low, UNOCC Heating High,
Morning Warm-up, Comfort Vent Cooling, Comfort Vent Heating, Occupied Cooling, Occupied
Heating, Unoccupied Cooling, or Unoccupied Heating.
CURRENT RUN TIME
COMP A
This is the amount of time the compressor has been in operation during the current cycle. This
is shown for each compressor of every compressor system.
CURRENT RUN TIME
COMP B
This is the amount of time the compressor has been in operation during the current cycle. This
is shown for each compressor of every compressor system.
DAILY WARM UP TIME
This is the time it takes to bring the Return Air Temperature up to setpoint during Adaptive
Morning Warm Up. The Unit Controller uses this value in the calculation of Daily Warm Up
Time Day 1.
DAILY WARM UP TIME
DAY 1
This is the Morning Warm Up time the Unit Controller recorded during the previous day 1. This
value is used to calculate the current Morning Warm initiate time for Adaptive Morning Warm
Up.
DAILY WARM UP TIME
DAY 2
This is the Morning Warm Up time the Unit Controller recorded during the previous day 2. This
value is used to calculate the current Morning Warm initiate time for Adaptive Morning Warm
Up.
DAILY WARM UP TIME
DAY 3
This is the Morning Warm Up time the Unit Controller recorded during the previous day 3. This
value is used to calculate the current Morning Warm initiate time for Adaptive Morning Warm
Up.
DAMPER HARDWARE
This parameter is programmed through the OPTIONS key and identifies the type of ventilation
system installed in the unit. The choices are None, 2 Position Damper, Standard Dampers,
TEK-AIR.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
This parameter is programmed through the OPTIONS key. This allows the user to select the
language the Unit Controller will use to display the information at the User Interface. The
choices are English or Spanish.
DISPLAY UNITS
This parameter is programmed through the OPTIONS key. This allows the user to select which
unit of measure the Unit Controller will use to display the information at the User Interface. The
choices are Imperial, metric.
DUCT PRESS
TRANSDUCER SPAN
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. This allows the use of three
different duct pressure control ranges, 0 to 1.00 INWG, 0 to 2.50 INWG, or 0 to 5.00 INWG.
DUCT STATIC OVER
PRESSURE
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. This sets the maximum allowable
Duct Static value before the Unit Controller lockouts the unit on an over pressure fault.
DUCT STATIC PRESS
ACTIVE SP
This is the current Duct Static Setpoint that the Unit Controller is trying to maintain.
DUCT STATIC PRESS
CURRENT
This is the actual duct static pressure value.
DUCT STATIC RESET
LOW SETP
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. This is the minimum Duct Static
Control point.
DUCT STATIC RESET
HIGH SETP
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. This is the maximum Duct Static
Control point.
ECONOMIZER CONTROL
This is the analog output from the Unit Controller to the Economizer Damper Actuator.
OUTPUT
ECONO INSTALLED
This parameter is programmed through the PROGRAM key and tells the Unit Controller what
type of economizer is installed, None, Dry Bulb, Single Enthalpy, Dual Enthalpy.
ECONO METHOD
ACTIVE
This value indicates which of the available economizer methods the Unit Controller is using.
ECONO METHOD TO
USE
This parameter is programmed through the PROGRAM key and tells the Unit Controller which
of the available economizer options to use. The choices are Dry Bulb, Single Enthalpy, Dual
Enthalpy, or Best Available.
ECONO OUTPUT FOR
FAN START
This parameter is set through the SETPOINTS key and identifies the position of the
economizer damper required to turn ON the exhaust fan in an ON/OFF DAMPER CTRL.
142
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 7 – PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS AND OPTIONS
TABLE 39 – DEFINITIONS (CONT'D)
ECONO OUTPUT FOR
FAN STOP
This parameter is set through the SETPOINTS key and identifies the position of the
economizer damper required to turn off the exhaust fan in an ON/OFF DAMPER CTRL option.
ECONO SYS STATUS
This is the active status of the economizer system, display will show Normal- Active, NormalInactive, Faulted, User Disabled; or None.
ELEC HEAT CAPACITY
This parameter is programmed through the OPTIONS key. This parameter is used to identify
the electric heat capacity installed in the unit. The options are 40 KW, 80 KW, 40 KW-200, 80
KW-200, 100 KW, 100 KW-200, 108 KW, 120 KW, 150 KW, 160 KW, 200 KW, 240 KW, or 250
KW.
EXHAUST DAMPER
POSITION/VFD
This identifies the percentage output from the Unit Controller to the Exhaust Damper or
Exhaust Fan when controlled by the unit or BAS (when exhaust Control BAS is enabled).
EXHAUST FAN OUTPUT
This identifies the Unit Controller is sending a Binary output to energize the exhaust fan circuit.
EXHAUST FAN STATUS
This verifies a Binary input to the Unit Controller is present when the exhaust fan is operating.
EXHAUST OUTPUT FOR
FAN START
This parameter is set through the SETPOINTS key and identifies the position of the exhaust
damper required to turn ON the exhaust fan in an ON/OFF PRESS CNTRL option.
EXHAUST OUTPUT FOR
FAN STOP
This parameter is set through the SETPOINTS key and identifies the position of the exhaust
damper required to turn off the exhaust fan in an ON/OFF PRESS CNTRL option.
EXHAUST/RETURN FAN
VFD
This is a derived value that indicates the output, in percent, to the Return Fan VFD.
EXHAUST SYS STATUS
This is the active status of the exhaust system. The display will show Normal-Active, NormalInactive, Faulted, User Disabled, or None.
EXHAUST/RETURN FAN
VFD
This identifies speed output in percentage that is being sent to the exhaust or return fan VFD.
FAN SPEED SETP FOR
HIGH SAT
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. When the supply fan speed is
equal to or less than this value the Active Supply Air Temperature Setpoint on a Variable Air
Volume Unit will be set to the SAT Setpoint High Limit.
FAN SPEED SETP FOR
LOW SAT
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. When the supply fan speed is
equal to or greater than this value the Active Supply Air Temperature Setpoint on a Variable Air
Volume Unit will be set to the SAT Setpoint Low Limit.
FILTER STATUS
This is status of the unit filters. A differential pressure switch must be installed to measure the
pressure drop across the filters. When the filters are dirty the switch closes sending a Binary
signal to the Unit Controller. The User Interface display will show Okay or Change.
FURNACE 1 MODE
This is the current status of the first heat exchanger section of a staged gas heat unit. The
User Interface will display Off, Purge, Ignition, On-Low, On-High, Safety Trip, Safety Fault,
Safety Lockout, or Fault- I/O.
FURNACE 1A MODE
This is the current status of the modulating section of the modulating gas heat furnace. The
User Interface will display Off, Purge, Ignition, On-Low, On-High, Safety Trip, Safety Fault,
Safety Lockout, or Fault- I/O.
FURNACE 1A MODE
APRX RATE
This is the approximate firing rate of the modulating gas heat section in MBH.
FURNACE 1A MODE
RELATIVE
This is the output from the Unit Controller to the modulating gas heat section in percent of full
capacity.
FURNACE 1B MODE
This is the current status of the non-modulating section of the modulating gas heat furnace.
The User Interface will display Off, Purge, Ignition, On, Safety Trip, Safety Fault, Safety
Lockout, or Fault- I/O.
FURNACE 2 MODE
This is the current status of the second heat exchanger section of a gas heat unit. The User
Interface will display Off, Purge, Ignition, On-Low, On-High, Safety Trip, Safety Fault, Safety
Lockout, or Fault- I/O.
FURNACE 3 MODE
This is the current status of the third heat exchanger section of a gas heat unit. The User
Interface will display Off, Purge, Ignition, On-Low, On-High, Safety Trip, Safety Fault, Safety
Lockout, or Fault- I/O.
GAS HEAT CAPACITY
This parameter is programmed through the OPTIONS key. This parameter is used to identify
the gas heat capacity installed in the unit. The options are 375 MBH, 750 MBH, or 1125 MBH.
HEAT ENTERING TEMP
This is the temperature of the supply air entering the staged heat section. This value is used to
initiate and terminate Supply Air Tempering when heat is installed.
TEMPMASTER
7
143
SECTION 7 – PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS AND OPTIONS
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
TABLE 39 – DEFINITIONS (CONT'D)
HEAT LIMIT
TEMPERATURE
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. This value determines the
maximum allowable Supply Air Temperature when heating is installed. If the temperature goes
above this setting the heat section will be shut down.
HEATING CONTROL
OFFSET
This is the control band the unit is trying to maintain. The control band is the Active Setpoint +/the Heating Control Offset. If the temperature is below this band, additional heating is required,
if the temperature is above this band heating is decreased.
HEATING SAT
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. On a VAV unit this becomes the
Active Supply Air Temperature Setpoint for heating operation. The Unit Controller controls the
heating option to try and maintain this temperature.
HEATING SYS STATUS
This is the current operating mode of the Heating Section. The display will show Normal Active, Normal - Inactive, Safety Trip, Safety Fault, Safety Lockout, User Disabled, or None.
HEATING SYSTEM TYPE
This parameter is programmed through the OPTIONS key. This parameter is used to identify
the type of heat installed in the unit. The options are None, Electric, Gas, Modulating Gas, Hot
Water / Steam.
HW / STEAM FRZ STAT
This is the status of the hydronic heat freezestat. This is done through a Binary input to the
Unit Controller. The switch is open for normal operation and closed on failure. The User
Interface will indicate OK or FAULTED.
HW / STEAM HEAT VALVE POS
This is the output from the Unit Controller to the hydronic valve as percent open.
HW VALVE ACTION
This parameter is programmed through the PROGRAM key. This parameter controls the output
to the hydronic modulating valve. When the parameter is set to DIRECT the output is 0 volts
for off and 10 volts for full capacity. When the parameter is set to REVERSE the output is 10
volts for off and 0 volts for full capacity.
MECH CLG LOCKOUT
TEMP
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. When the outdoor temperature
is equal to or less than this temperature, the Unit Controller will prevent the compressors from
operating.
MINIMUM OA FLOW
SETPOINT
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. When air measurement stations
are installed and the unit is not in the Occupied mode, this is the minimum allowable airflow.
MORNING WARM UP
This parameter is programmed through the PROGRAM key. This tells the Unit Controller if
the Morning Warm Up option is available or not. When it is programmed to USER ENABLED,
Morning Warm Up is available to be used. When it is programmed to USER DISABLED,
Morning Warm Up is unavailable.
MORNING WARM UP
MAX TIME
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. This value is the maximum time
the Unit Controller will allow for Morning Warm Up when the unit is in the Adaptive Morning
Warm Up mode. If the derived Morning Warm Up Opt Time exceed this time the Morning Warm
Up Max Time will be used.
MORNING WARM UP
OPT TIME
This is the average of the previous three days Warm Up times plus 10 minutes. This value will
be used to determine the Morning Warm Up start time for the next day when the unit is in the
Adaptive Morning Warm Up mode.
NIGHT SET BACK
This parameter is programmed through the PROGRAM key. This parameter allows the user to
enable or disable Night Set Back. If this parameter is disabled Unoccupied Heating will not be
available. The two parameters to choose from are USER ENABLED or USER DISABLED.
OA DAMPER MAXIMUM
POSITION
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. This establishes the maximum
amount of ventilation air to be used in a Demand Ventilation situation.
OA DAMPER MINIMUM
POSITION
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. This establishes the minimum
amount of ventilation air to be used when the unit is in the Occupied mode.
OA DAMPER POSITION
ACTIVE SP
This is the damper position setpoint, in percent open, the Unit Controller is trying to maintain.
OA DAMPER POSITION
CURRENT
This is the actual output, in percent open to the outdoor air damper.
OUTSIDE AIR ENTHALPY This indicates the total heat content of the outdoor air.
OUTSIDE AIR HUMIDITY
This is the outdoor air relative humidity.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMP
This is the outdoor air dry bulb temperature.
144
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 7 – PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS AND OPTIONS
TABLE 39 – DEFINITIONS (CONT'D)
OAT SETPOINT FOR
HIGH SAT
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. When the outdoor temperature is
equal to or less than this temperature the Active Supply Air Temperature Setpoint on a Variable
Air Volume Unit will be set to the SAT HIGH SETPOINT.
OAT SETPOINT FOR
LOW SAT
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. When the outdoor temperature
is equal to or greater than this temperature the Active Supply Air Temperature Setpoint on a
Variable Air Volume Unit will be set to the SAT LOW SETPOINT.
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key and is the upper limit of outdoor
OUTSIDE AIR ENTHALPY
enthalpy that can be used for economizer operation. If the outdoor air enthalpy is above this
SETPOINT
value, the economizer is made inactive.
OUTSIDE AIR FLOW
ACTIVE SP
This is the airflow setpoint that the Unit Controller is trying to maintain.
OUTSIDE AIR MAXIMUM
FLOW
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. When air measurement stations
are installed and the unit is in the Demand Ventilation mode, this is the maximum allowable
airflow value.
OUTSIDE AIR MINIMUM
FLOW
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. When air measurement stations
are installed and the unit is in the Demand Ventilation mode, this is the minimum airflow value.
POWER EXHAUST TYPE
This parameter is programmed through the OPTIONS key and tells the Unit Controller what
type of Exhaust is installed. The choices are None, On-Off Damper Cntrl, On-Off Press Cntrl,
Modulate Damper VFD, Return Fan W/Exh, or Return Fan W/O Exh.
PRESS TRANS PKG
This parameter is programmed through the OPTIONS key. This identifies to the Unit Controller
which of the compressor systems are configured with suction and discharge pressure
transducers. The options are None, Sys 1; Sys 1, 2; or Sys 1, 2 and 3.
PRESSURE
DISCHARGE*
This is the discharge pressure and is shown for each compressor system if pressure
transducers are installed and configured for the system.
PRESSURE SUCTION*
This is the suction pressure and is shown for each compressor system if pressure transducers
are installed and configured for the system.
PUMPDOWN
This parameter is programmed through the PROGRAM key. If Pumpdown is USER ENABLED
at the end of the compressor system cycle the solenoid value to the expansion vales will close
and the compressor will continue to operate for 30 seconds or until the low pressure cutout
opens. This removes the refrigerant from the low side of the system. The choices are USER
ENABLED or USER DISABLED. If Pumpdown is ENABLED all compressor system will use
Pumpdown.
RETURN AIR ENTHALPY
This is the total heat content of the return air.
RETURN AIR HUMIDITY
This is the return air relative humidity.
RETURN AIR TEMP
This is the return air dry bulb temperature.
RETURN AIR TEMP
CURRENT
This is the temperature of the return air entering the unit.
RAT HEATING SETPOINT
On a VAV unit, the Unit Controller monitors the RAT HEATING SETPOINT. When the return air
temperature is 0.5 °F below this value the control switches into the Occupied Heating mode.
RAT COOLING
SETPOINT
On a VAV unit, the Unit Controller monitors the RAT COOLING SETPOINT. When the return air
temperature is 0.5 °F above this value the control switches into the Occupied Cooling mode.
RAT SETPOINT FOR
HIGH SAT
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. When the Return Air
Temperature is equal to or LESS than this temperature the Active Supply Air Temperature
Setpoint on a Variable Air Volume Unit will be set to the SAT HIGH SETPOINT.
RAT SETPOINT FOR
LOW SAT
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. When the Return Air
Temperature is equal to or greater than this temperature the Active Supply Air Temperature
Setpoint on a Variable Air Volume Unit will be set to the SAT LOW SETPOINT.
READY TO RUN COMP A
This means the minimum OFF time has been achieved and all the safety circuits are closed
and compressor A of the system is ready to be energized. The User Interface will display either
YES or NO.
READY TO RUN COMP B
This means the minimum OFF time has been achieved and all the safety circuits are closed
and compressor B of the system is ready to be energized. The User Interface will display either
YES or NO
READY TO STOP COMP A
This means the minimum ON time has been achieved and compressor A of the system is
ready to be de-energized. The User Interface will display either YES or NO.
TEMPMASTER
145
7
SECTION 7 – PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS AND OPTIONS
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
TABLE 39 – DEFINITIONS (CONT'D)
READY TO STOP COMP B
This means the minimum ON time has been achieved and compressor B of the system is
ready to be de-energized. The User Interface will display either YES or NO.
REFRIGERANT TYPE
This parameter is programmed through the OPTIONS key and identifies the type of refrigerant
in the unit.
RETURN FAN
PRESSURE ACTIVE SP
This is the current mixed air chamber pressure that the Unit Controller is trying to maintain.
RETURN FAN PRESS
CURRENT
This is the actual pressure in the mixed air chamber of the unit.
RETURN FAN OUTPUT
This is the Binary output from the Unit Controller to the Return Fan control system.
RETURN FAN STATUS
This is a Binary input into the Unit Controller that identifies the Return Fan is functioning.
SAFETY INPUT LPCO
This is the Binary input to the Unit Controller from the Low Pressure Cutout safety circuit. ON
means the safety circuit is normal and FAULTED means it has faulted. This parameter will be
shown for each compressor system.
SAFETY INPUT CHAIN
This is the Binary input to the Unit Controller from the Compressor Safety Circuit Chain. This
includes the high pressure cutout, compressor motor protector, and the external overload or
circuit breaker. ON means the safety circuit is normal and FAULTED means it has faulted. This
parameter will be shown for each compressor system.
SAT RESET METHOD
This parameter is programmed through the OPTIONS key and identifies the Supply Air
Temperature reset method being used on a Variable Air Volume Unit. The choices are
Hardwired, Outside Air, Return Air, or Supply Fan Speed.
SAT HIGH SETPOINT
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. This establishes the maximum
Active Supply Air Temperature to be used in a Variable Air Volume Unit.
SAT LOW SETPOINT
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. This establishes the minimum
Active Supply Air Temperature to be used in a Variable Air Volume Unit.
SENSOR / MISC STATUS
This is the current status of the Sensors. The display will show Normal, Warning, Safety Trip,
Safety Fault, or Safety Lockout.
SINGLE ZONE MINIMUM
VAV SPEED
This parameter provides the minimum speed of the Supple Fan during SZVAV operation.
SMOKE PURGE SEQ 1
This parameter is programmed through the OPTIONS key. This allows the user to select
which of the three smoke purge sequences to use a sequence 1, Purge, Pressurization,
or Evacuation. Smoke Purge Sequence 1 is energized through a Binary input to the Unit
Controller.
SMOKE PURGE SEQ 2
This parameter is programmed through the OPTIONS key. This allows the user to select
which of the three smoke purge sequences to use a sequence 2, Purge, Pressurization,
or Evacuation. Smoke Purge Sequence 2 is energized through a Binary input to the Unit
Controller.
SMOKE PURGE SEQ 3
This parameter is programmed through the OPTIONS key. This allows the user to select
which of the three smoke purge sequences to use a sequence 3, Purge, Pressurization,
or Evacuation. Smoke Purge Sequence 3 is energized through a Binary input to the Unit
Controller.
1ST STAGE COOLING
SETPOINT
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. This value is used in a SZVAV
unit as the Active SAT Setpoint for 1st Stage cooling operation.
1ST STAGE HEATING
SETPOINT
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. This value is used in a SZVAV
unit as the Active SAT Setpoint for 1st Stage heating operation.
2ND STAGE 2 COOLING
SETPOINT
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. This value is used in a SZVAV
unit as the Active SAT Setpoint for 2nd Stage cooling operation.
2ND STAGE 2 HEATING
SETPOINT
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. This value is used in a SZVAV
unit as the Active SAT Setpoint for 2nd Stage heating operation.
STAGED HEAT STATUS
STGS ON
This identifies the number of stages of gas or electric heat that the Unit Controller has
energized.
STAGED HEAT STATUS
STGS AVAIL
This identifies the number of stages of gas or electric heat that are available.
146
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 7 – PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS AND OPTIONS
TABLE 39 – DEFINITIONS (CONT'D)
SUCTION TEMP
This is the temperature of the suction line leaving the evaporator coil and will be shown for
each system. This value is monitored and used to prevent liquid refrigerant from being returned
to the compressor.
SUP AIR TEMPERING
This parameter is programmed through the PROGRAM key. This parameter is used to allow
the heat to operate when the unit is in the Occupied Standby mode to temper the ventilation air
entering the space. The choices are USER ENABLED or USER DISABLED.
SUPPLY AIR TEMP
ACTIVE SP
This is the Supply Air Temperature the Unit Controller is trying to maintain.
SUPPLY AIR TEMP
CURRENT
This is the current Supply Air Temperature supplied by the unit.
SUPPLY FAN OUTPUT
This is the Binary output from the Unit Controller to the Supply Fan control system.
SUPPLY FAN OUTPUT
PROOF
This is a Binary input into the Unit Controller that identifies the Supply Fan is functioning.
SUPPLY FAN VFD SPEED This indicates the output, in percent, to the Supply Fan VFD.
7
SUPPLY SYS STATUS
This is the active status of the Supply System, display will show Normal- Active; NormalInactive; Safety Trip, Safety Fault, or Safety Lockout.
SYSTEM UNLOADING
PRESSURE
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. If two compressors of the
system are operative and the discharge pressure is equal to or greater than this value the Unit
Controller will turn off one of the compressors. This feature is only operative when a discharge
pressure transducer is installed in the compressor system.
TEMPERATURE
SUPERHEAT
This is calculated for each compressor system that has a suction line pressure transducer
installed and configured. This is the refrigerant evaporator superheat leaving the evaporator
coil.
UNIT INSTALLED
ALTITUDE
This parameter is programmed through the SETPOINTS key. This is the altitude at which
the unit is installed. This is used in the calculation of an airflow correction factory when air
measuring stations are installed.
UNIT SIZE
This parameter is programmed through the OPTIONS key and identifies the size of the unit.
UNIT TYPE
This parameter is programmed through the OPTIONS key and identifies the type of unit. The
choices are SZVAV or Variable Air Volume.
UNIT-OVERALL STATUS
This is the active status of the Unit. The display will show Local Stop, Run, Unit Trip, Unit Fault,
Unit Lockout, SMK Purge # - Press, SMK Purge #-Purge, or Smk Purge #-Evac.
VENT SYS STATUS
This is the active status of the Ventilation System. The display will show Normal- Active,
Normal-Inactive, Safety Trip, Safety Fault, Safety Lockout, User Disabled, or None.
VENTILATION CONTROL
This parameter is programmed through the OPTIONS key and identifies whether the unit will
operate with a Fixed Minimum or Demand ventilation system.
VENTILATION DEMAND
This is the output in percent to the outside air damper when the unit is operating in the
Demand Ventilation mode.
ZONE TEMP OCC ZONE
COOLING SETPOINT
This parameter is programmed using the SETPOINTS key. This is the temperature that the
Unit Controller compares the actual space temperature to, to decide when to switch into the
Occupied Cooling Mode.
ZONE TEMP OCC ZONE
HEATING SETPOINT
This parameter is programmed using the SETPOINTS key. This is the temperature that the
Unit Controller compares the actual space temperature to, to decide when to switch into the
Occupied Heating Mode.
ZONE TEMP UNOCC
ZONE COOLING
SETPOINT
This parameter is programmed using the Setpoints key. This is the temperature that the
Unit Controller compares the actual space temperature to, to decide when to switch into the
Unoccupied Cooling Mode.
ZONE TEMP UNOCC
ZONE HEATING
SETPOINT
This parameter is programmed using the Setpoints key. This is the temperature that the
Unit Controller compares the actual space temperature to, to decide when to switch into the
Unoccupied Heating Mode.
ZONE TEMP CURRENT
This is the temperature in the conditioned space.
* May be 1, 2, or 3
TEMPMASTER
147
SECTION 7 – PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS AND OPTIONS
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
148
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 8 – SERVICE
ANALOG INPUT OPERATION
Duct Pressure Transducer
This section describes the control operation of the 29
analog inputs. These inputs are used by the control to
monitor and respond to unit temperatures, pressures,
enthalpy, etc. The location of each of these connections
on the Unit Controller is contained in Table 35 on page
115. Notice that the ID gives the jack connection designated as “J” and then the identifying number of the
connector, followed by a – and then the pin number of
the connector. For example, the SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE analog input would be found at J1-1. This
is connector J1 – Pin 1. As the Unit Controller board is
positioned in the control box the top row of the J series
connectors is the input, the middle row is the common,
and the bottom row is the 5VDC input to the sensor.
Also the pin in the right hand top corner is pin 1.
The Duct Pressure Transducer is locatedin the return
air section of the unit. The purpose of the transducer
is to sense and convert the static pressure in the supply-side of the duct to a 0 to 5VDC voltage. The DC
voltage is sent to the Unit Controller and compared
against the “DUCT STATIC PRESS ACTIVE SP.” The
transducer is factory wired, but pneumatic tubing must
be field supplied and installed (refer to SECTION 2 –
INSTALLATION). The duct static pressure transducer
measures differential pressure between the pressure
in the duct and atmospheric pressure. When verifying
transducer operation, the technician must insert a tee
in the pneumatic tubing and connect a manometer to
the tee to verify the pressure being applied to the transducer. Once this pressure is known, a comparison can
be made of the duct pressure vs. output VDC from the
transducer. Table 39 on page 150 shows the relationship between the pressure applied to the duct pressure
transducer and the output voltage. The output is linear
between 0" W.C. and the SPAN. The “DUCT PRESS
TRANSDUCER SPAN” can be set to 1.25, 2.5 or 5"
W.C.
Temperature Sensors
The temperature sensors are all 10K Type III Thermistors. The relationship between the temperature and the
voltage output and resistance is contained in Table 38
on page 149. The following analog input are of this
type: Supply Air Temperature, Heat Entering Temp,
Outside Air Temp, Return Air Temp, Suction Temp #1,
Suction Temp #2, Suction Temp #3, and Zone Temp.
Table 35 - TEMPERATURE SENSOR RESISTANCE
°F
VOLTAGE
RESISTANCE
°C
°F
VOLTAGE
RESISTANCE
°C
-25
0.49
139,639
-30.6
60
2.51
14,681
15.56
-20
0.53
127,453
-28.9
65
2.66
13,216
18.33
-15
0.60
109,624
-26.1
70
2.80
11,771
21.11
-10
0.69
94,519
-23.34
75
2.94
10,502
23.89
-5
0.78
81,665
-20.55
80
3.08
9,388
26.67
0.0
0.88
70,750
-17.78
85
3.21
8,404
29.45
5
0.98
61,418
-15.00
90
3.33
7,537
32.22
10
1.10
53,426
-12.22
95
3.45
6,770
35.0
15
1.22
46,582
-9.44
100
3.56
6,090
37.78
20
1.35
40,703
-6.67
105
3.66
5,487
40.56
25
1.48
35,639
-3.89
110
3.76
4,951
43.34
30
1.62
31,269
-1.11
115
3.85
4,475
46.11
35
1.77
27,490
1.67
120
3.94
4,050
48.89
40
1.91
24,219
4.44
125
4.02
3,671
51.66
45
2.06
21,377
7.22
130
4.09
3,332
54.44
50
2.21
18,900
10.00
135
4.16
3,029
57.22
55
2.36
16,744
12.78
TEMPMASTER
149
8
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 8 – SERVICE
Table 36 - DUCT PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
1.25" W.C.
SPAN
DIFFERENTIAL
INPUT PRESS
2.5" W.C.
5.0" W.C.
SPAN
SPAN
VOLTAGE
DIFFERENTIAL DIFFERENTIAL
VDC
INPUT PRESS INPUT PRESS
0.125
0.25
0.5
0.50
0.25
0.50
1.0
1.00
0.375
0.75
1.50
1.50
0.50
1.00
2.00
2.00
0.625
1.25
2.50
2.50
0.75
1.50
3.00
3.00
0.875
1.75
3.50
3.50
1.00
2.00
4.00
4.00
1.125
2.25
4.50
4.50
1.25
2.50
5.00
5.00
Building Pressure Transducer
The Building Pressure Transducer is located in the return air section of the unit. The purpose of the transducer is to sense and convert the static pressure in the
building to a 0 to 5VDC voltage. The DC voltage is
then sent to the Unit Controller and compared against
the “BUILDING PRESSURE ACTIVE SETPOINT.”
The transducer is factory wired, but pneumatic tubing
must be field supplied and installed (refer to SECTION
2 – INSTALLATION). The Building Pressure Transducer measures differential pressure in the building and atmospheric pressure. When verifying transducer operation, the technician can insert a tee into the pneumatic
tubing and connect a manometer to the tee to verify
the pressure being applied to the transducer. Once this
pressure is known, a comparison can be made of the
building pressure vs. output VDC from the transducer.
A practical and quick check of this transducer can also
be accomplished by removing the pneumatic tubing
lines from both the low and high side connections on
the transducer. Since both of the inputs will now be
exposed to the same pressure, the differential pressure
will be zero, and the output 2.5VDC according to Table
40 on page 150.
150
Table 37 - BUILDING PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER OUTPUT
DIFFERENTIAL INPUT
PRESSURE - "W.C.
OUPTUT VOLTAGE - VDC
-0.50
-0.40
-0.30
-0.20
-0.10
0.00
0.10
0.20
0.30
0.40
0.50
0.00
0.50
1.00
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
3.50
4.00
4.50
5.00
Return Fan Pressure Transducer
If the unit is order with the Return Fan Option the
unit will have a Return Fan Pressure Transducer. The
transducer is mounted in the return compartment and
compares the pressure in the return air compartment to
atmospheric pressure. The Unit Controller varies the
speed of the Return Fan in order to maintain the correct
differential pressure in the return compartment. When
verifying transducer operation, the technician can insert
a tee into the pneumatic tubing and connect a manometer to the tee to verify the pressure being applied to the
transducer. Once this pressure is known, a comparison
can be made of the return compartment pressure vs.
output VDC from the transducer. A practical and quick
check of this transducer can also be accomplished by
removing the pneumatic tubing lines from both the low
and high side connections on the transducer. Since both
of the inputs will now be exposed to the same pressure,
the differential pressure will be zero, and the output
2.5VDC according to Table 41 on page 150.
Table 38 - RETURN FAN PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER OUTPUT
DIFFERENTIAL INPUT
PRESSURE - "W.C.
OUPTUT VOLTAGE - VDC
-1.00
-0.80
-0.60
-0.40
-0.20
0.00
0.20
0.40
0.60
0.80
1.00
0.00
0.50
1.00
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
3.50
4.00
4.50
5.00
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
Discharge Pressure Transducer
The discharge Pressure Transducer is located in the
common discharge line of the tandem compressors for
each refrigerant circuit. The purpose of this transducer
is to sense and convert the discharge pressure into a
DC voltage. The DC voltage is then sent to the Unit
Controller where it is used to control the number of
condenser fan when the unit is in cooling operation.
The discharge pressure value, in PSIG, is displayed by
the User Interface.
The Discharge Transducer has a range of 0 to 500
PSIG, with a linear output of 0 to 5VDC. Table 42 on
page 151 illustrates the DC volt output from the transducer for a given discharge pressure.
SECTION 8 – SERVICE
Table 39 - PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
SUCTION
TRANSDUCER
DISCHARGE
TRANSDUCER
PRESSURE
PSIG
VOLTAGE
VDC
PRESSURE
PSIG
VOLTAGE
VDC
0
0.50
0
0.50
25
1.00
50
1.00
50
1.50
100
1.50
75
2.00
150
2.00
100
2.50
200
2.50
125
3.00
250
3.00
150
3.50
300
3.50
175
4.00
350
4.00
200
4.50
400
4.50
Suction Pressure Transducer
8
The optional suction pressure transducer is located in
the common suction line of the tandem compressors
for each refrigerant circuit. The purpose of the transducer is to sense and convert the suction pressure to
a DC voltage. The DC voltage is then sent to the Unit
Controller where it is displayed by the User Interface.
When this option is installed the Unit Controller will
also calculate and display the Evaporator Superheat
value for the system.
The Suction Transducer has a range of 0 to 200 PSIG,
with a linear output of 0 to 5VDC. Table 42 on page
151 illustrates the DC volt output from the transducer
for a given suction pressure.
TEMPMASTER
151
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 8 – SERVICE
Humidity Sensors
The humidity sensor outputs a 0 to 5VDC in response
to the relative humidity sensed. An outdoor air humidity sensor is used whenever the economizer is configured for single or dual enthalpy. A return air humidity
sensor is used whenever the economizer is configured
for dual enthalpy. Table 43 on page 152 gives the relationship between the voltage output of the humidity
sensor and the % relative humidity.
CO2 Sensor
Two CO2 sensors are used in conjunction with the
“DEMAND VENTILATION” option. In “DEMAND
VENTILATION” the Unit Controller monitors the CO2
level of the outdoor air and the CO2 level in the conditioned space and varies the amount of ventilation air
based on the relationship between these two values.
Table 44 on page 152 gives the volts DC output for a
given CO2 level.
Furnace Status Input
The Unit Controller monitors the operation of the
Staged and Modulating Gas Heat sections and displays
the status through the STATUS screen of the User Interface. The operation of each of the gas heat sections
is monitored by a multiplexer installed in the gas heat
section. When a gas heat section is energized, it sends
a 24-volt signal to the multiplexer. The multiplexer
takes the five “ON”/”OFF” inputs and converts them
into a 0 to 5VDC signal that is sent to the Unit Controller. The Unit Controller then decodes this analog
input and displays the furnace section status. Table 45
on page 153 and Table 46 on page 153 show the
relationship between the DC voltage and the furnace
operation status.
152
Table 40 - HUMIDITY SENSOR OUTPUTS
%
RELATIVE
HUMIDITY
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
VDC
%
RELATIVE
HUMIDITY
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
VDC
5
0.25
55
2.75
10
0.50
60
3.00
15
0.75
65
3.25
20
1.00
70
3.50
25
1.25
75
3.75
30
1.50
80
4.00
35
1.75
85
4.25
40
2.00
90
4.50
45
2.25
95
4.75
50
2.50
100
5.00
Table 41 - CO2 SENSOR OUTPUT
PPM CO2
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
VDC
PPM CO2
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
VDC
80
0.20
1120
2.80
160
0.40
1200
3.00
240
0.60
1280
3.20
320
0.80
1360
3.40
400
1.00
1440
3.60
480
1.20
1520
3.80
560
1.40
1600
4.00
640
1.60
1680
4.20
720
1.80
1760
4.40
800
2.00
1840
4.60
880
2.20
1920
4.80
960
2.40
2000
5.00
1040
2.60
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 8 – SERVICE
Table 42 - FURNACE STATUS INPUT MODULATING GAS HEAT
MIN VOLTS
DC
MAX VOLTS
DC
MODULATING
FURNACE 1A
STATUS
FURNACE 1A
HIGH
STATUS
FURNACE 2
STATUS
FURNACE 3
STATUS
FURNACE 1B
STATUS
0.086
0.166
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
0.224
0.313
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
0.361
0.461
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
0.499
0.609
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
0.637
0.756
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
0.774
0.904
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
0.912
1.051
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
1.050
1.199
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
1.187
1.346
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
1.325
1.494
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
1.463
1.641
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1.600
1.789
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1.738
1.936
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
1.876
2.084
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
2.013
2.231
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
2.151
2.379
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
2.289
2.526
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
2.426
2.674
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
2.564
2.821
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
2.702
2.969
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
2.839
3.116
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
2.977
3.264
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
3.115
3.411
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
3.252
3.559
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
3.390
3.706
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
3.528
3.854
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
3.665
4.001
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
3.803
4.149
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
3.941
4.296
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
4.078
4.444
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
4.216
4.592
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
4.354
4.739
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
8
Table 43 - FURNACE STATUS INPUT STAGED GAS HEAT
MIN VOLTS DC
MAX VOLTS DC
FURNACE 1 STATUS
FURNACE 2 STATUS
FURNACE 3 STATUS
0.086
0.166
OFF
OFF
OFF
0.224
0.313
ON
OFF
OFF
0.361
0.461
OFF
ON
OFF
0.499
0.609
ON
ON
OFF
0.637
0.756
OFF
OFF
ON
0.774
0.904
ON
OFF
ON
0.912
1.051
OFF
ON
ON
1.050
1.199
ON
ON
ON
TEMPMASTER
153
SECTION 8 – SERVICE
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
FAULTS
A fault is defined as an abnormal condition, which
results in the shutdown of an operating system or the
complete unit. The presence of a fault condition indicates a situation in which possible damage to the unit
may occur if the unit or system were allowed to continue to operate. There are four types of faults.
• UNIT LOCKOUT – The complete unit is shutdown and locked out. A manual reset is required
to restart the unit after the fault has been corrected.
• SYSTEM LOCKOUT – One of the compressor systems or other component is shutdown and
locked out. A manual reset is required to restart
the system after the fault has been corrected.
• UNIT AUTO RESET – The complete unit is shutdown but the unit will restart automatically when
the fault condition is cleared.
• SYSTEM AUTO RESET – One of the compressor systems or other component is shut down but
the system or component will restart automatically when the fault condition is cleared.
A UNIT LOCKOUT can be reset by turning the “LOCAL STOP” switch OFF for 5 seconds and then back
ON. If the cause of the lockout has been corrected the
unit will reset and begin proper operation.
A SYSTEM LOCKOUT except for COMPR # LOCKOUT and COMPR # LPCO SAFETY LOCKOUT can
be reset by turning the “LOCAL STOP” switch OFF
for 5 seconds and then back ON. A COMPR # LOCKOUT and COMPR # LPCO SAFETY LOCKOUT
must be reset by entering the OPTIONS key and the
COMPRESSOR SYSTEMS # subsection, which has
the lockout. Then use the up and down arrow key to go
to COMP SYS # STATUS. The current status will be
LOCKOUT. Press the check key (√) and use the right
arrow key to change LOCKOUT to RUN.
In addition to faults the User Interface will also display
warnings. A warning is defined as an abnormal condition under which the unit continues to operate. Warnings will not require the unit to shut down; however,
they may require the Unit Controller to disable certain
functions that may result in the unit operating less efficiently or eliminate certain features.
Table 49 on page 161 lists the faults / warnings that
will be displayed under the STATUS and HISTORY
keys of the User Interface. When a fault is present line
154
two of the effected STATUS screen display (UNITOVERALL STATUS, COMPRESSOR SYSTEM 1,
COMPRESSOR SYSTEM 2, COMPRESSOR SYSTEM 3, HEATING SYSTEM, ECONOMIZER SYSTEM, SUPPLY SYSTEM, EXHAUST SYSTEM,
VENTILATION SYSTEM, or SENSOR / MISC STATUS) will change nomenclature to indicate a WARNING, SAFETY TRIP, SAFETY FAULT, or SAFETY
LOCKOUT is present. A fault / warning description,
method of reset and conditions under which the information is displayed is also contained in the table. Additional information for each of the faults is contained
under their respective segment of SECTION 5 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION located in this IOM.
When a fault is declared, the Unit Controller will record the time of occurrence, the date of occurrence,
and a complete unit snapshot at the time of each occurrence in the HISTORY buffer. This data can be retrieved using the HISTORY key of the User Interface.
The HISTORY buffer stores the data from the last ten
faults from the most recent (HISTORY 01) to the oldest (HISTORY 10). No fault HISTORY is eliminated
once recorded other than being “pushed off” of the end
of the list by a new fault when the buffer becomes full.
Warnings are only displayed in the HISTORY buffer
while they are active. When the problem that generated
the WARNING is corrected the record is removed from
the buffer. The Unit Controller does not record the time
of occurrence, the date of occurrence, or a complete
unit snapshot at the time of occurrence for a WARNING.
The HISTORY buffer is password protected and a level
2 password must be entered in order to view the data.
When the HISTORY key is pressed, the password
prompt will appear. After the proper level 2 password
has been entered the screen will show the first active
warning. If there are no active warnings present, the
first fault will be displayed. If there are no faults in
the HISTORY buffer, the screen will display “NO
FAULT.” For menu navigation and display description,
see History on page 123 for additional information on
how to navigate through the HISTORY menu.
In addition to the items listed in Table 49 on page 161
,the following items listed below are contained under
the HISTORY key.
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 8 – SERVICE
“COMPRESSOR SYSTEM (1,2, OR 3) CLEAR” Whenever there is a compressor safety trip the Unit
Controller initiates the “COMPR STATUS CLEAR
TIME (1,2, OR 3)” timer. The Unit Controller records
the time it takes for the trip to clear. When the fault
clears “COMPRESSOR SYSTEM (1,2, OR 3) CLEAR”
shows the time it took for the fault to clear in the HISTORY buffer.
pressor circuit over current protector is a manual reset
device and the circuit would not reset in the required 60
minute time frame. The STATUS key will display the
message “COMP SYS (1,2, OR 3) STATUS” “SAFETY
LOCKOUT.” The Unit Controller locks out the corresponding compressor system when a “COMPRESSOR
SYSTEM (1,2, OR 3)TIME OUT” is declared.
“COMPR SYSTEM (1,2, OR 3) INHIBIT” – This
WARNING indicates the compressor system safety
circuit experienced a trip but reset prior to the exploration of the 60 minute reset time function. If the safety
circuit does not reset in 60 minutes it will be replaced
with a “COMPRESSOR SYSTEM (1,2, OR 3)TIME
OUT” message.
“COMPRESSOR SYSTEM (1,2, OR 3)TIME OUT” –
If the “COMPR STATUS CLEAR TIME (1,2, OR 3)”
timer reaches 60 minutes a “COMPRESSOR SYSTEM
(1,2, OR 3) TIME OUT” will be indicated in the HISTORY buffer. In most cases this indicates the compressor circuit over current protector opened. The com-
BINARY
OUTPUTS
See Figure 44See
on Figure
page 156
43
BINARY
INPUTS
See
Figure
See
Figure
44 45 on page 157
8
12 VDC FUSE
J11-3 12 VDC
TB8
J11-1 GND
TB4
TB1
TB6
TB7
BINARY
OUTPUTS
See
44
See Figure
Figure 43
TB3
on page 157
I/O
TB9
ANALOG
OUTPUTS
See Figure
Figure45
46
See
on page 157
TB5
on page 156
BINARY
INPUTS
See Figure
Figure44
45
J7
J6
FLASH CARD
IPU
J5
J1
J2
J3
J4
ANALOG
INPUTS
See Figure
Figure46
47
on page 157
J12-1 GND
J12-3 5VDC
5 VDC FUSE
ANALOG
INPUTS
See Figure
Figure46
47
See
LD10790B
on page 157
Figure 42 - I/O CONTROL BOARD
TEMPMASTER
155
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 8 – SERVICE
TB1-1 24V (303)
TB1-2 SUPPLY FAN (108)
TB1-3 24V (303)
TB1-4 EXHAUST/RETURN FAN (109)
TB1-5 SUPPLY FAN FAULT ALARM (417)
TB1-6 SUPPLY FAN FAULT ALARM (418)
TB1-7 COOLING/HEATING FAULT ALARM COMM (419)
TB1-8 COOLING/HEATING FAULT ALARM (420)
TB1-9 SENSOR/FAULT ALARM COMM (421)
TB1-10 SENSOR/FAULT ALARM (422)
TB1-11 VAV HEAT COMM (423)
TB1-12 VAV HEAT OUTPUT (424)
TB6-4 COND 5 (441)
24 V TB3-1 (500)
TB3-3 FURN OUTPUT 2 (390)
TB3-5 FURN OUTPUT 4 (392)
TB3-7 FURN OUTPUT 5 (393)
TB3-9 FURN OUTPUT 7 (395)
120V TB6-1(1)
TB6-3 COND 4 (440)
TB6-5 COND 6 (442)
TB4
TB6
TB6-2 COND 3 (439)
TB4-9 COND 1 (437)
TB3-2 FURN OUTPUT 1 (389)
TB3-4 FURN OUTPUT 3 (391)
24 V TB3-6 (500)
TB3
TB4-10 COND 2 (438)
TB4-7 COMP 3A (433)
TB3-8 FURN OUTPUT 6 (394)
1LLSV TB5-2 (443)
2LLSV TB5-4 (444)
3LLSV TB5-6 (445)
120 V TB5-1 (1)
120 V TB5-3 (1)
120 V TB5-5 (1)
I/O CONTROL
TB5
TB4-8 COMP 3B (435)
9
120V TB4-6 (1)
TB4-3 COMP 1B (427)
TB4-5 COMP 2B (431)
7
TB4-4 COMP 2A (429)
TB8
TB4-2 COMP 1A (425)
TB1
120V TB4-1 (1)
J7
J6
LD10791C
J5
J2
J1
TEMPMASTER
J3
156
J4
IPU CONTROL
Figure 43 - I/O CONTROL BOARD - BINARY OUTPUTS
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 8 – SERVICE
TB8-16 24V COMM (4)
TB8-14 W2 (400)
TB8-13 W1 (399)
TB8-11 Y2 (398)
TB8-10 Y1 (397)
See Fig. 8-2
TB8-8 FAN (G) (396)
TB8-7 SMOKE PURGE 3 (395)
BINARY
OUTPUTS
TB8-5 SMOKE PURGE 2 (394)
TB8-4 SMOKE PURGE 1 (393)
TB8-2 OCC/UNOCC (392)
TB8-1 SHUTDOWN (391)
TB1
TB8
TB4
TB7-16 24V COMM (4)
TB7-15 24VAC (389)
TB7-14 HOTWATER FREEZESTAT (388)
TB7-13 DIRTY FILTER SW (387)
TB7-12 24VAC (386)
TB7-11 EXHAUST RETURN FAN PROVING (385)
TB7-10 SUPPLY FAN PROVING (384)
TB7-9 24VAC (383)
TB7-8 SYS 3 LOW PRESS (382)
TB7-7 SYS 2 LOW PRESS (381)
TB7-6 24VAC (380)
TB7-5 SYS 1 LOW PRESS (379)
TB7-4 SYS 3 COMP STATUS (378)
TB7-3 24 VAC (3)
TB7-2 SYS 2 COMP STATUS (377)
TB7-1 SYS 1 COMP STATUS (376)
I/O CONTROL
TB6
TB7
8
See Fig. 8-4
Figure 44 - I/O CONTROL BOARD - BINARY INPUTS
TB9
ANALOG
OUTPUTS
TB3
LD10792B
TB5
TB9-12 BYPASS DAMPER COM (412)
TB9-11 BYPASS DAMPER + (411)
TB9-10 HOT WATER STEAM VALVE COM (410)
TB9-9 HOT WATER STEAM VALVE + (409)
TB9-8 EXHAUST DAMPER COM (408)
TB9-7 EXHAUST DAMPER + (407)
TB9-6 OA/RA DAMPER COM (406)
TB9-5 OA/RA DAMPER + (405)
TB9-4 EXHAUST/RETURN VFD COM (404)
TB9-3 EXHAUST/RETURN VFD + (403)
TB9-2 SUPPLY FAN VFD COM (402)
TB9-1 SUPPLY FAN VFD + (401)
J7
TB9
J6
See Fig. 8-5
ANALOG
INPUTS
I/O CONTROL
J5
IPU CONTROL
LD10793A
J4
J3
J2
J1
Figure 45 - I/O CONTROL BOARD - ANALOG OUTPUTS
J7
See Fig. 8-5
ANALOG
INPUTS
9
10
11
12
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
J6
I/O CONTROL
11
12
13
14
15
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
J5
J1, J2, J3 PINOUTS
J1
J2
J3
J4
J4, J5, J6, J7 PINOUTS
LD10794A
Figure 46 - I/O CONTROL BOARD - ANALOG INPUTS (SEE TABLE 49 FOR PIN OUTS)
TEMPMASTER
157
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 8 – SERVICE
Table 44 - I/O CONTROL BOARD - ANALOG INPUT PIN OUTS
PIN
NUMBER
158
SIGNAL
PIN
NUMBER
SIGNAL
J1-1
Input Supply Air Temp (308)
J4-8
Com Disch Press Sys1 (338)
J1-5
Shield Supply Air Temp
J4-13
Ref Disch Press Sys1 5VDC (339)
J1-9
Ref Supply Air Temp 5VDC (309)
J4-4
Input Disch Press Sys2 (340)
J1-2
Input Heat Enter Temp (310)
J4-9
Com Disch Press Sys2 (341)
J1-6
Shield Heat Enter Temp
J4-14
Ref Disch Press Sys2 5VDC (342)
J1-10
Ref Heat Enter Temp 5VDC (311)
J4-5
Input Disch Press Sys3 (343)
J2-1
Input Outside Air Temp (314)
J4-10
Com Disch Press Sys3 (344)
J2-5
Shield Outside Air Temp
J4-15
Ref Disch Press Sys3 5VDC (345)
J2-9
Ref Outside Air Temp 5VDC (315)
J5-1
Input Gas Heat Status (542)
J2-2
Input Return Air Temp (316)
J5-6
Com Gas Heat Status (543)
J2-6
Shield Return Air Temp
J5-11
Ref Gas Heat Status 5VDC (541)
J2-10
Ref Return Air Temp 5VDC (317)
J5-2
Input OA Co2 (348)
J2-3
Input OA Hum (318)
J5-7
Com OA Co2 (349)
J2-7
Com OA Hum (319)
J5-3
Input RA Co2 (350)
J2-4
Input RA Hum (320)
J5-8
Com RA Co2 (351)
J2-8
Com RA Hum (321)
J6-1
Input Return Fan Press (352)
J3-1
Input Suct Temp Sys1 (322)
J6-6
Com Return Fan Press (353)
J3-5
Shield Suct Temp Sys1
J6-2
Input Duct Press (354)
J3-9
Ref Suct Temp Sys1 5VDC (323)
J6-7
Com Duct Press (355)
J3-2
Input Suct Temp Sys2 (324)
J6-3
Input Bldg Press (356)
J3-6
Shield Suct Temp Sys2
J6-8
Com Bldg Press (357)
J3-10
Ref Suct Temp Sys2 5VDC (325)
J6-4
Input OA Air Press 1 (358)
J3-3
Input Suct Temp Sys3 (326)
J6-9
Com OA Air Press 1 (359)
J3-7
Shield Suct Temp Sys3
J6-5
Input OA Air Press 2 (360)
J3-11
Ref Suct Temp Sys3 5VDC (327)
J6-10
Com OA Air Press 2 (361)
J3-4
Input Suct Press Sys1 (328)
J7-1
Input Zone Temp Sensor (363)
J3-8
Com Suct Press Sys1 (329)
J7-6
Shield Zone Temp Sensor (364)
J3-12
Ref Suct Press Sys1 5VDC (330)
J7-11
Ref Zone Temp Sensor 5VDC (362)
J4-1
Input Suct Press Sys2 (331)
J7-4
Input SAT Reset (371)
J4-6
Com Suct Press Sys2 (332)
J7-9
Com SAT Reset (372)
J4-11
Ref Suct Press Sys2 5VDC (333)
J7-14
Ref SAT Reset 5VDC (370)
J4-2
Input Suct Press Sys3 (334)
J7-5
Input Duct Static Reset (374)
J4-7
Com Suct Press Sys3 (335)
J7-10
Com Duct Static Reset (375)
J4-12
Ref Suct Press Sys3 5VDC (336)
J7-15
Ref Duct Static Reset 5VDC (373)
J4-3
Input Disch Press Sys1 (337)
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 8 – SERVICE
Table 45 - WARNING DESCRIPTION TABLE
HISTORY
SCREEN
WORDING
DESCRIPTION
RESET
SHOW WHEN
UNIT TYPE IS
STATUS
SCREEN
WORDING
FAULT
OUTPUT
TYPE
WRN-BUILDING
PRS
Building static pres> 0.45" W.C. or <
-0.45" W.C. for 10 seconds. Power
exhaust reverts to none or on/off
Auto
Reset
Power Exhaust
Other Than
None Or On - Off
Damper
Exhaust
Sys Status
Warning
Sensor/
Misc
Fault
WRN-CO2
SENSOR 1
OUTSIDE
Outside CO2 sensor out of range for >=
15 minutes
Auto
Reset
Ventilation Control
Equals Demand
Ventilation
Sys Status
Warning
Sensor/
Misc
Fault
WRN-CO2
SENSOR 2
INSIDE
Outside CO2 sensor out of range for >=
15 minutes
Auto
Reset
Ventilation Control
Equals Demand
Ventilation
Sys Status
Warning
Sensor/
Misc
Fault
WRN-COMPR
SYSTEM *
INHIBIT
See description at the end of this table
Auto
Reset
WRN-DIRTY
FILTER 1
The filter status input is closed for >= 1
minute
Auto
Reset
Dirty Filter Switch
Is Installed
Filter Status
Change
Sensor/
Misc
Fault
WRNThe discharge pressure for that system
DISCHARGE PRS
is out of range for >= 10 seconds
SENSOR *
Auto
Reset
Press Trans Pkg
Is On For The
System
Sensor/
Misc Status
Warning
Sensor/
Misc
Fault
WRN-DUCT PRS
XDCR
Supply fan output on, supply fan status
must be running for 5 minutes, static
press current <=(0.333 X duct static
press active sp) for 30 seconds
Auto
Reset
Unit Type Is VAV
Supply
Sys Status
Warning
Fan Fault
WRN-EXHAUST
FAN
The exhaust fan output is on for 45
seconds and the run verification input is
low (open) for 10 seconds
Auto
Reset
Power Exhaust
Other Than None
Exhaust
System Status
Warning
Sensor/
Misc
Fault
WRNFREEZESTAT
TRIP
The hw/steam freezstat circuit goes
high (closed) but goes low (open) within
5 minutes
Auto
Reset
Heating System
Type Equals Hot
Water Steam
Sensor/
Misc Status
Warning
Cooling
Heating
Fault
WRN-FURNACE
MULTIPLEXER
FAULT
On modulating gas the heat binary
outputs do not match the gas furnace
status input. See Table 46 on page
153 for furnace status input on staged
heat
Auto
Reset
Heating System
Type Equals
Modulating Gas Or
Staged Gas
Sensor/
Misc Status
Warning
Cooling
Heating
Fault
WRN-GAS
FURNACE
The heat binary outputs do not match
the gas furnace status input. See Table
46 on page 153
Auto
Reset
Heating System
Type Equals
Staged Gas
WRN-HET
SENSOR
The heat entering sensor is out of range
for >= 10 seconds
Auto
Reset
Heating System
Type Is Staged
Gas Or Electric
Sensor/
Misc Status
Warning
Sensor/
Misc
Fault
WRN-HIGH DP
UNLOAD *#
Both compressor are on for the system
and the discharge press is >= to the
system unloading pressure for 10
seconds
Auto
Reset
Press Trans Pkg
Is On For The
System
Sensor/
Misc Status
Warning
Sensor/
Misc
Fault
WRN-LOW
AMBIENT TEMP *
The outdoor temp is <= to the mech
cool lockout temp
Auto
Reset
Low Ambient Pkg
Is Not Installed For
The System
Comp Sys *
Status Low
Amb Inhibit
Sensor/
Misc
Fault
WRN-LOW
SUCTION TEMP
*#
The suction temp is less than the
suction temp low limit for 10 continuous
seconds
Auto
Reset
Comp Sys *
Status Suction
Temp Unl # On
Sensor/
Misc
Fault
TEMPMASTER
Cooling
Heating
Fault
Cooling
Heating
Fault
159
8
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 8 – SERVICE
TABLE 50 – WARNING DESCRIPTION TABLE (CONT'D)
HISTORY
SCREEN
WORDING
RESET
SHOW WHEN
UNIT TYPE IS
STATUS
SCREEN
WORDING
FAULT
OUTPUT
TYPE
WRN-OA FLOW
PRS 1
Refer to air measurement station
sensor faults in SECTION 5 –
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION of the
manual
Locks Out
The Air
Measuring
Station
Damper Hardware
Is Minimum Iaq,
Full Iaq, 1/3-2/3
Iaq, Tek Air Full
Iaq
Sensor/
Misc Status
Warning
Sensor/
Misc
Fault
WRN-OA FLOW
PRS 2
Refer to air measurement station
sensor faults in SECTION 5 –
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION of the
manual
Locks Out
The Air
Measuring
Station
Damper Hardware
Is 1/3 - 2/3 Iaq
Sensor/
Misc Status
Warning
Sensor/
Misc
Fault
WRN-OUTSIDE
AIR RH
Outside air temp >= 32.0 °F for 10
seconds outdoor air humidity < 5% for
10 seconds
Auto
Reset
Econo Installed
Single Enthalpy Or
Dual Enthalpy
Sensor/
Misc Status
Warning
Sensor/
Misc
Fault
WRN-RETURN
AIR RH
Return air temp >= 32.0 °F for 10
seconds
return air humidity < 5% for
10 seconds
Auto
Reset
Econo Installed
Dual Enthalpy
Sensor/
Misc Status
Warning
Sensor/
Misc
Fault
WRN-RETURN
FAN XDCR
Supply fan output is on and return fan
press current < -0.95" W.C. or >0.95"
W.C. for 30 seconds or supply fan
output is off and return fan pressure
current < -0.1" W.C. or >0.1" W.C. for 5
minutes
Auto
Reset
Power Exhaust
Type Is Return
Fan W/Exh Or
Return Fan W/O
Exh
Supply
Sys Status
Warning
Fan Fault
WRN-SUCTION
PRS SENSOR *
Suction pressure out of range for >= 10
seconds
Auto
Reset
Press Trans Pkg
Is On For The
System
Sensor/
Misc Status
Warning
Sensor/
Misc
Fault
WRN-SUCTION
TEMP SENSOR
*#
Suction temperature sensor is out of
range for >= 10 seconds
Auto
Reset
Sensor/
Misc Status
Warning
Sensor/
Misc
Fault
DESCRIPTION
* Can Be 1, 2, Or 3 # Can Be A Or B
160
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 8 – SERVICE
Table 46 - FAULT AUTO - RESET
HISTORY
SCREEN
WORDING
DESCRIPTION
AUTO RESETCOMPRESSOR
See description below
SYSTEM * CLEAR
RESET
HOW WHEN UNIT
TYPE IS
STATUS
SCREEN
WORDING
FAULT
OUTPUT
TYPE
Auto
Reset
AUTO RESETCOMPRESS
SYSTEM * TRIP 1
The safety input chain is open (faulted)
for more than two seconds with either or
both compressor of the system on and
this is the first trip in a 120 minute span
Auto
Reset
Comp System
* Status Safety
Trip
Cooling
Heating
Fault
AUTO RESET
COMPRESSOR
SYSTEM * TRIP 2
The safety input chain is open (faulted)
for more than two seconds with either or
both compressor of the system on and
this is the second trip in a 120 minute
span
Auto
Reset
Comp System
* Status Safety
Trip
Cooling
Heating
Fault
AUTO RESETLOW SUCTION
TEMP
Compressor is on and the temperature
- suction is less than or equal to the
suction low limit for 10 continuous
seconds and after the compressor was
turned off the temperature did not rise
above the limit.
Auto
Reset
Comp System
Sensor/
* Status Safety
Misc Fault
Fault
AUTO RESETLPCO * TRIP 1
The low pressure cutout input chain
is open (faulted) for more than two
seconds with either or both compressor
of the system on and this is the first trip
in a 120 minute span
Auto
Reset
Comp System
* Status Safety
Trip
Cooling
Heating
Fault
Auto
Reset
Comp System
* Status Safety
Trip
Cooling
Heating
Fault
Sensor/Misc
Status Safety
Fault
Sensor/
Misc Fault
AUTO RESET POWER FAIL
The low pressure cutout input chain
is open (faulted) for more than two
seconds with either or both compressor
of the system on and this is the second
trip in a 120 minute span
Power is lost when the unit operating
state is run
AUTO RESET RAT SENSOR
Return air temp current sensor is out of
range for >= 10 seconds
Auto
Reset
AUTO RESET
- REMOTE I/O
COMM
No communication from the i/o board for
>= 5 seconds
Auto
Reset
AUTO RESET STAGED INPUT
The control has a cooling and heating
thermostat input at the same time for a
period greater than 10 seconds
Auto
Reset
AUTO RESETLPCO * TRIP 2
AUTO RESET
- ZONE TEMP
SENSOR
Zone temp current sensor is out of range
for >= 10 seconds
Auto
Reset
Auto
Reset
Sensor/
Misc Fault
Unit Type Is VAV And
Night Set Back is User
Enabled Or Unit Type
Is Set To SZVAV And
The Control Method
Is Set To Zone Sensor
Hardwired
Sensor/Misc
Status Safety
Lockout
Sensor/
Misc Fault
Sensor/Misc
Status Safety
Lockout
Sensor/
Misc Fault
* Can Be 1, 2, Or 3
TEMPMASTER
161
8
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 8 – SERVICE
Table 47 - FAULTS LOCKOUT
HISTORY SCREEN
WORDING
DESCRIPTION
RESET
SHOW WHEN
UNIT TYPE IS
STATUS
SCREEN
WORDING
FAULT
OUTPUT
TYPE
LOCKOUTCOMPRESSOR
SYSTEM * TIME
OUT
See below
System
Lockout
Comp System *
- Safety Lockout
Cooling
Heating
Fault
LOCKOUT COMPRESSOR
SYSTEM *
High press SW, comp motor protector,
or overcurrent protector open - 3 times
in 120 minutes on comp system *
System
Lockout
Comp System *
- Safety Lockout
Cooling
Heating
Fault
LOCKOUT-HIGH
DUCT PRESSURE
Duct static press current + duct static
over pressure
Unit
Lockout
Unit Type Is VAV
Supply Sys
Status Safety
Lockout
Fan Fault
LOCKOUT - HOT
WATER FREEZE
The hydronic freeze stat switch
remained closed >= 5 minutes
Unit
Lockout
Heat Type Hot
Water / Steam
Heating Sys
Status - Safety
Lockout
Cooling
Heating
Fault
LOCKOUT-LPCO
Low pressure cutout open - 3 times in
120 minutes on compr system *
System
Lockout
Comp System *
- Safety Lockout
Cooling
Heating
Fault
LOCKOUT MANUAL STOP *
The compressor system has been
placed in the stop mode either
through the user interface or by a
communicated input
System
Lockout
Comp Sys *
Status Disabled
LOCKOUT MANUAL UNIT
STOP
The unit is shut down through the
shut down switch on the unit or by an
external hardwired or communicated
input
Unit
Lockout
Unit - Overall
Status Local
Stop
Unit
Lockout
Comp Sys *
Status Safety
Lockout; Econo
Sys Status
Safety Lockout
Sensor/
Misc
Fault
Unit - Overall
Status Unit
Lockout
Fan Fault
LOCKOUT - OAT
SENSOR
Outside air temp sensor is out of
range for >= 10 seconds
LOCKOUT RETURN FAN
Return fan status is low and time from
start >= 30 sec unit lockout
Unit
Lockout
Power Exhaust
Type Is Return
Fan W/Exh or
Return Fan W/O
Exh And The
Supply Fan Is On
LOCKOUT - SAT
SENSOR
Supply air temp current sensor is out
of range for >= 10 seconds
Unit
Lockout
Unit Type Is
SZVAV or Variable
Air Volume
LOCKOUTSUPPLY FAN
Supply fan status is low and time from
start > = 30 sec unit lockout
Unit
Lockout
Sensor/
Misc
Fault
Unit - Overall
Status Unit
Lockout
Fan Fault
* Can be 1, 2, or 3
“WRN - COMP SYSTEM * INHIBIT” - This WARNING indicates the compressor system safety circuit experienced a trip but reset prior to the
exploration of the 60 minute reset time function. If the safety circuit does not reset in 60 minutes it will be replaced with a “LOCKOUT - COMPRESSOR SYSTEM * TIME OUT” message.
“AUTO RESET - COMPRESSOR SYSTEM * CLEAR” - Whenever there is a compressor safety trip the Primary Unit Controller initiates the
“COMPR STATUS CLEAR TIME *” timer. The Primary Unit Controller records the time it takes for the trip to clear. When the fault clears “COMPRESSOR SYSTEM * CLEAR” shows the time it took for the fault to clear in the HISTORY buffer.
“LOCKOUT-COMPRESSOR SYSTEM * TIME OUT” – If the “COMPR STATUS CLEAR TIME *” timer reaches 60 minutes a “LOCKOUT COMPRESSOR SYSTEM * TIME OUT” will be indicated in the HISTORY buffer.
162
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 8 – SERVICE
MULTI MEDIA CARD
The Unit Controller is made up of two separate control
boards, the PLUG IN I/O board and the IPU board. All
the digital and analog inputs and outputs are connected
to the PLUG IN I/O control. All the system logic is
contained on the PLUG IN I/O board. The IPU board
mounts on top of the PLUG IN I/O board and handles
the communication between the PLUG IN I/O board
and the User Interface. Another feature of this control
system is the availability to connect a MULTI MEDIA
CARD to the IPU board. The MULTI MEDIA CARD
allows operational data to be continuously saved and
used for the diagnosis of unit operating problems.
A MULTI MEDIA CARD is similar to a hard drive in
a PC. It has a directory structure and files are saved on
it. The difference between a hard drive and the MULTI
MEDIA CARD is that the MULTI MEDIA CARD is
made of non-volatile flash memory. This allows the
MULTI MEDIA CARD to be removed from the IPU
board and placed in a PC for data analysis without the
lost of any data.
The MULTI MEDIA CARD is considered a Service
tool and as such is controlled through the SERVICE
key of the User Interface. Entry into the SERVICE
screen requires a Level 2 password.
Data is continuously stored to the MULTI MEDIA
CARD in root and subdirectories. The root directories
are set up by month and year, under each of the root directories are subdirectories for each day. For example
the data for January 11, 2005 would be stored in a root
directory identified by Rm200501, the year followed
by the month. The subdirectory for this day would be
identified as 20050111.csv, the year followed by the
month, followed by the day. Each of these files contains all the data monitored for the day specified by the
file name.
The collected data can be analyzed using a PC. The
MULTI MEDIA CARD can be inserted into a MULTI
MEDIA CARD reader attached to the PC. The data can
be analyzed using Excel or another data analysis tool.
To install or remove the MULTI MEDIA CARD from
the IPU board “DATA LOG FORMAT” must be set to
OFF. This is done through the SERVICE screen of the
User Interface. When the MULTI MEDIA CARD is installed the operation can be programmed to “UNCOMPRESSED” in which case data will be recorded every
5 seconds or “SKIP UNCHANGED” which is the same
as “UNCOMPRESSED” except values are only saved
when they change.
If an error occurs when writing to the MULTI MEDIA
CARD, “DATA LOG ERROR STATE” and “DATA LOG
ERROR DETAIL” will appear under the SERVICE
screen. “DATA LOG ERROR STATE” indicates what
operation failed and “DATA LOG ERROR DETAIL”
will give the error code from the operation. Table 51
on page 164 gives a description of the “DATA LOG
ERROR STATE” and Table 52 on page 164 gives a description of the “DATA LOG ERROR DETAIL.”
The SD card cannot exceed 2 MB for data
logging or software updates. Not all SD
cards are compatible with the IPU system.
All connected Analog Inputs, Analog Outputs, Digital
Inputs, Digital Outputs, Serial Data and Derived Data
will be collected. The data will be collected once every
5 seconds and stored in the same order as in the History buffer. Each line of data will be timed and date
stamped. Each file will include a header line detailing
what data is stored in each column.
TEMPMASTER
163
8
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
SECTION 8 – SERVICE
Table 48 - DATA LOG ERROR STATE
DATA LOG
ERROR STATE
DATA LOG
ERROR DETAIL
THIS ERROR OCCURRED:
1
Mounting the flash card
1
Not permitted
2
Opening the root directory
2
No such entity
3
Reading the root directory
3
No such process
4
Closing the root directory
4
Operation interrupted
5
Opening a sub-directory
5
I/O error
6
Reading a sub-directory
6
Bad file handle
7
Closing a sub-directory
11
Try again later
8
Deleting an old directory
12
Out of memory
11
Creating a directory
16
Resource busy
14
Creating a file
19
No such device
15
Open a file
20
Not a directory
16
Write a file
21
Is a directory
17
Delete a file
22
Invalid argument
Close a file
23
Too many open files in system
27
File too large
28
No space left on device
29
Illegal seek
30
Read-only file system
60
File name too long
18
164
AN ERROR OCCURRED
WHEN DOING THIS:
Table 49 - DATA LOG ERROR LOG DETAIL
TEMPMASTER
FORM TPM2-NOM1
ISSUE DATE: 9/29/2017
The following factors can be used to convert from
English to the most common SI Metric values.
Table 50 - SI METRIC CONVERSION
MEASUREMENT
MULTIPLY ENGLISH UNIT
BY FACTOR
TO OBTAIN METRIC UNIT
Capacity
Tons Refrigerant Effect (ton)
3.516
Kilowatts (kW)
Power
Horsepower
0.7457
Kilowatts (kW)
Flow Rate
Gallons / Minute (gpm)
0.0631
Liters / Second (l/s)
Feet (ft)
0.3048
Meters (m)
Inches (in)
25.4
Millimeters (mm)
Weight
Pounds (lbs)
0.4538
Kilograms (kg)
Velocity
Feet / Second (fps)
0.3048
Meters / Second (m/s)
Feet of Water (ft)
2.989
Kilopascals (kPa)
Pounds / Square Inch (psi)
6.895
Kilopascals (kPa)
Length
Pressure Drop
TEMPERATURE
To convert degrees Fahrenheit (°F) to degrees Celsius
(°C), subtract 32° and multiply by 5/9 or 0.5556.
Example: (45.0 °F - 32°) x 0.5556 = 7.22 °C
To convert a temperature range (i.e., a range of 10.0 °F)
from Fahrenheit to Celsius, multiply by 5/9 or 0.5556.
Example: 10.0 °F range x 0.5556 = 5.6 °C range
TEMPMASTER
165
P.O. Box 1592, York, Pennsylvania USA 17405-1592
Copyright © by TempMaster 2017
Form TPM2-NOM1 (917)
Issue Date: September 29, 2017
NEW RELEASE
844-608-3387
www.tempmasterhvac.com
Subject to change without notice. Printed in USA
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED